WO2019230345A1 - Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method - Google Patents

Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019230345A1
WO2019230345A1 PCT/JP2019/018816 JP2019018816W WO2019230345A1 WO 2019230345 A1 WO2019230345 A1 WO 2019230345A1 JP 2019018816 W JP2019018816 W JP 2019018816W WO 2019230345 A1 WO2019230345 A1 WO 2019230345A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
acid
layer
photosensitive
resin layer
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2019/018816
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
藤本 進二
漢那 慎一
壮二 石坂
一真 両角
克己 篠田
知樹 松田
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2020521825A priority Critical patent/JP7102517B2/en
Priority to CN201980035400.7A priority patent/CN112204468A/en
Publication of WO2019230345A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019230345A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F20/00Homopolymers and copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and only one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical or a salt, anhydride, ester, amide, imide or nitrile thereof
    • C08F20/02Monocarboxylic acids having less than ten carbon atoms, Derivatives thereof
    • C08F20/10Esters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/039Macromolecular compounds which are photodegradable, e.g. positive electron resists
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/09Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers
    • G03F7/11Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers having cover layers or intermediate layers, e.g. subbing layers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K3/00Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits
    • H05K3/02Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which the conductive material is applied to the surface of the insulating support and is thereafter removed from such areas of the surface which are not intended for current conducting or shielding
    • H05K3/06Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which the conductive material is applied to the surface of the insulating support and is thereafter removed from such areas of the surface which are not intended for current conducting or shielding the conductive material being removed chemically or electrolytically, e.g. by photo-etch process

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to a photosensitive transfer material, a resin pattern manufacturing method, a circuit wiring manufacturing method, and a touch panel manufacturing method.
  • a display device such as an organic electroluminescence (EL) display device and a liquid crystal display device
  • a touch panel such as a capacitance type input device
  • an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor of a visual recognition part a wiring of a peripheral wiring part
  • a lead-out wiring part A conductive layer pattern such as is provided inside the touch panel.
  • a patterned layer is formed by a photosensitive resin composition layer provided on an arbitrary substrate using a photosensitive transfer material because the number of steps for obtaining a required pattern shape is small.
  • a method of developing after exposure through a mask having a desired pattern is widely used.
  • Patent Document 1 includes a support, a thermoplastic resin layer, and a photosensitive resin composition layer in this order, and the photosensitive resin composition layer is protected by (A) an acid group with an acid-decomposable group.
  • a photosensitive transfer material comprising a polymer component containing a polymer having a structural unit (a1) having a group formed and (B) a photoacid generator is disclosed.
  • Patent Document 2 includes a temporary support, a polymer containing a structural unit represented by the following general formula A and a structural unit having an acid group, and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or lower, and a photoacid.
  • a photosensitive transfer material having a positive photosensitive resin layer containing a generator is disclosed.
  • R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group. Alternatively, it represents an aryl group, and R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • X 0 represents a single bond or an arylene group.
  • Patent Document 1 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-85643
  • Patent Document 2 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-156735
  • the problem to be solved by one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a photosensitive transfer material that is excellent in storage stability and adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer.
  • Another problem to be solved by another embodiment of the present invention is to provide a resin pattern manufacturing method, a circuit wiring manufacturing method, and a touch panel manufacturing method using the photosensitive transfer material. .
  • Means for solving the above problems include the following aspects.
  • a polymer having a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin layer wherein the photosensitive resin layer has a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group, and light
  • the polymer that contains an acid generator and is contained in the photosensitive resin layer is an acrylic resin having an acid value of 10 mgKOH / g or less
  • the intermediate layer contains a water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin
  • a photosensitive transfer material in contact with the photosensitive resin layer ⁇ 2>
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to ⁇ 1>, wherein an acid value of the acrylic resin contained in the photosensitive resin layer is 0 mgKOH / g to 3 mgKOH / g.
  • ⁇ 3> The photosensitive transfer material according to ⁇ 1> or ⁇ 2>, wherein the acrylic resin contained in the photosensitive resin layer further includes a structural unit having a group that is pKaH3 or more.
  • ⁇ 4> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 3>, wherein the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin in the intermediate layer is a water-soluble acrylic resin.
  • ⁇ 5> The water-soluble acrylic resin according to ⁇ 4>, wherein the water-soluble acrylic resin has an acid group or a basic group, and the neutralization rate of the acid group or the basic group is 90 mol% or more.
  • ⁇ 6> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 3>, wherein the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin in the intermediate layer is an alkali-soluble acrylic resin.
  • ⁇ 7> The photosensitive transfer material according to ⁇ 6>, wherein the acid value of the alkali-soluble acrylic resin is 30 mgKOH / g to 150 mgKOH / g.
  • ⁇ 8> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 7>, wherein an average film thickness of the intermediate layer is 3 ⁇ m or less.
  • the intermediate layer includes at least one water-soluble resin selected from the group consisting of a phenol resin, a modified cellulose resin, and a polyvinyl alcohol resin on the side opposite to the side in contact with the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 10>, wherein the structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group is a structural unit represented by the following formula A: .
  • R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group or Represents an aryl group, and R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may combine to form a cyclic ether, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 0 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Represents.
  • ⁇ 12> The step of bringing the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 11> into contact with a substrate and bonding the photosensitive resin layer to the pattern
  • a method for producing a resin pattern comprising: an exposing step; and a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern in this order.
  • ⁇ 13> The step of bringing the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 11> into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer, and bonding the photosensitive layer
  • ⁇ 14> The method for producing circuit wiring according to ⁇ 13>, wherein the conductive layer is a layer containing copper.
  • ⁇ 15> The step of bringing the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 11> into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer, and bonding the photosensitive layer
  • a photosensitive transfer material that is excellent in storage stability and adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer.
  • a resin pattern manufacturing method, a circuit wiring manufacturing method, and a touch panel manufacturing method using the photosensitive transfer material can be provided.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing a pattern A.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing a pattern B.
  • symbol may be abbreviate
  • a numerical range expressed using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
  • (meth) acryl” represents both and / or acryl and methacryl
  • (meth) acrylate” represents both and / or acrylate and methacrylate.
  • the amount of each component in the composition is the sum of the plurality of corresponding substances present in the composition unless there is a specific indication when there are a plurality of substances corresponding to each component in the composition.
  • the term “process” is not limited to an independent process, and is included in this term if the intended purpose of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes.
  • the notation that does not indicate substitution and non-substitution includes those having no substituent and those having a substituent.
  • the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • the chemical structural formula in this specification may be expressed as a simplified structural formula in which a hydrogen atom is omitted.
  • weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) in the present disclosure use columns of TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, and TSKgel G2000HxL (all trade names manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) unless otherwise specified.
  • the molecular weight was detected by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) analyzer using a THF (tetrahydrofuran) solvent and a differential refractometer, and converted using polystyrene as a standard substance.
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • a photosensitive transfer material includes a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin layer, and the photosensitive resin layer includes a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group.
  • An acrylic resin that contains a polymer hereinafter also referred to as “acid-decomposable resin”) and a photoacid generator, and the polymer contained in the photosensitive resin layer has an acid value of 10 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the intermediate layer contains a water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin, and the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer are in contact with each other.
  • the photosensitive transfer material which concerns on this indication is excellent in the adhesiveness of an intermediate
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure preferably includes a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin layer in this order.
  • the present inventors have found that storage stability can be improved by making the polymer contained in the photosensitive resin layer an acrylic resin having an acid value of 10 mgKOH / g or less. It was. However, in the photosensitive transfer material having a photosensitive resin layer containing an acrylic resin having an acid value of 10 mgKOH / g or less and an intermediate layer containing polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) described in Patent Document 1, etc., the intermediate layer The present inventors have found that the adhesion between the resin and the photosensitive resin layer deteriorates. On the other hand, as a result of intensive studies, the present inventors can improve the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer while maintaining the storage stability by using the photosensitive transfer material having the above-described configuration. I found.
  • the mechanism with improved storage stability will be described.
  • the acrylic resin contained in the photosensitive resin layer has an acid value greater than 10 mgKOH / g
  • the photosensitive resin layer absorbs moisture in the air. It is presumed that the storage stability deteriorated because the acid derived from the water absorbed and the acid group of the polymer contained in the photosensitive resin layer decomposes the acid-decomposable group of the polymer. .
  • the acrylic resin contained in the photosensitive resin layer to 10 mgKOH / g or less, it becomes a low-acid-value and hydrophobic photosensitive resin layer, and acid and water contributing to decomposition are reduced. As a result of suppressing the reaction that decomposes the functional group, it is considered that the storage stability can be improved.
  • the polarities of the acrylic resin and the polymer contained in the photosensitive resin layer become close to each other, and the mutual interaction is improved. It is considered that the adhesiveness with the photosensitive resin layer is improved.
  • FIG. 1 schematically illustrates an example of a layer configuration of a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • a temporary support 10 an intermediate layer 12, a photosensitive resin layer 14, and a cover film 16 are laminated in this order.
  • the acid value of the acrylic resin contained in the photosensitive resin layer 14 is 10 mgKOH / g or less, and the intermediate layer 12 contains a water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin.
  • constituent materials and the like of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure will be described.
  • the temporary support is a support that supports the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and is peelable from the intermediate layer.
  • the temporary support used in the present disclosure preferably has light transmittance from the viewpoint that the photosensitive resin layer can be exposed through the temporary support when the photosensitive resin layer is subjected to pattern exposure.
  • having light transmittance means that the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is 50% or more, and the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is exposure. From the viewpoint of improving sensitivity, 60% or more is preferable, and 70% or more is more preferable.
  • Examples of the method for measuring the transmittance include a method of measuring using MCPD Series manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.
  • Examples of the temporary support include a glass substrate, a resin film, paper, and the like, and a resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoints of strength and flexibility.
  • Examples of the resin film include a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film. Among these, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable.
  • the thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 5 ⁇ m to 200 ⁇ m, and more preferably in the range of 10 ⁇ m to 150 ⁇ m in terms of ease of handling and versatility.
  • the thickness of the temporary support is selected according to the material from the viewpoints of strength as a support, flexibility required for bonding to a wiring forming substrate, light transmittance required in the first exposure process, and the like. That's fine.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has an intermediate layer containing a water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin.
  • the intermediate layer includes a water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin.
  • water-soluble means that the solubility in water at pH 7.0 is 0.1% by mass or more at 22 ° C.
  • alkali-soluble means sodium carbonate at 22 ° C. It means that the solubility in a 1% by mass aqueous solution is 0.1% by mass or more.
  • the “water-soluble or alkali-soluble” may be either water-soluble or alkali-soluble, or water-soluble and alkali-soluble.
  • the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is preferably a water-soluble acrylic resin that exhibits at least water solubility from the viewpoint of storage stability.
  • the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is preferably an alkali-soluble acrylic resin from the viewpoint of adhesion.
  • the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin preferably has a hydrophilic group, and more preferably has a structural unit having a hydrophilic group, from the viewpoint of water-solubility and alkali-solubility.
  • the hydrophilic group include an acid group, a hydroxy group, a polyalkyleneoxy group, an amide group, and a basic group.
  • the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is an acid group or a basic compound from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer (hereinafter also simply referred to as “adhesion”) and water-solubility or alkali-solubility.
  • the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is at least one selected from the group consisting of an acid group, a hydroxy group, an amide group, a basic group, and a polyalkyleneoxy group from the viewpoint of adhesion and storage stability. It is preferable to include a resin having a group, more preferably including a resin having at least one group selected from the group consisting of an acid group, a hydroxy group and a basic group, and including a resin having a hydroxy group. Particularly preferred.
  • the acid group from the viewpoint of adhesion, a carboxy group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, or a phosphonic acid group is preferable, and a carboxy group or a sulfonic acid group is more preferable.
  • the acid group is preferably neutralized with a known basic compound from the viewpoint of water solubility and storage stability. Water solubility and acid value can be adjusted by neutralization.
  • the basic compound used for neutralization is preferably sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, ammonia, primary to tertiary amine or ammonium hydroxide from the viewpoint of storage stability. More preferred is sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide.
  • the neutralization rate of the acid group is 70 from the viewpoint of water solubility and storage stability. It is preferably at least mol%, more preferably at least 80 mol%, particularly preferably at least 90 mol%. In addition, the upper limit of a preferable neutralization rate is 100 mol%.
  • Preferred examples of the polyalkyleneoxy group include a polyethyleneoxy group, a polypropyleneoxy group, and a poly (ethyleneoxy / propyleneoxy) group.
  • the basic group as the group possessed by the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is preferably a basic group having a nitrogen atom, more preferably an amino group or a heteroaromatic group, from the viewpoint of storage stability. It is done.
  • the basic group is preferably neutralized with a known acidic compound. Water solubility and alkali solubility can be adjusted by neutralization.
  • an acidic compound used for neutralization from the viewpoint of storage stability, carboxylic acid, sulfonic acid, hydrogen halide, boronic acid, hexafluorophosphoric acid, nitric acid, sulfuric acid, perchloric acid, phosphoric acid, or phosphonic acid It is preferable that it is carboxylic acid or sulfonic acid.
  • the neutralization rate of the basic group is from the viewpoint of water solubility and alkali solubility, It is preferably 70 mol% or more, more preferably 80 mol% or more, and particularly preferably 90 mol% or more.
  • the upper limit of a preferable neutralization rate is 100 mol%.
  • the neutralization rate of the acid group or basic group in the resin in the present disclosure is represented by the following formula.
  • Neutralization rate (mol%) 100 ⁇ mole equivalent of neutralized acid group or basic group in resin / mole equivalent of total acid group or basic group in resin
  • the measurement method of the neutralization rate of the basic group in the resin also measures the neutralization rate of the acid group except that the peak to be compared is changed to the peak of the basic group and the peak of the neutralized basic group The method is the same as the method.
  • the acid value of the water-soluble or alkali-soluble resin is preferably 0 mgKOH / g to 200 mgKOH / g, more preferably 0 mgKOH / g to 150 mgKOH / g, and 0 mgKOH / g to More preferably, it is 100 mgKOH / g.
  • the acid value of the water-soluble alkali-soluble resin is preferably 0 mgKOH / g to 50 mgKOH / g from the viewpoint of storage stability.
  • the acid value of the alkali-soluble resin is from 30 mgKOH / g to from the viewpoint of storage stability. It is preferably 200 mgKOH / g, more preferably 30 mgKOH / g to 150 mgKOH / g, and still more preferably 30 mgKOH / g to 100 mgKOH / g.
  • the acid value is 200 mgKOH / g or less, unnecessary decomposition of the acid-decomposable resin in the photosensitive resin layer can be suppressed. Moreover, mixing with the photosensitive resin layer and an intermediate
  • the acid value of the said water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin shall be measured with the acid value measuring method mentioned later.
  • the acrylic resin in the present disclosure may be a resin containing 50% by mass or more of a structural unit derived from a compound selected from the group consisting of a (meth) acrylate compound, a (meth) acrylamide compound, and (meth) acrylic acid, It is preferably a resin containing 70% by mass or more of the structural unit derived from the compound, more preferably a resin containing 80% by mass or more of the structural unit derived from the compound, and 90% by mass or more of the structural unit derived from the compound. It is especially preferable that it is resin to contain.
  • a method for introducing a hydrophilic group into the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin a method of homopolymerizing or copolymerizing a (meth) acrylate compound or (meth) acrylic acid having a hydrophilic group, and an acrylic resin And a method of introducing a hydrophilic group by performing a polymer reaction.
  • the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin has at least an acid group or an acid group salt
  • the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin has an acid group or an acid group salt from the viewpoint of adhesion (meth). It is preferably a copolymer of an acrylate compound or a copolymer of (meth) acrylic acid, and more preferably a copolymer of (meth) acrylic acid.
  • the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin has a hydroxy group
  • the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is a homopolymer or copolymer of a (meth) acrylate compound having a hydroxy group from the viewpoint of adhesion. It is preferably a coalescence.
  • the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin preferably has an ethylenically unsaturated group, and more preferably has a structural unit having an ethylenically unsaturated group.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated group include a (meth) acryl group, an allyl group, a vinyl group, and a styryl group (aromatic vinyl group).
  • a (meth) acryloxy group or an allyl group is preferable, and an allyl group is more preferable.
  • the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin has a weight average molecular weight of 1,000 or more from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer, pattern formation, solubility in the developer after exposure, and transferability. It is preferably 2,000 to 100,000, more preferably 10,000 to 50,000.
  • middle layer may contain the said water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin individually by 1 type, or may contain 2 or more types.
  • the content of the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin in the intermediate layer is from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer, pattern formation, solubility in a developer after exposure, and transferability. It is preferably 10% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less, and further preferably 40% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the intermediate layer. It is particularly preferably 60% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less.
  • the intermediate layer may contain a resin other than the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin, and from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formability, the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin. It is preferable to contain other water-soluble or alkali-soluble resins.
  • the resin other than the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin examples include phenol formaldehyde resin, m-cresol formaldehyde resin, p-cresol formaldehyde resin, m- / p-mixed cresol formaldehyde resin, phenol / cresol (m-, p (May be either-or m- / p-mixed) Phenol resins such as mixed formaldehyde resins or novolac resins, pyrogallol acetone resins, polyhydroxystyrene resins, modified cellulose resins, starches, glycogens, chitins, agaroses, Carrageenans, pullulans, gum arabic, soya gum, polyamide resins, epoxy resins, polyacetal resins, acrylic resins other than the above water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resins, polystyrene resins, polyurethane Tan resins, polyvinyl alcohol resins, polyvinyl formal,
  • the water-soluble or alkali-soluble resin other than the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formability, a phenol resin, a modified cellulose resin, and It is preferably at least one resin selected from the group consisting of polyvinyl alcohol resins, and more preferably a modified cellulose resin.
  • the modified cellulose resin is preferably hydroxyalkylated cellulose from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formation.
  • hydroxyalkylated cellulose examples include hydroxymethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, polyhydroxyethylated cellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, glyoxalized hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate and the like.
  • it is preferably at least one resin selected from the group consisting of hydroxypropylcellulose and hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, and is hydroxypropylmethylcellulose. It is more preferable.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the resin other than the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is 1 from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer, pattern formation, solubility in the developer after exposure, and transferability.
  • 2,000 to 100,000 preferably 2,000 to 100,000, more preferably 10,000 to 50,000.
  • the intermediate layer may contain one kind of resin other than the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin alone, or may contain two or more kinds.
  • the content of the resin other than the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin in the intermediate layer is such that the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer, pattern formation, solubility in the developer after exposure, and transferability. From the viewpoint, it is preferably 0% by mass to 90% by mass, more preferably 0% by mass to 80% by mass, and more preferably 5% by mass to 60% by mass with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer. It is particularly preferred.
  • the intermediate layer may contain particles from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the particles are preferably metal oxide particles or organic particles, and an oxidation of an element selected from the group consisting of Si, Ti, and Zr. More preferably, it is a physical particle or an organic particle.
  • the metal of the metal oxide particles in the present disclosure includes metalloids such as B, Si, Ge, As, Sb, and Te.
  • metal oxide particles Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Sc, Y, La, Ce, Gd, Tb, Dy, Yb, Lu, Ti, Zr, Hf, Nb, Mo, W, Zn, B Oxide particles containing atoms such as Al, Si, Ge, Sn, Pb, Sb, Bi, Te, etc. are preferred, silica, titanium oxide, titanium composite oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium / tin oxide, or Antimony / tin oxide is more preferable, silica, titanium oxide, titanium composite oxide, or zirconium oxide is further preferable, and silica, titanium oxide, or zirconium oxide is particularly preferable.
  • organic resin particles are preferably exemplified.
  • the organic resin particles include homopolymers and copolymers of acrylic acid monomers such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, acrylic ester, and methacrylic ester, and cellulose polymers such as nitrocellulose, methylcellulose, ethylcellulose, and cellulose acetate.
  • acrylic resin particles are preferable as the organic particles, and polymethyl methacrylate particles are more preferable.
  • the surface of these particles can be treated with an organic material or an inorganic material in order to impart dispersion stability.
  • the particles are preferably particles having a hydrophilic surface.
  • the surface of particles having a hydrophobic surface may be subjected to a hydrophilic treatment.
  • the arithmetic average particle diameter of the particles is preferably 400 nm or less, more preferably 250 nm or less, and further preferably 150 nm or less, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer.
  • a thickness of 10 nm to 200 nm is particularly preferable.
  • the method for measuring the arithmetic average particle diameter of particles in the present disclosure refers to an arithmetic average obtained by measuring the particle diameter of 200 arbitrary particles with an electron microscope. When the particle shape is not spherical, the maximum diameter is taken as the diameter.
  • the volume fraction of the particles in the intermediate layer (volume ratio of particles in the intermediate layer) is 5% to 90% with respect to the total volume of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer. It is preferably 10% to 80%, more preferably 15% to 70%, and particularly preferably 20% to 60%.
  • the intermediate layer contains a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development of 450 nm or more, and the maximum absorption wavelength being changed by an acid, base or radical.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, base or radical” when the dye is in a state where the dye in a colored state is decolored by an acid, base or radical, and the dye in a decolored state is colored by an acid, base or radical It may refer to any of the embodiments in which the dye in a colored state changes to a colored state in another hue.
  • the dye may be a compound that changes color from a decolored state upon exposure or a compound that changes color from a developed state upon exposure.
  • the dye may be changed in coloration or decoloration by introducing an acid, base or radical into the composition by exposure, and the properties in the system (by introducing the acid, base or radical)
  • it may be a dye whose coloring or decoloring state changes as the pH changes.
  • it may be a dye whose color development or decoloring state is changed by direct application of acid, base or radical as a stimulus without exposure.
  • the dye may be a compound that develops color by exposure or a compound that erases by exposure, but from the viewpoint of visibility, it is preferably a compound that can be erased by exposure. More preferably, it is a latent dye that is decolored by an acid generated from the acid, that is, a pH sensitive dye that is decolored by changing the pH due to the generation of an acid.
  • Confirmation of the pH-sensitive dye can be performed by the following method.
  • the pH is a value measured at 25 ° C. using a pH meter (model number: HM-31, manufactured by Toa DKK Co., Ltd.).
  • the dye has a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development of 450 nm or more, and from the viewpoint of visibility, is preferably 550 nm or more, more preferably 550 nm to 700 nm, and more preferably 550 nm to 650 nm. More preferably it is. Further, the dye may have only one maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, or may have two or more.
  • the dye has two or more maximum absorption wavelengths in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, among the maximum absorption wavelengths at the time of at least one two or more color development, the maximum absorption wavelength at the time of color development with the highest absorbance is 450 nm. That is all you need.
  • the measurement method of the maximum absorption wavelength in the present disclosure is to measure a transmission spectrum in the range of 400 nm to 780 nm using a spectrophotometer: UV3100 (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) at 25 ° C. in an air atmosphere. The wavelength at which the light intensity is minimized (maximum absorption wavelength) is measured.
  • Examples of the dye that develops or decolors upon exposure include leuco compounds.
  • Examples of the dye that can be erased by exposure include leuco compounds, diphenylmethane dyes, oxazine dyes, xanthene dyes, iminonaphthoquinone dyes, azomethine dyes, anthraquinone dyes, and the like.
  • a leuco compound is preferable from the viewpoint of visibility.
  • the leuco compound examples include triarylmethane-based (for example, triphenylmethane-based), spiropyran-based, fluoran-based, diphenylmethane-based, rhodamine lactam-based, indolylphthalide-based, leucooramine-based leuco compounds.
  • triarylmethane-based for example, triphenylmethane-based
  • spiropyran-based fluoran-based
  • diphenylmethane-based diphenylmethane-based
  • rhodamine lactam-based indolylphthalide-based
  • leucooramine-based leuco compounds examples include triarylmethane-based (for example, triphenylmethane-based), spiropyran-based, fluoran-based, diphenylmethane-based, rhodamine lactam-based, indolylphthalide-based, leucooramine-
  • the leuco compound preferably has a lactone ring, sultin ring, or sultone ring, and the lactone ring, sultin ring, or sultone ring is preferably opened or closed, and has a sultone ring. And it is more preferable that it is a leuco compound in which a sultone ring is closed and decolored.
  • the dye is preferably a water-soluble compound for the purpose of preventing defects due to precipitation of the dye in the aqueous resist stripping solution.
  • Water-soluble means that the amount of the dye dissolved in 100 parts by mass of water at 25 ° C. is 0.1 parts by mass or more (preferably 1 part by mass or more, more preferably 5 parts by mass or more).
  • the dye is preferably a compound represented by the following formula PI from the viewpoint of visibility.
  • Ar 1p and Ar 2p each independently represent an aromatic group
  • R 1p to R 4p each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
  • the aromatic group in Ar 1p and Ar 2p may be an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, or a monocyclic aromatic group, which is a condensed ring in which two or more rings are condensed. May be.
  • Ar 1p and Ar 2p may combine to form a ring.
  • the aromatic group in Ar 1p and Ar 2p may have a substituent.
  • substituents examples include a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a dialkylamino group, an alkylarylamino group, a diarylamino group, a dialkylamino group, an alkylarylamino group, A diarylamino group is preferred.
  • the halogen atom is preferably a bromine atom or an iodine atom, and more preferably a bromine atom.
  • each of the alkyl groups is preferably independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • R 1p to R 4p each independently include a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a dialkylamino group, an alkylarylamino group, a diarylamino group, and the like. Of these, a hydrogen atom is preferable.
  • the dye may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the pigment in the intermediate layer is preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass and preferably 0.1% by mass to 8% by mass with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of visibility. More preferably, it is more preferably 0.5% by mass to 5% by mass, and particularly preferably 1.0% by mass to 3.0% by mass.
  • the intermediate layer in the present disclosure may contain a known additive as necessary in addition to the above components.
  • other additives other additives used in the photosensitive resin layer described later are preferably exemplified.
  • the intermediate layer may contain a colorant.
  • the average film thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably 0.05 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.05 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.05 ⁇ m from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formability. Is more preferably 3 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably 0.05 ⁇ m to 1 ⁇ m.
  • the average film thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably 3 ⁇ m or less from the viewpoint of storage stability. There is no restriction
  • the average value is preferably measured and calculated at 10 points or more.
  • middle layer is thinner than the thickness of the said photosensitive resin layer.
  • the method for forming the intermediate layer is not particularly limited, but each component and a solvent (preferably an aqueous solvent) are mixed at a predetermined ratio and in an arbitrary method, and stirred to dissolve to form the intermediate layer.
  • An intermediate layer forming composition can be prepared. For example, it is possible to prepare a composition by mixing each component with a predetermined ratio after preparing each solution in advance in a solvent.
  • the composition prepared as described above can be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore diameter of 5 ⁇ m.
  • the aqueous solvent include water and water-soluble solvents such as alcohols.
  • the intermediate layer can be easily formed on the temporary support by applying the intermediate layer-forming composition to the temporary support and drying it.
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, and inkjet coating.
  • an intermediate layer can be applied after forming other layers (for example, a thermoplastic resin layer or the like) described later on the temporary support.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is water-soluble on the side of the intermediate layer opposite to the side where the photosensitive resin layer is in contact from the viewpoint of post-exposure stability (PED (post exposure delay)). It is preferable to further have a water-soluble resin layer containing a resin, on the side opposite to the side where the photosensitive resin layer is in contact with the intermediate layer, from the group consisting of a phenol resin, a modified cellulose resin, and a polyvinyl alcohol resin. It is more preferable to further have a water-soluble resin layer containing at least one selected water-soluble resin.
  • PED post exposure delay
  • the water-soluble resin layer contains a water-soluble resin.
  • the water-soluble acrylic resin used in the above-described intermediate layer or the same water-soluble resin as the water-soluble acrylic resin other than the water-soluble acrylic resin can be used. It is the same.
  • the water-soluble resin layer may contain one type of water-soluble resin, or may contain two or more types.
  • the content of the water-soluble resin is preferably 50% by mass to 100% by mass with respect to the total mass of the water-soluble resin layer, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, and preferably 65% by mass to It is more preferably 99% by mass, and particularly preferably 80% by mass to 98% by mass.
  • the water-soluble resin layer may contain particles.
  • the particles used for the water-soluble resin layer can be the same as the particles used for the intermediate layer described above, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • the water-soluble resin layer may contain one kind of particles or two or more kinds.
  • the content of the particles is preferably 5% by mass or less and more preferably 3% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the water-soluble resin layer from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer. It is preferably 1% by mass or less.
  • the water-soluble resin layer may contain other compounds other than those described above. There is no restriction
  • the average thickness of the water-soluble resin layer is preferably from 0.3 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably from 0.3 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m, from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formation. Particularly preferred is 3 ⁇ m to 2.5 ⁇ m. Moreover, it is preferable that the average thickness of the water-soluble resin layer is thicker than the average thickness of the intermediate layer from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formation. Furthermore, when the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has both an intermediate layer and a water-soluble resin layer, the total average thickness of the intermediate layer and the water-soluble resin layer is a viewpoint of storage stability and pattern formability. Therefore, 0.3 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m is preferable, 0.3 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m is more preferable, and 0.3 ⁇ m to 2.5 ⁇ m is particularly preferable.
  • a water-soluble resin layer is formed, and when the intermediate layer forming composition is applied on the formed water-soluble resin layer, a part of the water-soluble resin layer is dissolved and mixed with the intermediate layer forming composition. For example, some of the particles in the intermediate layer forming composition move to the water-soluble resin layer. Even when a composition for forming a water-soluble resin layer that does not contain particles is used, the water-soluble resin layer may be a layer that contains particles. When the water-soluble resin layer and the intermediate layer are formed by a multilayer coating method, the mixing is considered to be more remarkable. From the viewpoint of the liquid stability of the water-soluble resin layer forming composition, the water-soluble resin layer forming composition used for forming the water-soluble resin layer may or may not contain particles. It is preferable that no particles are contained.
  • the water-soluble resin layer forming composition can be prepared in the same manner as the above-described intermediate layer forming composition.
  • a water-soluble resin layer can be suitably formed by adding a water-soluble solvent to each component, adjusting the viscosity, and applying and drying.
  • the photosensitive transfer material includes a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin layer, and preferably includes the temporary support, the intermediate layer, and the photosensitive resin layer in this order.
  • the photosensitive resin layer includes a polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group, and a photoacid generator, and the polymer contained in the photosensitive resin layer has an acid value. Is an acrylic resin of 10 mg KOH / g or less.
  • the photosensitive resin layer is a positive photosensitive resin layer, and is preferably a chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin layer.
  • Photo acid generators such as onium salts and oxime sulfonate compounds described below are protected acids in a binder having an acid group in which the acid generated in response to actinic radiation (active light) is acid-decomposable and protected. Since it acts as a catalyst for the deprotection of the group, the acid generated by the action of one photon contributes to many deprotection reactions, and the quantum yield exceeds 1, for example, the power of 10 As a result of so-called chemical amplification, high sensitivity is obtained.
  • a quinonediazide compound (NQD) is used as a photoacid generator sensitive to actinic radiation, a carboxy group is generated by a sequential photochemical reaction, but its quantum yield is always 1 or less. Not applicable.
  • the photosensitive resin layer includes a polymer (also referred to as “specific polymer”) having a structural unit (also referred to as “structural unit A”) having an acid-decomposable and protected acid group.
  • the photosensitive resin layer may contain other polymers described later.
  • the specific polymer is an acrylic resin.
  • the acid value of the specific polymer in the present disclosure is 10 mgKOH / g or less, and from the viewpoint of storage stability, it is preferably 0 mgKOH / g or more and 8 mgKOH / g or less, and 0 mgKOH / g or more and 5 mgKOH / g or less. Is more preferably 0 mgKOH / g or more and 3 mgKOH / g or less, particularly preferably 0 mgKOH / g or more and 1 mgKOH / g or less, and most preferably 0 mgKOH / g.
  • an acid value means the value measured according to the method as described in JIS K0070 (1992).
  • the acid value Preferably contains 30 mg KOH / g or more.
  • the I / O value of the specific polymer is preferably 1.00 or less, more preferably 0.80 or less, and 0.65 or less from the viewpoint of storage stability and pattern shape. It is particularly preferred. Further, the lower limit value of the I / O value of the specific polymer is preferably 0.30 or more, more preferably 0.40 or more, from the viewpoint of storage stability and pattern shape. Is more preferably 50 or more, and particularly preferably 0.56 or more.
  • the I / O value in the present disclosure is an I / O value obtained by dividing the inorganic value I based on the organic conceptual diagram by the organic value O. Regarding the above I / O values, organic conceptual diagram (Yoshio Koda, Sankyo Publishing (1984)); No.
  • the concept of the I / O value is that the properties of a compound are divided into an organic group that represents covalent bonding and an inorganic group that represents ionic bonding, and all the organic compounds are orthogonal coordinates named organic axes and inorganic axes. Each of the above points is shown.
  • the structural unit A having an acid-decomposable protected acid group in the specific polymer undergoes a deprotection reaction to be an acid group by the action of a catalytic amount of an acidic substance generated by exposure. This acid group enables a curing reaction.
  • a deprotection reaction to be an acid group by the action of a catalytic amount of an acidic substance generated by exposure. This acid group enables a curing reaction.
  • the photosensitive resin layer may further contain a polymer other than the polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group. Moreover, it is preferable that all the polymers contained in the said polymer component are polymers which have at least the structural unit which has the acid group mentioned later, respectively.
  • the photosensitive resin layer may further contain a polymer other than these.
  • the polymer component in the present disclosure means a material including other polymers added as necessary. In addition, even if it is a high molecular compound, the compound applicable to the crosslinking agent and dispersing agent mentioned later shall not be contained in the said polymer component.
  • the specific polymer is preferably an addition polymerization type resin, and more preferably a polymer having a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or an ester thereof.
  • the photosensitive resin layer is a polymer having a structural unit represented by the following formula A as the structural unit A as the specific polymer from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape, solubility in a developer, and transferability.
  • the specific polymer it is more preferable to include a specific polymer having a structural unit represented by the following formula A as the structural unit A and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or lower.
  • the specific polymer contained in the photosensitive resin layer may be one type or two or more types.
  • the polymer A includes at least a structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group.
  • the photosensitive resin layer can be an extremely sensitive chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin layer.
  • the “acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group” in the present disclosure those known as an acid group and an acid-decomposable group can be used, and are not particularly limited.
  • Specific examples of the acid group preferably include a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxyl group.
  • the acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group is a group that is relatively easily decomposed by an acid (for example, an ester group, a tetrahydropyranyl ester group, or a tetrahydrofuranyl ester protected with a group represented by the formula A).
  • An acetal functional group such as a group) or a group that is relatively difficult to decompose with an acid (for example, a tertiary alkyl group such as a tert-butyl ester group or a tertiary alkyl carbonate group such as a tert-butyl carbonate group).
  • the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a structure protected in the form of an acetal from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution.
  • the structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula A from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution.
  • R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group or Represents an aryl group, and R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may combine to form a cyclic ether, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 0 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Represents.
  • R 31 or R 32 when R 31 or R 32 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R 31 or R 32 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferable.
  • R 31 and R 32 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Further, the alkyl group and aryl group in R 31 to R 33 may have a substituent.
  • R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and R 31 or R 32 and R 33 are preferably linked to form a cyclic ether.
  • the number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
  • X 0 represents a single bond or an arylene group, and a single bond is preferable.
  • the arylene group may have a substituent.
  • the structural unit represented by the formula A is a structural unit having a carboxy group protected with an acid-decomposable group. When the specific polymer contains the structural unit represented by the formula A, the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation is excellent and the resolution is superior.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint that the Tg of the specific polymer can be further lowered. More specifically, the structural unit in which R 34 in Formula A is a hydrogen atom is preferably 20% by mass or more with respect to the total amount of the structural unit represented by Formula A contained in the specific polymer.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit in which R 34 in formula A is a hydrogen atom in the structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group is 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance. It can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated from the spectrum (NMR) measurement by a conventional method.
  • the structural unit represented by the following formula A2 is more preferable from the viewpoint of further increasing the sensitivity during pattern formation.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 35 to R 41 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 34 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R 35 to R 41 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • the structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula A3 from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape.
  • R B1 and R B2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, at least one of R B1 and R B2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R B3 is an alkyl group or Represents an aryl group, R B1 or R B2 and R B3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X B represents a single bond or a divalent linking group; R B12 represents a substituent, and n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • R B1 or R B2 when R B1 or R B2 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R B1 or R B2 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferable.
  • R B1 and R B2 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R B3 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group and aryl group in R B1 to R B3 may have a substituent.
  • R B1 or R B2 and R B3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and R B1 or R B2 and R B3 are preferably linked to form a cyclic ether.
  • the number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
  • X B represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and represents a single bond or an alkylene group, —C ( ⁇ O) O—, —C ( ⁇ O) NR N —, —O—, or a combination thereof.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and may have a substituent.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • X B contains —C ( ⁇ O) O—
  • an embodiment in which the carbon atom contained in —C ( ⁇ O) O— and the carbon atom bonded to R B4 are directly bonded is preferable.
  • R N represents an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom, preferably an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R B12 represents a substituent, and is preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
  • R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint of lowering the Tg of the polymer. More specifically, with respect to the total content of the structural unit having an acid group protected by the acid-decomposable group contained in the polymer, the structural unit in which R B4 in formula A3 is a hydrogen atom is 20% by mass or more. It is preferable that In the structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group, the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit in which R B4 in formula A3 is a hydrogen atom is 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance. It can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated from the spectrum (NMR) measurement by a conventional method.
  • the structural unit represented by the following formula A4 is more preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape.
  • R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R B5 to R B11 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
  • R B12 represents a substituent
  • n is 0 Represents an integer of ⁇ 4.
  • R B4 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R B5 to R B11 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • R B12 represents a substituent, and is preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
  • R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • the structural unit having an acid group protected by the acid-decomposable group contained in the polymer A may be one type or two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit having an acid group protected by the acid-decomposable group in the polymer A is preferably 10% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the polymer A, and is preferably 10% by mass to 90% by mass. %, More preferably 20% by mass to 70% by mass.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit having an acid group protected by the acid-decomposable group in the polymer A is confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method. can do.
  • the content ratio of the structural unit having an acid group protected by the acid-decomposable group in the polymer component is the total content of the polymer components.
  • the mass is preferably 5% by mass to 80% by mass, more preferably 10% by mass to 80% by mass, and particularly preferably 20% by mass to 70% by mass.
  • the polymer A is a structural unit other than a structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group (for example, a structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more, an acid group, And other structural units).
  • the said specific polymer may further have the structural unit which has an acid group in the range whose acid value is 10 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the structural unit having an acid group is a structural unit having a protective group, for example, an acid group that is not protected by an acid-decomposable group, that is, an acid group that has no protective group.
  • the acid group is usually incorporated into the polymer as a structural unit having an acid group using a monomer capable of forming an acid group.
  • the pKa of the acid group is preferably 10 or less, and more preferably 6 or less.
  • the pKa of the acid group is preferably ⁇ 5 or more.
  • the positive type photosensitive resin layer to be contained has better resolution and sensitivity at the time of pattern formation while maintaining transferability and peelability from the temporary support at good levels.
  • the acid group examples include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, and a sulfonylimide group.
  • at least one acid group selected from the group consisting of a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable.
  • the introduction of the structural unit having an acid group into the polymer can be carried out by copolymerizing a monomer having an acid group.
  • the structural unit having an acid group is more preferably a structural unit derived from styrene or a structural unit obtained by substituting an acid group for a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, or a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid. preferable.
  • a structural unit having an acid group a structural unit having a carboxy group or a structural unit having a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable from the viewpoint that the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation becomes better.
  • the monomer having an acid group that can form a structural unit having an acid group is not limited to the examples described above.
  • the structural unit having an acid group contained in the specific polymer may be only one type or two or more types.
  • the structural unit having an acid group is preferably contained in an amount of 0.1% by mass to 20% by mass with respect to the total mass of the specific polymer. More preferably, it is contained in an amount of ⁇ 10% by mass, and more preferably 0.1% by mass to 5% by mass. When it is in the above range, the pattern formability becomes better.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit having an acid group in the polymer can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensity calculated by 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method.
  • the specific polymer preferably further includes a structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more from the viewpoint of storage stability.
  • PKaH in the present disclosure is a pKa of a conjugate acid, and a group having a pKaH of 3 or more represents a group having a pKa of a conjugate acid of the group of 3 or more.
  • the value of pKaH of —NH 2 is the value of pKa of —NH 3 + .
  • it is a calculated value obtained by ACD / ChemSketch (ACD / Labs 8.00 Release Product Version: 8.08). Specifically, from the chemical structure of the structural unit having a specific functional group, the above-mentioned ACD / ChemSketch is used to calculate the pKaH value of the specific functional group.
  • the group having a pKaH of 3 or more is preferably a group having a pKaH of 4 or more, more preferably a group having a pKaH of 5 or more, from the viewpoints of resolution and retention time-dependent suppression.
  • the group is more preferably 5 or more and 15 or less, and particularly preferably a group having a pKaH of 6 or more and 10 or less.
  • the group having a pKaH of 3 or more is preferably a group having a nitrogen atom from the viewpoint of resolution and retention time-dependent suppression, and is an aliphatic amino group, an aromatic amino group, or a nitrogen-containing complex. It is more preferably an aromatic ring group, further preferably an aliphatic amino group or a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring group, and particularly preferably an aliphatic amino group.
  • the aliphatic amino group may be any of a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, or a tertiary amino group, but from the viewpoints of resolution and retention time dependence suppression, It is preferably a secondary amino group or a tertiary amino group.
  • the aromatic amino group is preferably an anilino group, a monoalkylanilino group, or a dialkylanilino group, and more preferably a monoalkylanilino group or a dialkylanilino group.
  • the nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring in the nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic group is preferably a pyridine ring, an imidazole ring or a triazole ring, more preferably a pyridine ring or an imidazole ring, and a pyridine ring. Is particularly preferred.
  • the nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic group may further have a substituent on the nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring.
  • the substituent is not particularly limited, but is preferably an alkyl group, and more preferably a methyl group.
  • the group having a pKaH of 3 or more is particularly preferably a group having an alkylamine structure from the viewpoint of resolution and retention time-dependent suppression.
  • alkylamine structure include dialkylamine and trialkylamine. Specifically, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, dipropylamino group, diisopropylamino group, 1,2,2,6,6-penta Examples include an alkyl-4-piperidyl group and a 2,2,6,6-tetraalkyl-4-piperidyl group.
  • the structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula I or formula II from the viewpoint of resolution and retention time-dependent inhibition properties, and represented by the following formula I: More preferably, it is a structural unit.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • Z represents a single bond, a methylene group, an arylene group, —O—, —C ( ⁇ O) —NH—, or —C ( ⁇ O) —.
  • R 2 may have a single bond or at least one group selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a urethane bond, a urea bond, an amide bond, an ester bond and a carbonate bond.
  • a linear group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have at least one group selected from the group consisting of a group, a urethane bond, a urea bond, an amide bond, an ester bond, a carbonate bond, and an aromatic group
  • Q 1 is a nitrogen atom
  • Z in Formula I is a single bond, an arylene group, —C ( ⁇ O) —NH— or —C ( ⁇ O) —O— from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis. It is preferably an arylene group or —C ( ⁇ O) —O—, more preferably —C ( ⁇ O) —NH— or —C ( ⁇ O) —O—.
  • Z in Formula II is preferably a single bond, an arylene group, or —C ( ⁇ O) —O—, and is a single bond, from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis. Is more preferable.
  • R 2 in Formula I has at least one group selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a urethane bond, and a urea bond from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis. It is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and has at least one group selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a urethane bond and a urea bond. It is more preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • R 2 in Formula II is preferably a single bond from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis.
  • R 3 and R 4 in Formula I are each independently a hydrogen atom or a carbon number of 1 that may have an ether bond from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis. It is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group of ⁇ 20, more preferably a hydrogen atom or a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group of 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • R 2 , R 3 and R 4 in the formula I are combined to form a nitrogen-containing aliphatic ring is preferable, An embodiment in which a piperidine ring is formed is more preferable.
  • Q 1 in Formula II is preferably a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic group from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis, and is pyridyl, methylpyridyl, imidazolyl, methylimidazolyl Group or a triazolyl group is more preferable, a pyridyl group is more preferable, and a 4-pyridyl group is particularly preferable.
  • the monomer that forms a structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more include the following monomers. 1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate, 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl methacrylate, 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl acrylate, 2,2 methacrylate , 6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl, 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl acrylate, 2- (diethylamino) ethyl methacrylate, 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl acrylate, acrylic acid 2- (diethylamino) ethyl, N- (3-dimethylamino) propyl methacrylate, N- (3-dimethylamino) propyl acrylate, N- (3-diethylamino) propyl methacrylate, N- (3-diethylamino acrylate)
  • the structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more includes an amino group or a nitrogen-containing heterocycle described in paragraph 0140 of JP-A-2015-187634 or paragraphs 0068 to 0070 of JP-A-2011-39266. Also included are monomers having groups.
  • the pKaH contained in the specific polymer may have only one type of structural unit having 3 or more groups, or two or more types of structural units.
  • the content of the structural unit having the pKaH group of 3 or more in the specific polymer is 0.01% by mass or more and 30% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer from the viewpoint of resolution and storage stability. Is preferably 0.05% by mass or more and 20% by mass or less, more preferably 0.1% by mass or more and 10% by mass or less, and further preferably 0.4% by mass or more and 4% by mass or less. It is particularly preferable that the ratio be 0.6 mass% or more and 2 mass% or less.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more in the polymer A can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method. .
  • the specific polymer has other constituents other than the constituent unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group, a constituent unit having an acid group, and a constituent unit having a pKaH of 3 or more.
  • the unit may be included in a range not impairing the effect of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • styrenes (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid aryl ester, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid Diester, bicyclounsaturated compound, maleimide compound, unsaturated aromatic compound, conjugated diene compound, unsaturated monocarboxylic acid, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid anhydride, group having aliphatic cyclic skeleton, other Mention may be made of unsaturated compounds.
  • Various characteristics of the polymer can be adjusted by adjusting at least one of the type and content using other structural units.
  • the Tg of the polymer component can be easily adjusted to 90 ° C. or lower by appropriately using other structural units.
  • the polymer may contain only 1 type of other structural units, and may contain 2 or more types.
  • structural units having an aromatic ring or structural units having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton are preferable from the viewpoint of improving the electrical properties of the obtained transfer material.
  • monomers that form these structural units include styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, And benzyl (meth) acrylate etc. are mentioned.
  • the structural unit derived from a cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate is mentioned preferably.
  • (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion.
  • (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion.
  • Specific examples include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate.
  • at least one monomer selected from the group consisting of methyl (meth) acrylate and ethyl (meth) acrylate is particularly preferable.
  • the content of other structural units is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and still more preferably 50% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the polymer.
  • the lower limit may be 0% by mass, but is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more. Within the above range, the resolution and adhesion are further improved.
  • Tg-Glass transition temperature of specific polymer Tg- The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the specific polymer in the present disclosure is preferably 90 ° C. or lower. When the Tg is 90 ° C. or lower, the photosensitive resin layer has high adhesion and is excellent in transferability.
  • the Tg is more preferably 60 ° C. or less, and further preferably 40 ° C. or less.
  • the lower limit of Tg is not particularly limited, but is preferably ⁇ 20 ° C. or higher, and more preferably ⁇ 10 ° C. or higher. When the Tg of the specific polymer is ⁇ 20 ° C.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the entire polymer component in the present disclosure is preferably 90 ° C. or lower, more preferably 60 ° C. or lower, and 40 ° C. or lower from the viewpoint of transferability. Is more preferable.
  • the glass transition temperature of the polymer in the present disclosure can be measured using differential scanning calorimetry (DSC).
  • DSC differential scanning calorimetry
  • the specific measuring method was performed in accordance with the method described in JIS K 7121 (1987) or JIS K 6240 (2011).
  • Tig extrapolated glass transition start temperature
  • the method for measuring the glass transition temperature will be described more specifically.
  • the apparatus is kept at a temperature about 50 ° C. lower than the expected Tg of the polymer until the apparatus is stabilized, and then heated at a rate of 20 ° C./min, about 30 times higher than the temperature at which the glass transition is completed. Heat to a higher temperature and draw a DTA or DSC curve.
  • the extrapolated glass transition start temperature (Tig) that is, the glass transition temperature Tg in the present specification, is a straight line obtained by extending the low-temperature base line in the DTA curve or DSC curve to the high-temperature side, and the stepwise change portion of the glass transition. Calculated as the temperature of the intersection with the tangent drawn at the point where the slope of the curve is maximum.
  • the FOX formula is used as a guideline. It is possible to control the Tg of the target specific polymer.
  • Tg of the homopolymer of the first structural unit contained in the polymer is Tg1
  • the mass fraction in the copolymer of the first structural unit is W1
  • the Tg of the homopolymer of the second structural unit Is Tg2 and the mass fraction in the copolymer of the second structural unit is W2
  • the Tg0 (K) of the copolymer containing the first structural unit and the second structural unit is It is possible to estimate according to the equation.
  • FOX formula: 1 / Tg0 (W1 / Tg1) + (W2 / Tg2)
  • a copolymer having a desired Tg can be obtained by adjusting the type and mass fraction of each structural unit contained in the copolymer using the FOX formula described above. It is also possible to adjust the Tg of the polymer by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of the polymer.
  • the molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 60,000 or less in terms of polystyrene-equivalent weight average molecular weight.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is 60,000 or less, the melt viscosity of the photosensitive resin layer is suppressed to be low, and the bonding at a low temperature (for example, 130 ° C. or less) is realized when bonding to the substrate. Can do.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 2,000 to 60,000, and more preferably 3,000 to 50,000.
  • the weight average molecular weight and number average molecular weight of the polymer can be measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography), and various commercially available apparatuses can be used as the measuring apparatus, and the contents of the apparatus, and Measurement techniques are known to those skilled in the art.
  • HLC registered trademark
  • -8220GPC manufactured by Tosoh Corporation
  • TSKgel registered trademark
  • Super HZM-M 4 .6 mm ID ⁇ 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation
  • Super HZ4000 4 mm ID ⁇ 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation
  • Super HZ3000 4 mm ID ⁇ 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation
  • Super HZ2000 4 mm ID
  • THF tetrahydrofuran
  • Measurement conditions are 0.2% by mass, flow rate is 0.35 ml / min, sample injection amount is 10 ⁇ l, measurement temperature is 40 ° C., and a differential refractive index (RI) detector is used. be able to.
  • the calibration curve is “Standard sample TSK standard, polystyrene” manufactured by Tosoh Corporation: “F-40”, “F-20”, “F-4”, “F-1”, “A-5000”, “ It can be produced by using two or more of any of the seven samples of “A-2500” and “A-1000”.
  • the ratio (dispersion degree) between the number average molecular weight and the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, more preferably 1.05 to 3.5.
  • the production method (synthesis method) of the specific polymer is not particularly limited.
  • a polymerizable monomer for forming the structural unit A1 represented by the formula A and a structural unit B having an acid group are formed. It is possible to synthesize by polymerizing using a polymerization initiator in an organic solvent containing a polymerizable monomer for the purpose, and further, if necessary, a polymerizable monomer for forming other structural unit C. it can. It can also be synthesized by so-called polymer reaction.
  • the photosensitive resin layer is 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass of the polymer component with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin layer, from the viewpoint of developing good adhesion to the substrate. Preferably, it is contained in a proportion of 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
  • the photosensitive resin layer has a specific polymer content of 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin layer, from the viewpoint of developing good adhesion to the substrate. It is preferably contained in a proportion, more preferably in a proportion of 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
  • the photosensitive resin layer is a polymer having no structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group within a range not impairing the effect of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure ( It may be referred to as “other polymer”).
  • the blending amount of the other polymer is preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less in the total polymer component, More preferably, it is 20 mass% or less.
  • the photosensitive resin layer may contain only one type of other polymer, or may contain two or more types.
  • polyhydroxystyrene can be used and are commercially available, such as SMA 1000P, SMA 2000P, SMA 3000P, SMA 1440F, SMA 17352P, SMA 2625P, and SMA 3840F (above, manufactured by Sartomer).
  • ARUFON UC-3000, ARUFON UC-3510, ARUFON UC-3900, ARUFON UC-3910, ARUFON UC-3920, and ARUFON UC-3080 above, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • Joncryl 690, Joncryl 6 Joncryl 67, Joncryl 586 manufactured by BASF or the like can also be used.
  • the photosensitive resin layer contains a photoacid generator.
  • the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is a compound capable of generating an acid by irradiation with radiation such as ultraviolet rays, far ultraviolet rays, X-rays, and charged particle beams.
  • the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a compound that generates an acid in response to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably 300 nm to 450 nm, but its chemical structure is not limited.
  • a photoacid generator that is not directly sensitive to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more can be used as a sensitizer as long as it is a compound that reacts with an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid when used in combination with a sensitizer. It can be preferably used in combination.
  • the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less, more preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 3 or less, and a pKa of 2 or less.
  • a photoacid generator that generates an acid is particularly preferable.
  • the lower limit of pKa is not particularly defined, but is preferably ⁇ 10.0 or more, for example.
  • the photoacid generator examples include an ionic photoacid generator and a nonionic photoacid generator.
  • the photoacid generator preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an onium salt compound described later and an oxime sulfonate compound described later from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, and an oxime sulfonate compound. It is more preferable to contain.
  • nonionic photoacid generators examples include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds.
  • the photoacid generator is preferably an oxime sulfonate compound from the viewpoints of sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion.
  • These photoacid generators can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • Specific examples of trichloromethyl-s-triazines and diazomethane derivatives include the compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP 2011-212494A.
  • oxime sulfonate compound that is, a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure
  • a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the following formula (B1) is preferable.
  • R 21 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • * represents a bonding site with another atom or another group.
  • any group may be substituted, and the alkyl group in R 21 may be linear or branched. It may have a ring structure. Acceptable substituents are described below.
  • the alkyl group for R 21 is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group of R 21 is an aryl group having 6 to 11 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group (7,7-dimethyl-2-oxonorbornyl group or other bridged alicyclic group) , Preferably a bicycloalkyl group or the like), or a halogen atom.
  • the aryl group for R 21 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group.
  • the aryl group of R 21 may be substituted with one or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group, and a halogen atom.
  • the compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the formula (B1) is preferably an oxime sulfonate compound described in paragraphs 0078 to 0111 of JP-A-2014-85643.
  • Examples of the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, quaternary ammonium salts, and the like. Of these, onium salt compounds are preferable, and triarylsulfonium salts and diaryliodonium salts are particularly preferable.
  • ionic photoacid generators described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-85643 can also be preferably used.
  • a photo-acid generator may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
  • the content of the photoacid generator in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. More preferably, the content is 5% by mass to 5% by mass.
  • the photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a benzotriazole compound from the viewpoint of pattern shape and linearity of circuit wiring formed by etching.
  • the benzotriazole compound is not limited as long as it is a compound having a benzotriazole skeleton, and a known benzotriazole compound can be used.
  • Examples of the benzotriazole compound include 1,2,3-benzotriazole, 1- [N, N-bis (2-ethylhexyl) aminomethyl] benzotriazole, 5-carboxybenzotriazole, 1- (hydroxymethyl) -1H.
  • -Benzotriazole 1-acetyl-1H-benzotriazole, 1-aminobenzotriazole, 9- (1H-benzotriazol-1-ylmethyl) -9H-carbazole, 1-chloro-1H-benzotriazole, 1- (2- Pyridinyl) benzotriazole, 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, 1-methylbenzotriazole, 1-ethylbenzotriazole, 1- (1′-hydroxyethyl) benzotriazole, 1- (2′-hydroxyethyl) benzotriazole, 1-propyl Benzoto Azole, 1- (1′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 1- (2′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 1- (3′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 4-hydroxy-1H-benzotriazole, 5-methyl -1H-benzotriazole, methylbenzotriazole-5-carboxylate, ethylbenzotriazole-5-carboxylate,
  • the benzotriazole compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (1) from the viewpoint of pattern shape and linearity of circuit wiring formed by etching.
  • P represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • Q represents a substituent
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4
  • a benzotriazole compound having at least one functional group selected from the group consisting of a sulfonic acid group, a thiol group, and a thioether group is excluded.
  • examples of the substituent represented by P include a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, and a dialkylamino group. , -ZY group and the like.
  • examples of the halogen atom represented by P include a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
  • the alkyl group represented by P may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms examples include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an iso-propyl group, a butyl group, a tert-butyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, and a dodecyl group.
  • the aryl group represented by P may be a monocyclic aryl group or a condensed ring aryl group.
  • the aryl group is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms include a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a naphthyl group, a phenanthryl group, a terphenyl group, and a fluorenyl group.
  • the heterocyclic group represented by P may be an aliphatic heterocyclic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group.
  • the heterocyclic group represented by P may be a monocyclic heterocyclic group or a condensed heterocyclic group.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a heterocyclic group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably a heterocyclic group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • heterocyclic group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms examples include a furyl group, pyrrolyl group, imidazolyl group, pyrazolyl group, pyridinyl group, pyrazinyl group, pyrimidinyl group, indolyl group, isoquinolyl group, carbazolyl group, phenanthridinyl group And phenanthrolinyl group.
  • the acyl group represented by P is preferably an acyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably an acyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a carbon number. 2 to 4 acyl groups.
  • the acyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms include acetyl group, propionyl group, butanoyl group, benzoyl group and the like.
  • the alkyl group in the alkylamino group represented by P may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group.
  • the alkylamino group is preferably an alkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylamino group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an alkylamino group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. It is an amino group.
  • alkyl group in the alkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms examples include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an iso-propyl group, a butyl group, a tert-butyl group, a hexyl group, a 2-ethylhexyl group, and a cyclohexyl group.
  • each alkyl group in the dialkylamino group represented by P may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group.
  • each alkyl group in the dialkylamino group may be the same or different.
  • the dialkylamino group is preferably a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, more preferably a dialkylamino group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, particularly preferably
  • Each alkyl group is a dialkylamino group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • alkyl group in the dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms of each alkyl group examples include, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, iso-propyl group, butyl group, tert-butyl group, hexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl Group, cyclohexyl group, octyl group, decyl group and the like.
  • Z represents an alkylene group
  • Y represents a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, or a dialkylamino group.
  • the alkylene group represented by Z is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms, and even more preferably an alkylene group substituted with a carboxy group.
  • Preferred is an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms, particularly preferably an unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms, and most preferably an unsubstituted methylene group.
  • alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms examples include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, and a hexylene group.
  • Y is preferably a hydroxy group or a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, more preferably a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group in the alkylamino group and dialkylamino group represented by Y may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group.
  • each alkyl group in the dialkylamino group may be the same or different.
  • the alkylamino group is preferably an alkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylamino group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an alkylamino group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. It is an amino group.
  • the dialkylamino group is preferably a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, more preferably a dialkylamino group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, particularly preferably Each alkyl group is a dialkylamino group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • alkyl group in the alkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms and the dialkylamino group in which each alkyl group has 1 to 10 carbon atoms include, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, iso-propyl group, butyl group Tert-butyl group, hexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, cyclohexyl group, octyl group, decyl group and the like.
  • P is preferably a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, a dialkylamino group, or —
  • a ZY group more preferably a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an acyl group, an amino group, or a -ZY group, still more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or -ZY group.
  • examples of the substituent represented by Q include a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an amino group, a —ZY group, an alkoxy group, a carboxy group, and the like.
  • a halogen atom a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an amino group, a —ZY group, an alkoxy group, a carboxy group, and the like.
  • a halogen atom represented by Q an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, and a —ZY group are each a halogen atom represented by P in the above formula (1).
  • the alkoxy group represented by Q may be a linear alkoxy group or a branched alkoxy group.
  • the alkoxy group represented by Q is preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms include methoxy group, ethoxy group, butoxy group, tert-butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, octyloxy group, dodecyloxy group and the like.
  • the alkoxy group in the alkoxyacyl group represented by Q may be a linear alkoxy group or a branched alkoxy group.
  • the alkoxyacyl group represented by Q is preferably an alkoxyacyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkoxyacyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • alkoxyacyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms examples include a methoxyacyl group (namely, methoxycarbonyl group), ethoxyacyl group (namely, ethoxycarbonyl group), butoxyacyl group (namely, butoxycarbonyl group), tert- Butoxyacyl group (ie, butoxycarbonyl group), pentyloxyacyl group (ie, pentyloxycarbonyl group), hexyloxyacyl group (ie, hexyloxycarbonyl group), octyloxyacyl group (ie, octyloxycarbonyl group), dodecyl An oxyacyl group (namely, dodecyloxycarbonyl group) etc. are mentioned.
  • Q is preferably a halogen atom, hydroxy group, alkyl group, aryl group, heterocyclic group, acyl group, amino group, —ZY group, alkoxy group, carboxy group, or alkoxyacyl group. And more preferably a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, or an alkoxyacyl group, and particularly preferably an alkyl group or an alkoxy group.
  • Preferable combinations of P and Q in the formula (1) include an embodiment in which a group group arbitrarily selected from the following (a) and a group group arbitrarily selected from the following (b) are combined.
  • (A) P is preferably a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an acyl group, an amino group, or a —ZY group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or a —ZY group. And particularly preferably a hydrogen atom or a —ZY group.
  • (B) Q is preferably a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, or an alkoxyacyl group, and more preferably an alkyl group or an alkoxy group.
  • More preferable combinations of P and Q in the formula (1) include an embodiment in which a group group arbitrarily selected from the following (a ′) and a group group arbitrarily selected from the following (b ′) are combined.
  • a ′) P is preferably a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an acyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an amino group, or a —ZY group, and Z is ,
  • Y is a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, or a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group; More preferably, it is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or a -ZY group, and Z is an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a carboxy group.
  • Y is a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or a -ZY group, and Z may be substituted with a carboxy group.
  • An alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms, and Y is each A dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in the alkyl group, particularly preferably a hydrogen atom or a -ZY group, and Z is an unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms.
  • Y is a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group.
  • (B ′) Q is preferably a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an acyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an amino group, an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, carboxy Or an alkoxyacyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms or an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1, and particularly preferably 0.
  • the benzotriazole compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the benzotriazole compound is 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of transferability, pattern shape, and linearity of circuit wiring formed by etching. It is preferably 0.05% by mass to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.05% by mass to 2% by mass, and even more preferably 0.05% by mass to 1% by mass. Is particularly preferred.
  • the photosensitive resin layer may further contain a basic compound.
  • the molecular weight of the basic compound in the present disclosure is less than 2,000, and preferably less than 1,000.
  • the basic compound in this indication shall be compounds other than the said benzotriazole compound.
  • any basic compound used in a chemically amplified positive resist can be selected and used. Examples thereof include aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, and quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids. Specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A-2011-212494, paragraphs 0204 to 0207, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • aliphatic amine examples include trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, di-n-propylamine, tri-n-propylamine, di-n-pentylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, and the like.
  • examples include ethanolamine, dicyclohexylamine, and dicyclohexylmethylamine.
  • aromatic amine examples include aniline, benzylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, and diphenylamine.
  • heterocyclic amine examples include pyridine, 2-methylpyridine, 4-methylpyridine, 2-ethylpyridine, 4-ethylpyridine, 2-phenylpyridine, 4-phenylpyridine, N-methyl-4-phenylpyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, imidazole, benzimidazole, 4-methylimidazole, 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, nicotine, nicotinic acid, nicotinamide, quinoline, 8-oxyquinoline, pyrazine, Pyrazole, pyridazine, purine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, 4-methylmorpholine, 1,5-diazabicyclo [4.3.0] -5-nonene, and 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.3.0] -7-Undecene.
  • Examples of the quaternary ammonium hydroxide include tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetra-n-butylammonium hydroxide, and tetra-n-hexylammonium hydroxide.
  • Examples of the quaternary ammonium salt of carboxylic acid include tetramethylammonium acetate, tetramethylammonium benzoate, tetra-n-butylammonium acetate, and tetra-n-butylammonium benzoate.
  • the said basic compound may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together.
  • the content of the basic compound is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5% by mass, and preferably 0.005% by mass to 3% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of storage stability. % Is more preferable.
  • the said photosensitive resin layer in this indication can contain a well-known additive as needed besides the said component.
  • the photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of film thickness uniformity.
  • a surfactant any of anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic), or amphoteric can be used, but a preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
  • nonionic surfactants include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl phenyl ethers, higher fatty acid diesters of polyoxyethylene glycol, silicone-based and fluorine-based surfactants. .
  • KP manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • Polyflow manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • F-Top manufactured by JEMCO
  • MegaFuck manufactured by DIC Corporation
  • Florard Florard
  • Asahi Guard Surflon (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.)
  • PolyFox manufactured by OMNOVA
  • SH-8400 manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.
  • a surfactant it contains a structural unit A and a structural unit B represented by the following formula I-1, and is a weight average in terms of polystyrene measured by gel permeation chromatography using tetrahydrofuran (THF) as a solvent.
  • a preferable example is a copolymer having a molecular weight (Mw) of 1,000 or more and 10,000 or less.
  • R 401 and R 403 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 402 represents a linear alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
  • R 404 represents a hydrogen atom or a carbon group.
  • L represents an alkylene group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms
  • p and q are mass percentages representing a polymerization ratio
  • p is a numerical value of 10 mass% to 80 mass%.
  • Q represents a numerical value of 20% to 90% by mass
  • r represents an integer of 1 to 18
  • s represents an integer of 1 to 10
  • * represents a bonding site with another structure. Represent.
  • L is preferably a branched alkylene group represented by the following formula (I-2).
  • R 405 in formula (I-2) represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms in terms of compatibility and wettability to the coated surface. Two or three alkyl groups are more preferred.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the copolymer is more preferably from 1,500 to 5,000.
  • a polymer containing a structural unit having a fluorine atom (hereinafter also referred to as polymer F) is preferably used from the viewpoint of the coated surface and the dimple suppression of the resulting resin pattern.
  • the fluorine atom content in the polymer F is 20% by mass or more and 50% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the polymer F from the viewpoint of the coated surface and the dimple suppression of the resulting resin pattern. It is preferable that it is 20 mass% or more and 45 mass% or less, and it is especially preferable that it is 20 mass% or more and 40 mass% or less.
  • the fluorine atom content in the polymer F in the present disclosure is the mass-based fluorine atom content with respect to the entire polymer F.
  • the chemical structure analysis or elemental analysis of the polymer F is performed (in the polymer F It can be calculated from (total mass of fluorine atoms) / (total mass of polymer F).
  • the I / O value of the polymer F is not particularly limited. However, when the I / O value of the polymer F is less than 0.45, the polymer F has an acid group or a basic group described later. It is preferable that the structural unit which has is included.
  • the I / O value in the present disclosure is an I / O value obtained by dividing the inorganic value I based on the organic conceptual diagram by the organic value O. Regarding the above I / O values, organic conceptual diagram (Yoshio Koda, Sankyo Publishing (1984)); No. 10, 719-725 (1957); Fragrance Journal, No. 34, 97-111 (1979); Fragrance Journal, No. 50, 79-82 (1981); There is a detailed explanation.
  • the concept of the I / O value is that the properties of a compound are divided into an organic group that represents covalent bonding and an inorganic group that represents ionic bonding, and all the organic compounds are orthogonal coordinates named organic axes and inorganic axes. Each of the above points is shown.
  • the I / O value of the polymer F is preferably 0.20 or more, more preferably 0.30 or more, and more preferably 0.30 or more from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the resulting pattern. More preferably, it is 50 or less.
  • the polymer F preferably includes a structural unit having an acid group or a basic group from the viewpoint of suppressing generation of dimples in a pattern to be obtained and a planar shape.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer F is preferably 90 ° C. or less, more preferably 50 ° C. or less, from the viewpoints of pattern formability, transferability, and surface shape of the resulting pattern.
  • the temperature is more preferably ⁇ 30 ° C. or more and 50 ° C. or less, and particularly preferably ⁇ 10 ° C. or more and 20 ° C. or less.
  • the adhesion defect of a cover film or the peeling defect at the time of peeling a cover film is suppressed.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer F is preferably 2,000 or more, more preferably 2,000 to 100,000, and still more preferably 2,000 to 20,000.
  • the ratio (Mw / Mn, degree of dispersion) of the number average molecular weight (Mn) and the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer F is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, more preferably 1.05 to 3.5. .
  • the polymer F includes a structural unit having a fluorine atom.
  • the number of fluorine atoms in the structural unit having fluorine atoms is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or more and 50 or less, more preferably 7 or more and 30 or less, from the viewpoint of the surface state during coating. More preferably, it is 7 or more and 20 or less.
  • the structural unit having a fluorine atom preferably has a fluorine atom as a perfluoroalkyl group or a perfluoroaryl group, more preferably as a perfluoroalkyl group, from the viewpoint of planarity at the time of coating.
  • the structural unit having a fluorine atom preferably has a perfluoroalkyl group or a perfluoroaryl group, and more preferably has a perfluoroalkyl group, from the viewpoint of planarity at the time of coating.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the perfluoroalkyl group is preferably 4 or more and 30 or less, more preferably 6 or more and 24 or less, and particularly preferably 9 or more and 15 or less, from the viewpoint of the surface state during coating. .
  • the structural unit having a fluorine atom is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula F-1 from the viewpoint of planarity during coating.
  • R f1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • X f1 represents a single bond, —COO—, —OCO—, or an arylene group
  • L f1 represents a single bond, an alkylene group, Alternatively, it represents a group in which two or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkylene group, —COO—, —OCO—, and an arylene group are bonded
  • Rf represents a perfluoroalkyl group.
  • X f1 in formula F-1 is preferably a single bond or —COO—, more preferably —COO—, from the viewpoints of availability and synthesis suitability.
  • L f1 in Formula F-1 is an alkylene group or a group in which two or more groups selected from the group consisting of —COO—, —OCO—, and an arylene group are bonded from the viewpoint of availability and synthesis suitability.
  • An alkylene group or a group formed by bonding two or more groups selected from the group consisting of —COO— and —OCO— is more preferable, and an alkylene group is particularly preferable.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched, or have a ring structure.
  • the alkylene group is preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a methylene group or an ethylene group.
  • Rf in Formula F-1 is preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 4 to 24 carbon atoms, from the viewpoint of the surface state during coating.
  • a perfluoroalkyl group having 9 to 15 carbon atoms is particularly preferred.
  • the perfluoroalkyl group may be linear, branched, or have a ring structure, but it is possible to suppress dimple generation in the pattern obtained and to obtain a planar view at the time of coating. Therefore, a linear or branched perfluoroalkyl group is preferable, and a linear perfluoroalkyl group is more preferable.
  • the polymer F may have the structural unit which has a fluorine atom individually by 1 type, or may have 2 or more types.
  • the structural unit having a fluorine atom is preferably a structural unit different from the structural unit having an acid group or basic group and the structural unit having a hydrophilic group, which will be described later. Moreover, it is preferable that the structural unit which has an acid group or a basic group, and the structural unit which has a hydrophilic group do not have a fluorine atom.
  • the polymer F preferably contains 20% by mass or more and 99% by mass or less, and 30% by mass or more and 99% by mass or less of a structural unit having a fluorine atom with respect to the total mass of the polymer F, from the viewpoint of planarity at the time of coating. More preferably, it is more preferably 30% by mass or more and 95% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 35% by mass or more and 70% by mass or less.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit having a fluorine atom in the polymer F can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by 13 C-NMR measurement or 19 F-NMR measurement by a conventional method. it can.
  • the polymer F preferably contains a structural unit having an acid group or a basic group from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the resulting pattern, and the I / O value of the polymer F is less than 0.45. In this case, it is more preferable to include a structural unit having an acid group or a basic group.
  • the pKa of the acid group in the structural unit having an acid group in the polymer F is preferably 10 or less, more preferably 6 or less, from the viewpoint of improving sensitivity.
  • the pKa of the acid group is preferably ⁇ 5 or more.
  • the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, and a sulfonylimide group.
  • at least one acid group selected from the group consisting of a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable.
  • the introduction of the structural unit having an acid group into the polymer can be carried out by copolymerizing a monomer having an acid group.
  • the structural unit having an acid group is more preferably a structural unit derived from styrene or a structural unit obtained by substituting an acid group for a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, or a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid. preferable.
  • the structural unit having an acid group is preferably a structural unit having a carboxy group or a structural unit having a phenolic hydroxyl group, from the viewpoint of pattern formation and suppression of the occurrence of dimples in the resulting pattern, and has a carboxy group.
  • a structural unit is more preferable.
  • the monomer having an acid group that can form a structural unit having an acid group is not limited to the examples described above.
  • the structural unit having an acid group contained in the polymer F may be only one type or two or more types.
  • the polymer F contains 0.1% by mass to 20% by mass of a structural unit having an acid group with respect to the total mass of the polymer F, from the viewpoints of pattern formability and suppression of occurrence of dimples in the resulting pattern.
  • the content is preferably 0.5% by mass to 15% by mass, more preferably 1% by mass to 10% by mass.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit having an acid group in the polymer F can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method.
  • the basic group is preferably a group having a nitrogen atom from the viewpoint of pattern formation and suppression of dimple formation in the resulting pattern, and is preferably an aliphatic amino group, an aromatic amino group, or a nitrogen-containing complex. It is more preferably an aromatic ring group, further preferably an aliphatic amino group or a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring group, and particularly preferably an aliphatic amino group.
  • the aliphatic amino group may be a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, or a tertiary amino group, but from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the pattern obtained and a planar shape, It is preferably a secondary amino group or a tertiary amino group, more preferably a tertiary amino group.
  • the tertiary amino group is preferably a dialkylamino group or an N-alkylmorpholino group.
  • the structural unit having a basic group is preferably a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound.
  • the structural unit having a basic group contained in the polymer F may be only one type or two or more types. From the viewpoint of pattern formation and suppression of dimple formation in the resulting pattern, the polymer F contains 0.1% by mass to 50% by mass of a structural unit having a basic group with respect to the total mass of the polymer F. It is preferably contained, more preferably 1% by mass to 40% by mass, and even more preferably 5% by mass to 30% by mass.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit having a basic group in the polymer F can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensity calculated by 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method.
  • the structural unit having an acid group or basic group is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula F-2 from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the resulting pattern.
  • R f2 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • X f2 represents a single bond, —COO—, —OCO—, or an arylene group
  • L f2 represents a single bond, an alkylene group, Alternatively, it represents a group in which two or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkylene group, —COO—, —OCO— and an arylene group are bonded
  • R p represents an acid group or a basic group.
  • X f2 in Formula F-2 is preferably a single bond or —COO— from the viewpoints of availability and synthesis suitability.
  • L f2 in Formula F-2 is a single bond, an alkylene group, or two or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkylene group, —COO—, and —OCO— bonded from the viewpoint of availability and synthesis suitability. It is preferably a group, more preferably a single bond or an alkylene group.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched, or have a ring structure.
  • the alkylene group is preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an ethylene group or a propylene group.
  • R p in Formula F-2 is preferably a carboxy group or a group having a nitrogen atom from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the resulting pattern, and a group having a carboxy group or a tertiary amino group Of these, a carboxy group, a dialkylamino group, or an N-alkylmorpholino group is particularly preferable.
  • the structural unit which has the said acid group or basic group may further have the hydrophilic group mentioned later other than an acid group and a basic group.
  • the structural unit having an acid group or a basic group is a structural unit different from the structural unit having a hydrophilic group described later.
  • the polymer F preferably contains a structural unit having a hydrophilic group, and more preferably contains a structural unit having a hydrophilic group in the side chain, from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the resulting pattern.
  • “main chain” represents a relatively long bond chain in the molecule of the polymer compound constituting the resin
  • “side chain” represents a carbon chain branched from the main chain. .
  • Hydrophilic groups include hydroxy group, ether bond, thioether bond, carbonyl group, amide structure, lactone structure, ester bond, thioester bond, urea bond, thiourea bond from the viewpoint of suppressing dimple generation in the resulting pattern and planarity.
  • At least one structure selected from the group consisting of a urethane bond and a cyano group is preferred, a hydroxy group, an ether bond, a thioether bond, a carbonyl group, an amide structure, a lactone structure, a thioester bond, a urea bond, a thiourea bond, and a urethane More preferable is at least one structure selected from the group consisting of a bond and a cyano group, and at least selected from the group consisting of a hydroxy group, an ether bond, an amide structure, a lactone structure, a urea bond, a urethane bond, and a cyano group.
  • the polymer F has a hydroxy group, an ether bond, a thioether bond, a carbonyl group, an amide structure, a lactone structure, an ester bond, and a thioester bond from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the pattern obtained and the surface state during coating.
  • the cyclic ether group is preferably a group having a 4-membered to 6-membered cyclic ether ring, more preferably a group having a 5-membered or 6-membered cyclic ether ring. Particularly preferred is a group having a cyclic ether ring. Among them, the cyclic ether group is preferably a tetrahydrofuranyl group or a tetrahydropyranyl group, and more preferably a tetrahydrofuranyl group.
  • the carbonyl group and the ether bond mean a carbonyl group and an ether bond that do not form an ester bond.
  • the structural unit having hydrophilicity is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula F-3, from the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of dimples in the pattern obtained and the surface state during coating.
  • R f3 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • X f3 represents a single bond, —COO—, —OCO—, —CONR a —, or an arylene group
  • L f3 represents a single bond
  • R aq represents a hydrophilic group.
  • R a represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • X f3 in formula F-3 is preferably —COO— or —CONR a —, more preferably —COO—, from the viewpoint of availability and synthesis suitability.
  • L f3 in Formula F-3 is an alkylene group, or a group selected from the group consisting of —COO—, —OCO—, —O—, and an arylene group, from the viewpoint of availability and surface suitability for synthesis.
  • An alkylene group or a group selected from the group consisting of —COO— and —OCO— is more preferable, and an alkylene group is particularly preferable.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched, or have a ring structure.
  • the alkylene group is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a methylene group or an ethylene group.
  • R aq in Formula F-3 is a hydroxy group, an ether bond, a thioether bond, a carbonyl group, an amide structure, a lactone structure, an ester bond, a thioester bond, or a urea bond, from the viewpoint of suppressing the dimple generation in the resulting pattern.
  • At least one structure selected from the group consisting of a thiourea bond, a urethane bond, and a cyano group is preferable, and is preferably a hydroxy group, a cyclic ether group, a polyalkyleneoxy group, an alkyleneoxy group, or a cyano group, More preferably, it is a hydroxy group, an alkyleneoxy group or a cyclic ether group.
  • the polymer F may have the structural unit which has a hydrophilic group individually by 1 type, or may have 2 or more types.
  • the polymer F includes a structural unit having a hydrophilic group
  • the polymer F is hydrophilic from the viewpoints of pattern formability, transferability, generation of dimples in the resulting pattern, and surface conditions during coating.
  • the structural unit having a functional group is preferably contained in an amount of more than 0% by mass and 70% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass to 70% by mass, more preferably 10% by mass to 65%, based on the total mass of the polymer F. More preferably, it is contained in an amount of 20% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 20% by mass or more and 60% by mass or less.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit having a hydrophilic group in the polymer F can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensity calculated from 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method.
  • the polymer F preferably includes a structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group, from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the pattern to be obtained and the surface state during coating.
  • a structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group those similar to the structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group in the specific polymer can be applied.
  • 70 mass% or less is preferable with respect to the total mass of the polymer F, and, as for content of the structural unit which has the acid group protected by the acid-decomposable group in the said polymer F, 50 mass% or less is more preferable, 50 A mass% or less is more preferable.
  • the lower limit may be 0% by mass, but is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more. Within the above range, the resolution and adhesion are further improved.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of other structural units in the polymer F can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
  • the polymer F has the above-described constitutional unit having a fluorine atom, a constitutional unit having an acid group or a basic group, a constitutional unit having a hydrophilic group, and an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group.
  • Other structural units other than the unit may be included within a range that does not impair the effects of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • styrenes (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid aryl ester, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid
  • examples include diesters, bicyclounsaturated compounds, unsaturated aromatic compounds, conjugated diene compounds, and other unsaturated compounds.
  • Various characteristics of the polymer can be adjusted by adjusting at least one of the type and content using other structural units. In particular, the Tg of the polymer can be easily adjusted by appropriately using other structural units.
  • (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the resulting pattern.
  • (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion.
  • Specific examples include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate.
  • the said polymer F may contain only 1 type of other structural units, and may contain 2 or more types. 70 mass% or less is preferable with respect to the total mass of the polymer F, as for content of the other structural unit in the said polymer F, 60 mass% or less is more preferable, and 50 mass% or less is still more preferable.
  • the lower limit may be 0% by mass, but is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more. Within the above range, the resolution and adhesion are further improved.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of other structural units in the polymer F can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
  • the other structural unit in the polymer F is preferably a structural unit having a carboxylic acid ester structure, and more preferably a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth) acrylate. preferable. Further, from the viewpoint of transferability and pattern formability, the other structural unit in the polymer F is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula F-4.
  • R f4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • X f4 represents a single bond, —COO—, —OCO—, or an arylene group
  • L f4 represents a single bond, an alkylene group, Or a group in which two or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkylene group, —COO—, —OCO—, and an arylene group are bonded
  • R al represents a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group, or an aryl group Represents.
  • X f4 in formula F-4 is preferably a single bond or —COO—, more preferably —COO—, from the viewpoints of availability and synthesis suitability.
  • L f4 in Formula F-4 is preferably a single bond from the viewpoints of availability and synthesis suitability.
  • R al in formula F-4 is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group, more preferably a linear or cyclic alkyl group, from the viewpoint of transferability and pattern formation.
  • the carbon number of R al in Formula F-4 is preferably 1 to 30, more preferably 8 to 20, and more preferably 10 to 20 from the viewpoint of transferability and pattern formability. Particularly preferred.
  • R al in Formula F-4 include methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl, cyclohexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, n from the viewpoint of transferability and pattern formation.
  • -Octyl group, n-decyl group, n-dodecyl group, dicyclopentanyl group and benzyl group are preferred, and cyclohexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, n-octyl group, n-decyl group, n-dodecyl group More preferred are a group and a dicyclopentanyl group, and particularly preferred are an n-dodecyl group and a dicyclopentanyl group.
  • the said polymer F may contain only 1 type of other structural units, and may contain 2 or more types.
  • the structural unit represented by the formula F-4 is all of the polymer F from the viewpoint of transferability and pattern formation. 1% to 70% by mass, preferably 10% to 60% by mass, more preferably 20% to 50% by mass, and more preferably 25% to 50% by mass with respect to the mass. It is particularly preferred.
  • the polymer F only needs to contain a structural unit having a fluorine atom.
  • the structural unit having a fluorine atom It is preferable to include a structural unit having a hydrophilic group, and it is more preferable to include a structural unit having a fluorine atom, a structural unit having a hydrophilic group, and a structural unit having an acid group or a basic group.
  • the polymer F As the form contained in the polymer F, from the viewpoint of transferability, pattern formation, and dimple generation suppression and planarity in the resulting pattern, the structural unit represented by the formula F-1, and A form including the structural unit represented by F-3, the structural unit represented by Formula F-1, the structural unit represented by F-3, and Formula F-2 or Formula F- The form containing the structural unit represented by 4 is mentioned.
  • the polymer F is preferably a polymer represented by the following formula F-5 from the viewpoints of transferability, pattern formation, and suppression of dimple generation in the pattern to be obtained and a planar shape.
  • R f1 to R f4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • X f1 to X f4 each independently represents a single bond, —COO—, —OCO—, or an arylene group
  • L f1 to L f4 each independently represents a single bond, an alkylene group, or a group in which two or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkylene group, —COO—, —OCO—, and an arylene group are bonded.
  • Rf represents a perfluoroalkyl group
  • R p represents an acid group or a basic group
  • R aq represents a hydrophilic group
  • R al represents a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group
  • aryl R1 to r4 represent the mass ratio of each structural unit, the sum of r1 + r2 + r3 + r4 is 100, r1 represents 30 to 99, r2 to r4 each independently represents 0 to 70, r2 to r4 out of r4 One even without is greater than or equal to 1.
  • R f1 to R f4 , X f1 to X f4 , L f1 to L f4 , Rf, R p , R aq , and R al in the above formula F-5 are the same as R in the above formulas F-1 to F-4.
  • f1 to R f4 , X f1 to X f4 , L f1 to L f4 , Rf, R p , R aq , and R al are synonymous with each other, and preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • r1 is preferably from 30 to 95, more preferably from 35 to 70, from the viewpoint of planarity.
  • r2 is preferably from 0 to 50, more preferably from 0 to 40, and even more preferably from 0 to 30 from the viewpoints of pattern formability and suppression of dimple generation in the resulting pattern.
  • r2 is 1 to 50 from the viewpoints of pattern formation, suppression of dimple generation in the resulting pattern, and planar shape. It is preferably 5 to 40, more preferably 10 to 30.
  • r3 is preferably 0 to 70, more preferably 0 to 60, from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the resulting pattern.
  • r3 is 5 to 70 from the viewpoints of transferability, pattern formation, and dimple generation suppression and planarity in the resulting pattern. It is preferably 10 to 65, more preferably 20 to 60.
  • r4 is preferably from 0 to 60, more preferably from 0 to 50, from the viewpoints of transferability and pattern formability.
  • r4 is 1 to 70 from the viewpoints of pattern formability, suppression of dimple generation in the obtained pattern, and planarity. It is preferably 10 to 60, more preferably 20 to 50, and particularly preferably 25 to 50.
  • r1 When r2 is 0, it is preferable that r1 is 30 to 95, r3 is 5 to 70, and r4 is 0 to 65 from the viewpoint of planarity. Further, when r2 is 1 to 70, it is preferable that r1 is 30 to 99, r3 is 0 to 69, and r4 is 0 to 69 from the viewpoint of planarity.
  • the production method (synthesis method) of the polymer F is not particularly limited.
  • a polymerizable monomer for forming a structural unit having a fluorine atom, and, if necessary, an acid group or a basic group for example, Polymerization using a polymerization initiator in an organic solvent containing a polymerizable monomer for forming a structural unit having a polymerizable monomer and a polymerizable monomer for forming a structural unit having a hydrophilic group Can be synthesized. It can also be synthesized from other polymers by so-called polymer reaction.
  • Surfactant may be used individually by 1 type and may use 2 or more types together.
  • the addition amount of the surfactant is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass, and 0.01% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. More preferably, the content is from 3% to 3% by mass.
  • the photosensitive resin layer may contain at least one polymerization inhibitor.
  • a polymerization inhibitor for example, a thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0018 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 can be used. Of these, phenothiazine, phenoxazine or 4-methoxyphenol can be preferably used.
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01% by mass to 3% by mass, and 0.01% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. % To 1% by mass is more preferable, and 0.01% to 0.8% by mass is even more preferable.
  • the photosensitive resin layer may contain a solvent.
  • the photosensitive resin composition for forming the photosensitive resin layer is a photosensitive resin composition containing a solvent by adjusting the viscosity of the photosensitive resin composition once by adding a solvent in order to easily form the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the photosensitive resin layer can be suitably formed by applying and drying the photosensitive resin composition.
  • a known solvent can be used as the solvent used in the present disclosure.
  • Solvents include ethylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, ethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, propylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, propylene glycol dialkyl ethers, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers And diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol dialkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, esters, ketones, amides, and lactones.
  • Specific examples of the solvent include the solvents described in paragraphs 0174 to 0178 of JP2011-212494A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the solvent which can be used for this indication may be used individually by 1 type, and it is more preferable to use 2 types together.
  • two or more solvents for example, combined use of propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates and dialkyl ethers, combined use of diacetates and diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, or esters and butylene glycol alkyl ether acetates Use in combination with the other is preferred.
  • the solvent is preferably a solvent having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C., a solvent having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or higher, or a mixture thereof. Solvents having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C.
  • propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (boiling point 146 ° C.), propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (boiling point 158 ° C.), propylene glycol methyl-n-butyl ether (boiling point 155 ° C.), and An example is propylene glycol methyl-n-propyl ether (boiling point 131 ° C.).
  • Solvents having a boiling point of 160 ° C or higher include ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (boiling point 170 ° C), diethylene glycol methyl ethyl ether (boiling point 176 ° C), propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate (boiling point 160 ° C), dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate.
  • the content of the solvent in applying the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 50 parts by weight to 1,900 parts by weight, preferably 100 parts by weight to 100 parts by weight of the total solid content in the photosensitive resin composition. More preferably, it is 900 parts by mass.
  • the content of the solvent in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 2% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or less, and more preferably 0.5% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. % Or less is more preferable.
  • the photosensitive resin layer may contain a plasticizer for the purpose of improving plasticity.
  • the plasticizer preferably has a weight average molecular weight smaller than that of the polymer represented by a1 or a2.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the plasticizer is preferably 500 or more and less than 10,000, more preferably 700 or more and less than 5,000, and still more preferably 800 or more and less than 4,000 from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity.
  • the plasticizer is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that is compatible with the specific polymer and exhibits plasticity, but from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity, the plasticizer preferably has an alkyleneoxy group in the molecule.
  • the alkyleneoxy group contained in the plasticizer preferably has the following structure.
  • R represents an alkyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 50
  • * represents a bonding site with another atom.
  • compound X a compound having an alkyleneoxy group having the above structure
  • compound X is a chemically amplified positive photosensitive material obtained by mixing compound X, a specific polymer, and a photoacid generator.
  • the resin composition does not fall under the plasticizer in the present disclosure.
  • the optionally added surfactant is generally not used in an amount that brings plasticity to the photosensitive resin composition, and thus does not correspond to the plasticizer in the present specification.
  • plasticizer examples include, but are not limited to, compounds having the following structure.
  • the content of the plasticizer is preferably 1% by mass to 50% by mass and more preferably 2% by mass to 20% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of adhesion. preferable.
  • the said photosensitive resin layer may contain only 1 type of plasticizers, and may contain 2 or more types.
  • the photosensitive resin layer can further contain a sensitizer.
  • the sensitizer absorbs actinic rays and enters an electronically excited state.
  • the sensitizer in an electronically excited state comes into contact with the photoacid generator, and effects such as electron transfer, energy transfer, and heat generation occur. Thereby, a photo-acid generator raise
  • anthracene derivative a compound selected from the group consisting of an anthracene derivative, an acridone derivative, a thioxanthone derivative, a coumarin derivative, a base styryl derivative, and a distyrylbenzene derivative is preferable, and an anthracene derivative is more preferable.
  • Anthracene derivatives include anthracene, 9,10-dibutoxyanthracene, 9,10-dichloroanthracene, 2-ethyl-9,10-dimethoxyanthracene, 9-hydroxymethylanthracene, 9-bromoanthracene, 9-chloroanthracene, 9 1,10-dibromoanthracene, 2-ethylanthracene, or 9,10-dimethoxyanthracene is preferred.
  • Examples of the sensitizer include compounds described in paragraphs 0139 to 0141 of International Publication No. 2015/092731.
  • the content of the sensitizer is preferably 0% by mass to 10% by mass and more preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure can include a heterocyclic compound.
  • a heterocyclic compound There is no restriction
  • Heterocyclic monomers having the following d electrons can be added.
  • the addition amount of the heterocyclic compound in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.01% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer when the heterocyclic compound is added.
  • the content is more preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, and further preferably 1% by mass to 5% by mass. It is preferable in the said range from a viewpoint of adhesiveness and etching tolerance. Only 1 type may be used for a heterocyclic compound and it can also use 2 or more types together.
  • Specific examples of the compound having an epoxy group in the molecule include bisphenol A type epoxy resin, bisphenol F type epoxy resin, phenol novolac type epoxy resin, cresol novolac type epoxy resin, aliphatic epoxy resin and the like.
  • a compound having an epoxy group in the molecule can be obtained as a commercial product.
  • JER828, JER1007, JER157S70 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Co., Ltd.), JER157S65 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Holdings Co., Ltd.), and the like commercially available products described in paragraph 0189 of JP2011-221494A, and the like can be mentioned.
  • bisphenol A type epoxy resin bisphenol F type epoxy resin, phenol novolac type epoxy resin and aliphatic epoxy resin are more preferable, and aliphatic epoxy resin is particularly preferable.
  • the compound containing an oxetanyl group is preferably used alone or mixed with a compound containing an epoxy group.
  • the heterocyclic compound is preferably a compound having an epoxy group from the viewpoint of etching resistance and line width stability.
  • the photosensitive resin layer may contain an alkoxysilane compound.
  • Preferred examples of the alkoxysilane compound include trialkoxysilane compounds.
  • Examples of the alkoxysilane compound include ⁇ -aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, ⁇ -aminopropyltriethoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltriacoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxypropylalkyldialkoxysilane, and ⁇ -methacryloxy.
  • ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane and ⁇ -methacryloxypropyltrialkoxysilane are more preferable, ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane is more preferable, and 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane is particularly preferable. preferable. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure includes metal oxide particles, antioxidants, dispersants, acid multipliers, development accelerators, conductive fibers, colorants, thermal radical polymerization initiators, thermal acid generators, and ultraviolet absorption.
  • Known additives such as agents, thickeners, crosslinking agents, and organic or inorganic suspending agents can be further added. Preferred embodiments of the other components are described in JP-A-2014-85643, paragraphs 0165 to 0184, respectively, and the contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
  • the average film thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or more, and still more preferably 5.0 ⁇ m or more, from the viewpoint of transferability (laminate).
  • the average film thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 20 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 15 ⁇ m or less, from the viewpoint of production suitability.
  • a photosensitive resin composition for forming a photosensitive resin layer can be prepared by mixing each component and a solvent in an arbitrary ratio and by an arbitrary method, and dissolving by stirring. For example, it is possible to prepare a composition by mixing each component with a predetermined ratio after preparing each solution in advance in a solvent.
  • the composition prepared as described above can be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 0.2 ⁇ m or the like.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure having the photosensitive resin layer on the temporary support can be obtained by applying the photosensitive resin composition onto the intermediate layer and drying it.
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, and inkjet coating.
  • the photosensitive resin layer can also be applied after forming other layers described later on the intermediate layer.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a layer other than the temporary support, the intermediate layer, and the photosensitive resin layer (hereinafter, may be referred to as “other layer”).
  • other layers include a contrast enhancement layer, a cover film, and a thermoplastic resin layer.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure preferably further includes a thermoplastic resin layer between the temporary support and the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of transferability.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a cover film for the purpose of protecting the photosensitive resin layer.
  • Preferred embodiments of the thermoplastic resin layer are described in paragraphs 0189 to 0193 of JP 2014-85643 A, and preferred embodiments of the other layers are described in paragraphs 0194 to 0196 of JP 2014-85643 A, respectively.
  • a thermoplastic resin layer contains the at least 1 sort (s) of thermoplastic resin chosen from the group which consists of an acrylic resin and a styrene / acryl copolymer from a transferable viewpoint.
  • the photosensitive transfer material is prepared according to the method for preparing a photosensitive transfer material described in paragraphs 0094 to 0098 of JP-A-2006-259138. can do.
  • a solution for thermoplastic resin layer
  • a coating solution prepared by adding a resin and an additive to a solvent that does not dissolve the thermoplastic resin layer on the obtained thermoplastic resin layer after applying the coating liquid) and drying to provide a thermoplastic resin layer (intermediate)
  • the layer composition is applied and dried to laminate the intermediate layer.
  • a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is obtained by further applying a photosensitive resin composition prepared using a solvent that does not dissolve the intermediate layer on the formed intermediate layer, and drying and laminating the photosensitive resin layer. Can be suitably produced.
  • a contrast enhancement layer is a material (photo-decoloring) that has a large absorption with respect to an exposure wavelength before exposure, but gradually decreases with exposure, that is, has a higher light transmittance. It is a layer containing a coloring pigment component).
  • Known photodecolorable dye components include diazonium salts, stilbazolium salts, arylnitroso salts, and the like.
  • a phenolic resin or the like is used as the film forming component.
  • the method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a method for producing a resin pattern using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, but the photosensitive resin in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a circuit wiring manufacturing method using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • the substrate preferably has a conductive layer, and more preferably has a conductive layer on the surface.
  • photosensitive resin compositions are classified into a negative type in which a portion irradiated with actinic rays is left as an image and a positive type in which a portion not irradiated with actinic rays is left as an image due to differences in photosensitive systems.
  • the positive type by irradiating actinic rays, for example, to improve the solubility of the exposed portion using a photosensitive agent that generates acid upon irradiation with actinic rays, both the exposed and unexposed portions are exposed at the time of pattern exposure. If the pattern shape obtained is not cured and the substrate is defective, the substrate can be reused (reworked) by full exposure or the like.
  • the positive type is preferable from the viewpoint of excellent so-called reworkability.
  • the technique of reexposing the remaining photosensitive resin layer to produce a different pattern can be realized only by the photosensitive resin layer, the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit according to the present disclosure In the method for producing a wiring, an embodiment in which exposure is performed twice or more is preferable.
  • the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a substrate, preferably a conductive layer. It is preferable to include the process (bonding process) which contacts and bonds to a board
  • the bonding step for example, in the case of a photosensitive transfer material having a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin layer (which may further have a cover film), the outermost layer on the transfer side Is a photosensitive resin layer, but another layer may be further formed on the photosensitive resin layer, and the outermost layer may be another layer.
  • the bonding step it is preferable that the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material is brought into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer on the surface for bonding. Moreover, in the said bonding process, it is preferable to crimp
  • the patterned photosensitive resin layer after exposure and development can be suitably used as an etching resist when the conductive layer is etched.
  • the photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material is overlaid on a substrate, and pressure is applied with a roll or the like, or pressure and heating are performed.
  • a known laminator such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, or an auto-cut laminator that can further increase productivity can be used.
  • the pressure and temperature of the bonding in the bonding step it depends on the surface material of the substrates to be bonded, for example, the material of the conductive layer, the material of the photosensitive resin layer, the conveyance speed, and the pressure bonding machine used. Can be set as appropriate.
  • the substrate used in the present disclosure is preferably a substrate having a conductive layer on the surface of a base material.
  • a wiring is formed by patterning the conductive layer.
  • a film substrate such as polyethylene terephthalate is preferably provided with a plurality of conductive layers such as metal oxide and metal.
  • the said conductive layer is a layer containing copper from a viewpoint which exhibits the effect in this indication more.
  • the substrate is preferably a substrate in which a plurality of conductive layers are stacked on a support.
  • a support body is a glass base material or a film base material, and it is more preferable that it is a film base material.
  • the support is particularly preferably a sheet-shaped resin composition.
  • the support is preferably transparent.
  • the refractive index of the support is preferably 1.50 to 1.52.
  • the support may be composed of a light-transmitting substrate such as a glass substrate, and tempered glass represented by Corning's gorilla glass can be used.
  • materials used in JP 2010-86684 A, JP 2010-152809 A, and JP 2010-257492 A can be preferably used.
  • a film substrate is used as the substrate, it is more preferable to use a substrate that is not optically distorted and a substrate having high transparency.
  • Specific examples of the material include polyethylene terephthalate (PET), Examples thereof include polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, triacetyl cellulose, and cycloolefin polymer.
  • Examples of the conductive layer include any conductive layer used for general wiring or touch panel wiring.
  • Examples of the material for the conductive layer include metals and metal oxides.
  • Examples of the metal oxide include ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide), and SiO 2 .
  • Examples of the metal include Al, Zn, Cu, Fe, Ni, Cr, and Mo.
  • At least one of the plurality of conductive layers includes a metal oxide.
  • the conductive layer is preferably an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor for a visual recognition part used in a capacitive touch panel or a wiring for a peripheral extraction part.
  • the manufacturing method of the resin pattern which concerns on this indication, or the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication includes the process (exposure process) of carrying out pattern exposure of the said photosensitive resin layer after the said bonding process.
  • the photosensitive resin layer is irradiated with actinic rays through a mask having a predetermined pattern.
  • the photoacid generator is decomposed to generate an acid.
  • the acid-decomposable group contained in the coating film component is hydrolyzed to produce an acid group, for example, a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group.
  • the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern are not particularly limited. Since it is desired to improve the display quality of a display device (for example, a touch panel) including an input device having a circuit board manufactured in the present disclosure and to reduce the area occupied by the extraction wiring as much as possible, at least a part of the pattern (particularly the touch panel)
  • the electrode pattern and the part of the lead-out wiring) are preferably fine wires of 100 ⁇ m or less, and more preferably 70 ⁇ m or less.
  • the exposure in the exposure step may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like, but is preferably exposure through an exposure mask.
  • the method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for producing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of bringing the photosensitive transfer material and an exposure mask into contact between the bonding step and the exposure step. It is preferable to contain. It is excellent in the resolution of the pattern obtained as it is the said aspect.
  • Visible light, ultraviolet light, and an electron beam are mentioned as actinic light, However, Visible light or ultraviolet light is preferable and an ultraviolet-ray is especially preferable.
  • an exposure light source using actinic light a low-pressure mercury lamp, a high-pressure mercury lamp, an ultrahigh-pressure mercury lamp, a chemical lamp, a light emitting diode (LED) light source, an excimer laser generator, etc. can be used.
  • Actinic rays having a wavelength of 300 nm to 450 nm, such as h-ray (405 nm), can be preferably used.
  • irradiation light can also be adjusted through spectral filters, such as a long wavelength cut filter, a short wavelength cut filter, and a band pass filter, as needed.
  • Exposure dose depending on the photosensitive resin layer to be used may be appropriately selected, but is preferably from 5mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 200mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 100mJ / cm 2 . It is also preferable to perform heat treatment before development for the purpose of improving the rectangularity and linearity of the pattern after exposure.
  • PEB Post Exposure Bake
  • pattern exposure performs after peeling a temporary support body from the photosensitive resin layer, before peeling a temporary support body, it exposes through a temporary support body, and peels a temporary support body after that. Also good.
  • the pattern exposure may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like.
  • the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure includes a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer and forming a pattern after the exposing step (developing step). It is preferable to contain.
  • the photosensitive transfer material has an intermediate layer
  • the exposed intermediate layer is also removed together with the exposed photosensitive resin layer in the development step.
  • the intermediate layer in the unexposed area may also be removed in a form of being dissolved or dispersed in the developer.
  • Development of the exposed photosensitive resin layer in the development step can be performed using a developer.
  • the developer is not particularly limited as long as the exposed portion of the photosensitive resin layer can be removed.
  • a known developer such as the developer described in JP-A-5-72724 can be used.
  • the developer is preferably a developer in which the exposed portion of the photosensitive resin layer exhibits a dissolution type development behavior.
  • the developer is preferably an alkaline aqueous solution, and more preferably, for example, an alkaline aqueous solution containing a compound having a pKa of 7 to 13 at a concentration of 0.05 mol / L (liter) to 5 mol / L.
  • the developer may further contain an organic solvent miscible with water, a surfactant, and the like. Examples of the developer suitably used in the present disclosure include the developer described in Paragraph 0194 of International Publication No. 2015/092731.
  • the development method is not particularly limited, and any of paddle development, shower development, shower and spin development, dip development, and the like may be used.
  • the shower development will be described.
  • the exposed portion can be removed by spraying a developer onto the exposed photosensitive resin layer by shower. Further, after the development, it is preferable to remove the development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like.
  • the liquid temperature of the developer is preferably 20 ° C. to 40 ° C. Moreover, the effect which suppresses the deformation
  • a method for manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of washing with water after development, a step of drying a substrate having the obtained pattern, and the like. These steps may be included.
  • the post-baking process which heat-processes the pattern obtained by image development.
  • the post-baking is preferably performed in an environment of 8.1 kPa to 121.6 kPa, and more preferably in an environment of 50.66 kPa or more. On the other hand, it is more preferable to perform in an environment of 111.46 kPa or less, and it is particularly preferable to perform in an environment of 101.3 kPa or less.
  • the post-baking temperature is preferably 80 ° C. to 250 ° C., more preferably 110 ° C. to 170 ° C., and particularly preferably 130 ° C. to 150 ° C.
  • the post-baking time is preferably 1 minute to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 minutes to 10 minutes, and particularly preferably 2 minutes to 4 minutes.
  • the post-bake may be performed in an air environment or a nitrogen substitution environment.
  • the transport speed of the support in each step of the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited. It is preferably from min to 10 m / min, and more preferably from 2.0 m / min to 8.0 m / min except during exposure.
  • the method for manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure peels off the temporary support after the step of bonding to the substrate and before the step of forming the pattern. It is preferable to include a step (peeling step). Since the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure uses the photosensitive transfer material, at any timing after the photosensitive transfer material is bonded and before development. Even if the support is peeled off, the adhesiveness with the photosensitive resin layer is excellent, so that the cause of defects such as partial peeling is suppressed, and the pattern can be formed satisfactorily.
  • the manufacturing method of the resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes the step of bonding to the substrate and the photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of pattern formability and resolution. It is more preferable that a step of peeling the temporary support is included before the pattern exposure step. Furthermore, when the pattern exposure is performed by bringing the mask into contact with the above aspect, the photosensitive resin layer and the mask are not in direct contact with each other. There is no restriction
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method preferably includes a step (etching step) of etching the conductive layer in a region where the pattern is not disposed.
  • the etching step the pattern formed from the photosensitive resin layer in the developing step is used as an etching resist, and the conductive layer is etched.
  • Etching of the conductive layer can be performed by a known method such as a method described in paragraphs 0048 to 0054 of JP 2010-152155 A or a dry etching method such as a known plasma etching.
  • a known method such as a method described in paragraphs 0048 to 0054 of JP 2010-152155 A
  • a dry etching method such as a known plasma etching.
  • a commonly performed wet etching method in which the substrate is immersed in an etching solution can be used.
  • an acid type or alkaline type etchant may be appropriately selected in accordance with an object to be etched.
  • Acidic etchants include hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, acetic acid, hydrofluoric acid, oxalic acid, or aqueous solutions of acidic components such as phosphoric acid alone, acidic components and ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride, or permanganese
  • a mixed aqueous solution of a salt such as potassium acid is exemplified.
  • the acidic component a component obtained by combining a plurality of acidic components may be used.
  • Alkali type etching solutions include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, organic amine, or an aqueous solution of an alkaline component alone such as a salt of an organic amine such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, an alkaline component and potassium permanganate.
  • a mixed aqueous solution of a salt such as As the alkali component, a component obtained by combining a plurality of alkali components may be used.
  • the temperature of the etching solution is not particularly limited, but is preferably 45 ° C. or lower.
  • the pattern used as an etching mask preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to acidic and alkaline etching solutions in a temperature range of 45 ° C. or lower. Therefore, the pattern is prevented from peeling off during the etching process, and a portion where the pattern does not exist is selectively etched.
  • a process of cleaning the etched substrate (cleaning process) and a process of drying the etched substrate (drying process) are performed as necessary. Also good.
  • the cleaning step for example, the substrate may be cleaned with pure water at room temperature (10 ° C. to 35 ° C.) for 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
  • the drying step for example, air blow may be used, and the air blow pressure (about 0.1 kg / cm 2 to about 5 kg / cm 2 ) may be appropriately adjusted for drying.
  • the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication includes the process (etching resist peeling process) which peels the said photosensitive resin layer using peeling liquid after the said etching process. After the etching process is finished, the patterned photosensitive resin layer remains. If the photosensitive resin layer is unnecessary, all the remaining photosensitive resin layers may be removed.
  • a method of peeling using a peeling solution for example, a substrate having the above-mentioned photosensitive resin layer or the like in the peeling solution preferably stirred at 30 to 80 ° C., more preferably 50 to 80 ° C. for 5 minutes. Examples include a method of immersing for ⁇ 30 minutes.
  • an inorganic alkali component such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide, or an organic alkali component such as a tertiary amine or quaternary ammonium salt, water, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, or And a stripping solution dissolved in a mixed solution thereof.
  • a stripping solution may be used and stripped by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method, or the like.
  • the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication may repeat an exposure process, a image development process, and an etching process twice or more as needed.
  • the exposure step, the development step, and other steps in the present disclosure the methods described in paragraphs 0035 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-23696 can be suitably used in the present disclosure.
  • the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may include other optional steps.
  • the following processes are mentioned, it is not limited to these processes.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method may include a process of reducing the visible light reflectance of the surface of the conductive layer, for example, part or all of the surface of the conductive layer on the substrate.
  • the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance include an oxidation treatment.
  • the visible light reflectance can be reduced by blackening by oxidizing copper to copper oxide.
  • paragraphs 0017 to 0025 of JP2014-150118A, and paragraphs 0041, 0042, 0048 and 0058 of JP2013-206315A are described. The contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
  • a method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of forming an insulating film on the substrate, for example, a formed wiring (etched conductive layer), and a step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film. It is also preferable to contain.
  • an insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having insulating properties.
  • a new conductive layer having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having conductivity.
  • the new conductive layer may be etched by forming an etching resist by a method similar to the above, or may be separately etched by a known method.
  • the substrate having the circuit wiring obtained by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may have only one layer of wiring on the substrate, or may have two or more layers of wiring.
  • the substrate may have a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces, and the circuit may be sequentially or simultaneously formed on the conductive layers formed on both surfaces of the substrate.
  • a wiring in which a first conductive pattern (first wiring) is formed on one surface of the substrate and a second conductive pattern (second wiring) is formed on the other surface, preferably a touch panel wiring. can be formed.
  • the circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is a circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure.
  • substrate which has the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication is a board
  • substrate which has the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication is not limited, For example, it is preferable that it is a circuit wiring board for touchscreens.
  • An input device is an example of a device provided with circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure.
  • the input device according to the present disclosure may be an input device having at least circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a capacitive touch panel.
  • the display device according to the present disclosure preferably includes the input device according to the present disclosure.
  • the display device according to the present disclosure is preferably an organic EL display device and an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device.
  • the touch panel according to the present disclosure is a touch panel having at least circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure.
  • the touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably includes at least a transparent substrate, an electrode, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
  • the touch panel display device according to the present disclosure is a touch panel display device having at least circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a touch panel display device including the touch panel according to the present disclosure.
  • the touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a touch panel manufacturing method using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, but the photosensitive resin of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • a step of bringing the outermost layer on the layer side into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer, a step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive resin layer, and a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern And a step of etching the conductive layer in the region where the pattern is not disposed are preferably included in this order.
  • the detection method in the touch panel according to the present disclosure and the touch panel display device according to the present disclosure may be any known method such as a resistive film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method. Among these, the electrostatic capacity method is preferable.
  • a so-called in-cell type for example, those described in FIGS. 5, 6, 7, and 8 of JP-T-2012-517051
  • a so-called on-cell type for example, JP 2013-168125 A
  • OGS One Glass Solution
  • TOL Touch-on-Lens
  • other configurations for example, those shown in FIG. 6 of JP2013-164671A
  • various out-cell types for example, GG, G1, G2, GFF, GF2, GF1, G1F, etc.
  • ATHF 2-tetrahydrofuranyl acrylate (synthetic product)
  • AA Acrylic acid (Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • EA ethyl acrylate (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • MAA Methacrylic acid (Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • MMA Methyl methacrylate (Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • HEMA 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • CHA cyclohexyl acrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
  • each monomer column of Table 1 represents the quantity of the structural unit formed from each monomer in the obtained polymer, The unit is the mass%.
  • the intermediate layer forming polymers P-7 to P-9 are acrylic resins having a neutralization rate of acid groups or basic groups of 100 mol%.
  • Resin A Methacrylic acid / Allyl methacrylate copolymer resin (Mw: 25,000, composition ratio: 40/60)
  • Resin B Nissan HPC-SSL (manufactured by Nippon Soda Co., Ltd.)
  • E-11 Megafuck F-444 (manufactured by DIC Corporation)
  • F-1 Bromophenol blue (colorant (pigment), manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd., maximum absorption wavelength: 606 nm)
  • MEK Methyl ethyl ketone (Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • the unit of the amount of each component in Table 2 or Table 3 is part by mass.
  • NaOH (1N) in Table 2 or Table 3 is a 1 mol / L sodium hydroxide aqueous solution.
  • the weight average molecular weights of the polymers A-1 to A-7 were 20,000, respectively.
  • Preparation of photosensitive resin compositions 1 to 7 A polymer, a photoacid generator, a basic compound, a benzotriazole compound, and a surfactant were dissolved and mixed in PGMEA so that the solid content ratio was 10% by mass so that the solid content ratio shown in Table 5 was obtained. Then, the mixture was filtered through a polytetrafluoroethylene filter having a pore diameter of 0.2 ⁇ m to obtain photosensitive resin compositions 1 to 7, respectively.
  • Example 1 ⁇ Production of photosensitive transfer material> Using a slit-like nozzle on a 30 ⁇ m thick polyethylene terephthalate film (hereinafter also referred to as PET (A)) as a temporary support so that the composition for forming an intermediate layer has the structure shown in Table 6 below. It apply
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • Example 2 to 17 Before using the composition shown in Table 6 or Table 7 and forming the intermediate layer, the water-soluble resin layer is formed in the average film thickness described in Table 6 or Table 7 in the same manner as the intermediate layer in Example 1. Then, photosensitive transfer materials 2 to 17 were used in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the compositions shown in Table 6 or 7 below were used and the intermediate layer was formed to have an average film thickness shown in Table 6 or Table 7. Were prepared respectively.
  • Photosensitive transfer materials C1 to C3 were prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the compositions shown in Table 6 below were used.
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • the protective film was peeled from the photosensitive transfer material of Example 1, and the photosensitive transfer material obtained on the copper layer in the above-mentioned PET substrate with a copper layer was subjected to conditions of 100 ° C., 4 m / min, linear pressure 0.6 MPa. Then, the temporary support was peeled off to produce a laminate in which a positive photosensitive layer was laminated on the copper layer.
  • Printac C manufactured by Nitto Denko Corporation
  • the residue in the space portion was observed with a scanning electron microscope (SEM), and the exposure amount at which the resist line width was exactly 10 ⁇ m was determined.
  • SEM scanning electron microscope
  • the produced photosensitive transfer material was allowed to stand in an environment of 40 ° C. and 55% RH for 7 days, and then laminated on a PET substrate with a copper layer under the same conditions as described above. Without exposing the temporary support, the film was exposed through a line-and-space pattern mask (duty ratio 1: 1) having a line width of 10 ⁇ m after exposure to obtain a resist line width of just 10 ⁇ m, and the temperature was 23 ° C. After leaving for 3 hours in an environment of 55% RH, the temporary support was peeled off and developed.
  • Line width variation is less than 1.0 ⁇ m 2: Line width variation is 1.0 ⁇ m or more and less than 2.0 ⁇ m 1: Line width variation is 2.0 ⁇ m or more
  • Example 101 Indium tin oxide (ITO) was deposited as a second conductive layer on a 100 ⁇ m thick PET substrate by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer to a thickness of 200 nm by vacuum evaporation. To form a circuit forming substrate.
  • the photosensitive transfer material produced in Example 1 was laminated on the copper layer (linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min, roll temperature 90 ° C.). Contact pattern exposure was performed using a photomask provided with a pattern (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern A”) shown in FIG. 2 having a configuration in which conductive layer pads are connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support.
  • pattern A a pattern shown in FIG. 2 having a configuration in which conductive layer pads are connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support.
  • the solid line portion SL and the gray portion G are light shielding portions, and the dotted line portion DL virtually shows an alignment alignment frame.
  • the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a pattern A.
  • the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • a substrate on which copper (solid line portion SL) and ITO (gray portion G) were both drawn with the pattern A was obtained.
  • pattern alignment was performed using a photomask provided with openings of a pattern shown in FIG. 3 (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern B”) in the aligned state, and development and washing were performed.
  • the gray portion G is a light shielding portion
  • the dotted line portion DL is a virtual alignment alignment frame.
  • the copper layer was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was peeled off using a peeling solution (10% by mass sodium hydroxide aqueous solution) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
  • a peeling solution (10% by mass sodium hydroxide aqueous solution
  • Example 102 On the 100 ⁇ m-thick PET substrate, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer at a thickness of 200 nm by vacuum evaporation. Thus, a substrate for forming a conductive pattern was obtained.
  • the photosensitive transfer material obtained in Example 2 was bonded to a substrate on a copper layer (roll temperature 120 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 1.0 m / min) to obtain a laminate.
  • the laminate was subjected to pattern exposure using a photomask provided with a pattern A having a configuration in which conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support.
  • the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a resin pattern drawn with pattern A.
  • the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), A substrate on which both copper and ITO were drawn in pattern A was obtained.
  • PET (A) was bonded as a protective layer on the remaining resist. In this state, pattern exposure was performed using a photomask provided with openings of pattern B in the aligned state, and after the PET (A) was peeled off, development and washing were performed.
  • the copper wiring was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was stripped using a stripping solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
  • a stripping solution KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.
  • Example 103 On the 100 ⁇ m-thick cycloolefin polymer (COP) substrate, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer by a thickness of 200 nm by vacuum evaporation. To form a substrate for forming a conductive pattern.
  • the photosensitive transfer material obtained in Example 2 was bonded to a substrate on a copper layer (roll temperature 100 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min) to obtain a laminate.
  • the laminate was subjected to pattern exposure using a photomask provided with a pattern A having a configuration in which conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a resin pattern drawn with pattern A.
  • the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), and a peeling solution.
  • KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.
  • the photosensitive transfer material obtained in Example 2 was bonded onto the remaining resist (roll temperature 100 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min).
  • pattern exposure was performed using a photomask provided with openings of pattern B in the aligned state, and the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material was peeled off, followed by development and washing with water.
  • the copper wiring was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was stripped using a stripping solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board having a conductive pattern. .
  • KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Structural Engineering (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Architecture (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Exposure And Positioning Against Photoresist Photosensitive Materials (AREA)
  • Addition Polymer Or Copolymer, Post-Treatments, Or Chemical Modifications (AREA)
  • Manufacturing Of Printed Circuit Boards (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are: a photosensitive transfer material; and a resin pattern manufacturing method, a circuit wiring manufacturing method, and a touch panel manufacturing method which use the photosensitive transfer material. The photosensitive transfer material has a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin layer that includes a polymer having a structural unit which has an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group, and a photoacid generator, wherein the polymer contained in the photosensitive resin layer is an acrylic resin having an acid value of 10 mgKOH/g or less, the intermediate layer contains a water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin, and the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer are in contact with each other.

Description

感光性転写材料、樹脂パターンの製造方法、回路配線の製造方法、及び、タッチパネルの製造方法Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
 本開示は、感光性転写材料、樹脂パターンの製造方法、回路配線の製造方法、及び、タッチパネルの製造方法に関する。 The present disclosure relates to a photosensitive transfer material, a resin pattern manufacturing method, a circuit wiring manufacturing method, and a touch panel manufacturing method.
 静電容量型入力装置などのタッチパネルを備えた表示装置(有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(EL)表示装置及び液晶表示装置など)では、視認部のセンサーに相当する電極パターン、周辺配線部分及び取り出し配線部分の配線などの導電層パターンがタッチパネル内部に設けられている。
 一般的にパターン化した層の形成には、必要とするパターン形状を得るための工程数が少ないといったことから、感光性転写材料を用いて任意の基板上に設けた感光性樹脂組成物の層に対して、所望のパターンを有するマスクを介して露光した後に現像する方法が広く使用されている。
In a display device (such as an organic electroluminescence (EL) display device and a liquid crystal display device) having a touch panel such as a capacitance type input device, an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor of a visual recognition part, a wiring of a peripheral wiring part, and a lead-out wiring part A conductive layer pattern such as is provided inside the touch panel.
In general, a patterned layer is formed by a photosensitive resin composition layer provided on an arbitrary substrate using a photosensitive transfer material because the number of steps for obtaining a required pattern shape is small. On the other hand, a method of developing after exposure through a mask having a desired pattern is widely used.
 従来の感光性転写材料としては、特許文献1又は2に記載されたものが知られている。
 特許文献1には、支持体と、熱可塑性樹脂層と、感光性樹脂組成物層とをこの順で有し、上記感光性樹脂組成物層が(A)酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位(a1)を有する重合体を含む重合体成分及び(B)光酸発生剤を含むことを特徴とする感光性転写材料が開示されている。
 また、特許文献2には、仮支持体と、下記一般式Aで表される構成単位及び酸基を有する構成単位を含み、かつ、ガラス転移温度が90℃以下である重合体、並びに光酸発生剤を含むポジ型感光性樹脂層と、を有する感光性転写材料が開示されている。
As a conventional photosensitive transfer material, those described in Patent Document 1 or 2 are known.
Patent Document 1 includes a support, a thermoplastic resin layer, and a photosensitive resin composition layer in this order, and the photosensitive resin composition layer is protected by (A) an acid group with an acid-decomposable group. A photosensitive transfer material comprising a polymer component containing a polymer having a structural unit (a1) having a group formed and (B) a photoacid generator is disclosed.
Patent Document 2 includes a temporary support, a polymer containing a structural unit represented by the following general formula A and a structural unit having an acid group, and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or lower, and a photoacid. A photosensitive transfer material having a positive photosensitive resin layer containing a generator is disclosed.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
 一般式A中、R31及びR32はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR31及びR32のいずれか一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R33はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよい。R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又はアリーレン基を表す。 In general formula A, R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group. Alternatively, it represents an aryl group, and R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether. R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 0 represents a single bond or an arylene group.
  特許文献1:特開2014-85643号公報
  特許文献2:特開2017-156735号公報
Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-85643 Patent Document 2: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-156735
 本発明の一実施形態が解決しようとする課題は、保存安定性、及び、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性に優れる感光性転写材料を提供することである。
 また、本発明の他の一実施形態が解決しようとする課題は、上記感光性転写材料を用いた樹脂パターンの製造方法、回路配線の製造方法、及び、タッチパネルの製造方法を提供することである。
The problem to be solved by one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a photosensitive transfer material that is excellent in storage stability and adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer.
Another problem to be solved by another embodiment of the present invention is to provide a resin pattern manufacturing method, a circuit wiring manufacturing method, and a touch panel manufacturing method using the photosensitive transfer material. .
 上記課題を解決するための手段には、以下の態様が含まれる。
<1> 仮支持体と、中間層と、感光性樹脂層とを有し、上記感光性樹脂層が、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体、及び、光酸発生剤を含み、上記感光性樹脂層に含まれる上記重合体が、酸価が10mgKOH/g以下であるアクリル樹脂であり、上記中間層が、水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂を含み、上記中間層と上記感光性樹脂層とが接している感光性転写材料。
<2> 上記感光性樹脂層に含まれる上記アクリル樹脂の酸価が、0mgKOH/g~3mgKOH/gである<1>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<3> 上記感光性樹脂層に含まれる上記アクリル樹脂が、pKaH3以上である基を有する構成単位を更に有する<1>又は<2>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<4> 上記中間層における水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂が、水溶性アクリル樹脂である<1>~<3>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<5> 上記水溶性アクリル樹脂が、酸基又は塩基性基を有し、かつ前記酸基又は塩基性基の中和率が、90モル%以上である水溶性アクリル樹脂である<4>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<6> 上記中間層における水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂が、アルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂である<1>~<3>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<7> 上記アルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂の酸価が、30mgKOH/g~150mgKOH/gである<6>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<8> 上記中間層の平均膜厚が、3μm以下である<1>~<7>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<9> 上記中間層における上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂が、ヒドロキシ基を有する樹脂を含む<1>~<8>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<10> 上記中間層の上記感光性樹脂層が接している側とは反対側に、フェノール樹脂、変性セルロース樹脂、及び、ポリビニルアルコール樹脂よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の水溶性樹脂を含む水溶性樹脂層を更に有する<1>~<9>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<11> 上記酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位が、下記式Aで表される構成単位である<1>~<10>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
Means for solving the above problems include the following aspects.
<1> A polymer having a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin layer, wherein the photosensitive resin layer has a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group, and light The polymer that contains an acid generator and is contained in the photosensitive resin layer is an acrylic resin having an acid value of 10 mgKOH / g or less, the intermediate layer contains a water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin, A photosensitive transfer material in contact with the photosensitive resin layer.
<2> The photosensitive transfer material according to <1>, wherein an acid value of the acrylic resin contained in the photosensitive resin layer is 0 mgKOH / g to 3 mgKOH / g.
<3> The photosensitive transfer material according to <1> or <2>, wherein the acrylic resin contained in the photosensitive resin layer further includes a structural unit having a group that is pKaH3 or more.
<4> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin in the intermediate layer is a water-soluble acrylic resin.
<5> The water-soluble acrylic resin according to <4>, wherein the water-soluble acrylic resin has an acid group or a basic group, and the neutralization rate of the acid group or the basic group is 90 mol% or more. The photosensitive transfer material as described.
<6> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin in the intermediate layer is an alkali-soluble acrylic resin.
<7> The photosensitive transfer material according to <6>, wherein the acid value of the alkali-soluble acrylic resin is 30 mgKOH / g to 150 mgKOH / g.
<8> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <7>, wherein an average film thickness of the intermediate layer is 3 μm or less.
<9> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <8>, wherein the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin in the intermediate layer contains a resin having a hydroxy group.
<10> The intermediate layer includes at least one water-soluble resin selected from the group consisting of a phenol resin, a modified cellulose resin, and a polyvinyl alcohol resin on the side opposite to the side in contact with the photosensitive resin layer. The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <9>, further comprising a water-soluble resin layer.
<11> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <10>, wherein the structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group is a structural unit represented by the following formula A: .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
 式A中、R31及びR32はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR31及びR32のいずれか一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R33はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。 In formula A, R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group or Represents an aryl group, and R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may combine to form a cyclic ether, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 0 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Represents.
<12> <1>~<11>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料における上記感光性樹脂層側の最外層を基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、をこの順に含む樹脂パターンの製造方法。
<13> <1>~<11>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料における上記感光性樹脂層側の最外層を、導電層を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、上記パターンが配置されていない領域における導電層をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含む回路配線の製造方法。
<14> 上記導電層が、銅を含む層である<13>に記載の回路配線の製造方法。
<15> <1>~<11>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料における上記感光性樹脂層側の最外層を、導電層を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、上記パターンが配置されていない領域における導電層をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含むタッチパネルの製造方法。
<12> The step of bringing the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <11> into contact with a substrate and bonding the photosensitive resin layer to the pattern A method for producing a resin pattern, comprising: an exposing step; and a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern in this order.
<13> The step of bringing the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <11> into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer, and bonding the photosensitive layer A step of pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer, a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern, and a step of etching the conductive layer in the region where the pattern is not disposed. A method of manufacturing circuit wiring including the same.
<14> The method for producing circuit wiring according to <13>, wherein the conductive layer is a layer containing copper.
<15> The step of bringing the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <11> into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer, and bonding the photosensitive layer A step of pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer, a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern, and a step of etching the conductive layer in the region where the pattern is not disposed. A method for manufacturing a touch panel.
 本発明の一実施形態によれば、保存安定性、及び、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性に優れる感光性転写材料を提供することができる。
 また、本発明の他の一実施形態によれば、上記感光性転写材料を用いた樹脂パターンの製造方法、回路配線の製造方法、及び、タッチパネルの製造方法を提供することができる。
According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a photosensitive transfer material that is excellent in storage stability and adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer.
In addition, according to another embodiment of the present invention, a resin pattern manufacturing method, a circuit wiring manufacturing method, and a touch panel manufacturing method using the photosensitive transfer material can be provided.
本開示に係る感光性転写材料の層構成の一例を示す概略図である。It is the schematic which shows an example of the laminated constitution of the photosensitive transfer material which concerns on this indication. パターンAを示す概略図である。FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing a pattern A. パターンBを示す概略図である。FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing a pattern B.
 以下、本開示の内容について説明する。なお、添付の図面を参照しながら説明するが、符号は省略する場合がある。
 また、本明細書において「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
 また、本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリル」はアクリル及びメタクリルの双方、又は、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリレート」はアクリレート及びメタクリレートの双方、又は、いずれかを表す。
 更に、本明細書において組成物中の各成分の量は、組成物中に各成分に該当する物質が複数存在する場合、特に断らない限り、組成物中に存在する該当する複数の物質の合計量を意味する。
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけでなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であっても工程の所期の目的が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さないものと共に置換基を有するものをも包含するものである。例えば「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含するものである。
 また、本明細書における化学構造式は、水素原子を省略した簡略構造式で記載する場合もある。
 本開示において、「質量%」と「重量%」とは同義であり、「質量部」と「重量部」とは同義である。
 また、本開示において、2以上の好ましい態様の組み合わせは、より好ましい態様である。
 また、本開示における重量平均分子量(Mw)及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、特に断りのない限り、TSKgel GMHxL、TSKgel G4000HxL、TSKgel G2000HxL(何れも東ソー(株)製の商品名)のカラムを使用したゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)分析装置により、溶媒THF(テトラヒドロフラン)、示差屈折計により検出し、標準物質としてポリスチレンを用いて換算した分子量である。
Hereinafter, the contents of the present disclosure will be described. In addition, although it demonstrates referring an accompanying drawing, a code | symbol may be abbreviate | omitted.
In the present specification, a numerical range expressed using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
In this specification, “(meth) acryl” represents both and / or acryl and methacryl, and “(meth) acrylate” represents both and / or acrylate and methacrylate.
Further, in the present specification, the amount of each component in the composition is the sum of the plurality of corresponding substances present in the composition unless there is a specific indication when there are a plurality of substances corresponding to each component in the composition. Means quantity.
In this specification, the term “process” is not limited to an independent process, and is included in this term if the intended purpose of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes.
In the notation of groups (atomic groups) in this specification, the notation that does not indicate substitution and non-substitution includes those having no substituent and those having a substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
In addition, the chemical structural formula in this specification may be expressed as a simplified structural formula in which a hydrogen atom is omitted.
In the present disclosure, “mass%” and “weight%” are synonymous, and “part by mass” and “part by weight” are synonymous.
In the present disclosure, a combination of two or more preferred embodiments is a more preferred embodiment.
In addition, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) in the present disclosure use columns of TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, and TSKgel G2000HxL (all trade names manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) unless otherwise specified. The molecular weight was detected by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) analyzer using a THF (tetrahydrofuran) solvent and a differential refractometer, and converted using polystyrene as a standard substance.
(感光性転写材料)
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、仮支持体と、中間層と、感光性樹脂層とを有し、上記感光性樹脂層が、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体(以下、「酸分解性樹脂」ともいう。)、及び、光酸発生剤を含み、上記感光性樹脂層に含まれる上記重合体が、酸価が10mgKOH/g以下であるアクリル樹脂であり、上記中間層が、水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂を含み、上記中間層と上記感光性樹脂層とが接している。
 なお、本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性に優れる。
 また、本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、仮支持体と、中間層と、感光性樹脂層とをこの順で有することが好ましい。
(Photosensitive transfer material)
A photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure includes a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin layer, and the photosensitive resin layer includes a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group. An acrylic resin that contains a polymer (hereinafter also referred to as “acid-decomposable resin”) and a photoacid generator, and the polymer contained in the photosensitive resin layer has an acid value of 10 mgKOH / g or less. The intermediate layer contains a water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin, and the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer are in contact with each other.
In addition, the photosensitive transfer material which concerns on this indication is excellent in the adhesiveness of an intermediate | middle layer and the photosensitive resin layer.
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure preferably includes a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin layer in this order.
 従来の感光性転写材料は、長期間保存した場合に、感光性樹脂層を露光して形成した樹脂パターンの線幅が変動してしまう場合があり、保存安定性が十分でなかった。
 上記保存安定性の課題に対し、本発明者らは、感光性樹脂層に含まれる重合体を酸価が10mgKOH/g以下であるアクリル樹脂ものとすることにより、保存安定性が改良できることを見出した。
 しかしながら、酸価が10mgKOH/g以下であるアクリル樹脂を含む感光性樹脂層と、特許文献1等に記載されているポリビニルアルコール(PVA)を含む中間層とを有する感光性転写材料では、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性が悪化することを本発明者らは見出した。
 これに対し、本発明者らは鋭意検討を重ねた結果、上記構成の感光性転写材料とすることにより、保存安定性を維持したまま、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性を改良できることを見出した。
When the conventional photosensitive transfer material is stored for a long time, the line width of the resin pattern formed by exposing the photosensitive resin layer may fluctuate, and the storage stability is not sufficient.
In response to the above-mentioned storage stability problem, the present inventors have found that storage stability can be improved by making the polymer contained in the photosensitive resin layer an acrylic resin having an acid value of 10 mgKOH / g or less. It was.
However, in the photosensitive transfer material having a photosensitive resin layer containing an acrylic resin having an acid value of 10 mgKOH / g or less and an intermediate layer containing polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) described in Patent Document 1, etc., the intermediate layer The present inventors have found that the adhesion between the resin and the photosensitive resin layer deteriorates.
On the other hand, as a result of intensive studies, the present inventors can improve the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer while maintaining the storage stability by using the photosensitive transfer material having the above-described configuration. I found.
 詳細な上記効果の発現機構は不明であるが、以下のように考えている。
 まず、保存安定性が改良した機構について、説明する。感光性転写材料を長期間保管した場合、感光性樹脂層に含まれるアクリル樹脂が酸価10mgKOH/gより大きい場合には、感光性樹脂層が空気中の水分を吸収する。上記吸収した水と、感光性樹脂層に含まれる重合体が有する酸基に由来する酸が、上記重合体が有する酸分解性基を分解するために、保存安定性が悪化したと推察される。
 これに対し、感光性樹脂層に含まれるアクリル樹脂を10mgKOH/g以下にすることにより、低酸価かつ疎水的な感光性樹脂層となり、分解に寄与する酸及び水が低減するため、酸分解性基が分解する反応を抑制できた結果、保存安定性が改良できたと考えている。
 また、水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂を含む中間層とすることにより、上記アクリル樹脂と感光性樹脂層に含まれる重合体との極性が近くなり、互いの相互作用が向上して、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性が良好になったものと考えている。
Although the detailed expression mechanism of the above effect is unknown, it is considered as follows.
First, the mechanism with improved storage stability will be described. When the photosensitive transfer material is stored for a long period of time, if the acrylic resin contained in the photosensitive resin layer has an acid value greater than 10 mgKOH / g, the photosensitive resin layer absorbs moisture in the air. It is presumed that the storage stability deteriorated because the acid derived from the water absorbed and the acid group of the polymer contained in the photosensitive resin layer decomposes the acid-decomposable group of the polymer. .
On the other hand, by setting the acrylic resin contained in the photosensitive resin layer to 10 mgKOH / g or less, it becomes a low-acid-value and hydrophobic photosensitive resin layer, and acid and water contributing to decomposition are reduced. As a result of suppressing the reaction that decomposes the functional group, it is considered that the storage stability can be improved.
In addition, by using an intermediate layer containing a water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin, the polarities of the acrylic resin and the polymer contained in the photosensitive resin layer become close to each other, and the mutual interaction is improved. It is considered that the adhesiveness with the photosensitive resin layer is improved.
 以下、本開示に係る感光性転写材料について、詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure will be described in detail.
 図1は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の層構成の一例を概略的に示している。図1に示す感光性転写材料100は、仮支持体10と、中間層12と、感光性樹脂層14と、カバーフィルム16とがこの順に積層されている。
 感光性樹脂層14に含まれる上記アクリル樹脂の酸価は、10mgKOH/g以下であり、中間層12は、水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂を含む。
 以下、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の構成材料等について説明する。
FIG. 1 schematically illustrates an example of a layer configuration of a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. In the photosensitive transfer material 100 shown in FIG. 1, a temporary support 10, an intermediate layer 12, a photosensitive resin layer 14, and a cover film 16 are laminated in this order.
The acid value of the acrylic resin contained in the photosensitive resin layer 14 is 10 mgKOH / g or less, and the intermediate layer 12 contains a water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin.
Hereinafter, constituent materials and the like of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure will be described.
<仮支持体>
 仮支持体は、中間層及び感光性樹脂層を支持し、中間層から剥離可能な支持体である。
 本開示に用いられる仮支持体は、感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する際に仮支持体を介して感光性樹脂層を露光し得る観点から光透過性を有することが好ましい。
 本開示において、光透過性を有するとは、パターン露光に使用する光の主波長の透過率が50%以上であることを意味し、パターン露光に使用する光の主波長の透過率は、露光感度向上の観点から、60%以上が好ましく、70%以上がより好ましい。透過率の測定方法としては、大塚電子(株)製MCPD Seriesを用いて測定する方法が挙げられる。
 仮支持体としては、ガラス基板、樹脂フィルム、紙等が挙げられ、強度及び可撓性等の観点から、樹脂フィルムが特に好ましい。樹脂フィルムとしては、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、トリ酢酸セルロースフィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、ポリカーボネートフィルム等が挙げられる。中でも、2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが特に好ましい。
<Temporary support>
The temporary support is a support that supports the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and is peelable from the intermediate layer.
The temporary support used in the present disclosure preferably has light transmittance from the viewpoint that the photosensitive resin layer can be exposed through the temporary support when the photosensitive resin layer is subjected to pattern exposure.
In the present disclosure, having light transmittance means that the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is 50% or more, and the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is exposure. From the viewpoint of improving sensitivity, 60% or more is preferable, and 70% or more is more preferable. Examples of the method for measuring the transmittance include a method of measuring using MCPD Series manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.
Examples of the temporary support include a glass substrate, a resin film, paper, and the like, and a resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoints of strength and flexibility. Examples of the resin film include a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film. Among these, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable.
 仮支持体の厚みは、特に限定されず、5μm~200μmの範囲が好ましく、取扱い易さ、汎用性などの点で、10μm~150μmの範囲がより好ましい。
 仮支持体の厚みは、支持体としての強度、配線形成用基板との貼り合わせに求められる可撓性、最初の露光工程で要求される光透過性などの観点から、材質に応じて選択すればよい。
The thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 5 μm to 200 μm, and more preferably in the range of 10 μm to 150 μm in terms of ease of handling and versatility.
The thickness of the temporary support is selected according to the material from the viewpoints of strength as a support, flexibility required for bonding to a wiring forming substrate, light transmittance required in the first exposure process, and the like. That's fine.
 仮支持体の好ましい態様については、例えば、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0017~段落0018に記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 A preferred embodiment of the temporary support is described, for example, in paragraphs 0017 to 0018 of JP-A-2014-85643, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in this specification.
<中間層>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂を含む中間層を有する。
<Intermediate layer>
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has an intermediate layer containing a water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin.
-水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂-
 上記中間層は、水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂を含む。
 なお、本開示において、「水溶性」とは、22℃においてpH7.0の水への溶解度が0.1質量%以上であることを意味し、「アルカリ可溶性」とは、22℃において炭酸ナトリウムの1質量%水溶液への溶解度が0.1質量%以上であることを意味する。
 また、上記「水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性」とは、水溶性か、アルカリ可溶性のいずれかであっても、水溶性かつアルカリ可溶性であってもよい。
 上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂は、保存安定性の観点から、少なくとも水溶性を示す、水溶性アクリル樹脂であることが好ましい。
 また、上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂は、密着性の観点から、アルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂であることが好ましい。
-Water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin-
The intermediate layer includes a water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin.
In the present disclosure, “water-soluble” means that the solubility in water at pH 7.0 is 0.1% by mass or more at 22 ° C., and “alkali-soluble” means sodium carbonate at 22 ° C. It means that the solubility in a 1% by mass aqueous solution is 0.1% by mass or more.
The “water-soluble or alkali-soluble” may be either water-soluble or alkali-soluble, or water-soluble and alkali-soluble.
The water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is preferably a water-soluble acrylic resin that exhibits at least water solubility from the viewpoint of storage stability.
The water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is preferably an alkali-soluble acrylic resin from the viewpoint of adhesion.
 上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂は、水溶性及びアルカリ可溶性の観点から、親水性基を有することが好ましく、親水性基を有する構成単位を有することがより好ましい。
 上記親水性基としては、酸基、ヒドロキシ基、ポリアルキレンオキシ基、アミド基、塩基性基等が好ましく挙げられる。
 上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂は、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性(以下、単に「密着性」ともいう。)、及び、水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性の観点から、酸基、塩基性基又はヒドロキシ基を有する樹脂を含むことが好ましく、酸基又は塩基性基を有する樹脂を含むことがより好ましい。
 また、上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂は、密着性及び保存安定性の観点から、酸基、ヒドロキシ基、アミド基、塩基性基及びポリアルキレンオキシ基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の基を有する樹脂を含むことが好ましく、酸基、ヒドロキシ基及び塩基性基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の基を有する樹脂を含むことがより好ましく、ヒドロキシ基を有する樹脂を含むことが特に好ましい。
The water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin preferably has a hydrophilic group, and more preferably has a structural unit having a hydrophilic group, from the viewpoint of water-solubility and alkali-solubility.
Preferred examples of the hydrophilic group include an acid group, a hydroxy group, a polyalkyleneoxy group, an amide group, and a basic group.
The water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is an acid group or a basic compound from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer (hereinafter also simply referred to as “adhesion”) and water-solubility or alkali-solubility. It is preferable to include a resin having a group or a hydroxy group, and it is more preferable to include a resin having an acid group or a basic group.
The water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is at least one selected from the group consisting of an acid group, a hydroxy group, an amide group, a basic group, and a polyalkyleneoxy group from the viewpoint of adhesion and storage stability. It is preferable to include a resin having a group, more preferably including a resin having at least one group selected from the group consisting of an acid group, a hydroxy group and a basic group, and including a resin having a hydroxy group. Particularly preferred.
 酸基としては、密着性の観点から、カルボキシ基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基、又は、ホスホン酸基が好ましく挙げられ、カルボキシ基又はスルホン酸基がより好ましく挙げられる。
 上記酸基は、水溶性及び保存安定性の観点から、公知の塩基性化合物により中和されていることが好ましい。中和により水溶性及び酸価を調整することができる。
 中和に用いられる塩基性化合物としては、保存安定性の観点から、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、水酸化リチウム、アンモニア、第一級~第三級アミン又はアンモニウムヒドロキドであることが好ましく、水酸化ナトリウム又は水酸化カリウムであることがより好ましい。
 上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂が、酸性基を有し、かつ少なくとも水溶性を示す水溶性アクリル樹脂である場合、前記酸基の中和率は、水溶性及び保存安定性の観点から、70モル%以上であることが好ましく、80モル%以上であることがより好ましく、90モル%以上であることが特に好ましい。なお、好ましい中和率の上限値は、100モル%である。
 ポリアルキレンオキシ基としては、ポリエチレンオキシ基、ポリプロピレンオキシ基、又は、ポリ(エチレンオキシ/プロピレンオキシ)基が好ましく挙げられる。
As the acid group, from the viewpoint of adhesion, a carboxy group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, or a phosphonic acid group is preferable, and a carboxy group or a sulfonic acid group is more preferable.
The acid group is preferably neutralized with a known basic compound from the viewpoint of water solubility and storage stability. Water solubility and acid value can be adjusted by neutralization.
The basic compound used for neutralization is preferably sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, ammonia, primary to tertiary amine or ammonium hydroxide from the viewpoint of storage stability. More preferred is sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide.
When the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is a water-soluble acrylic resin having an acidic group and exhibiting at least water solubility, the neutralization rate of the acid group is 70 from the viewpoint of water solubility and storage stability. It is preferably at least mol%, more preferably at least 80 mol%, particularly preferably at least 90 mol%. In addition, the upper limit of a preferable neutralization rate is 100 mol%.
Preferred examples of the polyalkyleneoxy group include a polyethyleneoxy group, a polypropyleneoxy group, and a poly (ethyleneoxy / propyleneoxy) group.
 水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂が有する基としての塩基性基としては、保存安定性の観点から、窒素原子を有する塩基性基が好ましく挙げられ、アミノ基、又は、複素芳香族基がより好ましく挙げられる。
 上記塩基性基は、公知の酸性化合物により中和されていることが好ましい。中和により水溶性及びアルカリ可溶性を調整することができる。
 中和に用いられる酸性化合物としては、保存安定性の観点から、カルボン酸、スルホン酸、ハロゲン化水素、ボロン酸、ヘキサフルオロリン酸、硝酸、硫酸、過塩素酸、リン酸、又は、ホスホン酸であることが好ましく、カルボン酸又はスルホン酸であることがより好ましい。
 上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂が、塩基性基を有し、かつ少なくとも水溶性を示す水溶性アクリル樹脂である場合、前記塩基性基の中和率は、水溶性及びアルカリ可溶性の観点から、70モル%以上であることが好ましく、80モル%以上であることがより好ましく、90モル%以上であることが特に好ましい。なお、好ましい中和率の上限値は、100モル%である。
The basic group as the group possessed by the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is preferably a basic group having a nitrogen atom, more preferably an amino group or a heteroaromatic group, from the viewpoint of storage stability. It is done.
The basic group is preferably neutralized with a known acidic compound. Water solubility and alkali solubility can be adjusted by neutralization.
As an acidic compound used for neutralization, from the viewpoint of storage stability, carboxylic acid, sulfonic acid, hydrogen halide, boronic acid, hexafluorophosphoric acid, nitric acid, sulfuric acid, perchloric acid, phosphoric acid, or phosphonic acid It is preferable that it is carboxylic acid or sulfonic acid.
When the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is a water-soluble acrylic resin having a basic group and at least water-soluble, the neutralization rate of the basic group is from the viewpoint of water solubility and alkali solubility, It is preferably 70 mol% or more, more preferably 80 mol% or more, and particularly preferably 90 mol% or more. In addition, the upper limit of a preferable neutralization rate is 100 mol%.
 本開示における、樹脂における酸基又は塩基性基の中和率は、以下の式で表される。
  中和率(モル%)=100×樹脂における中和された酸基又は塩基性基のモル当量/樹脂における全酸基又は塩基性基のモル当量
 本開示における、樹脂における酸基の中和率の測定方法を以下に示す。
 樹脂の赤外吸収スペクトルを測定し、酸基及び中和された酸基、又は、酸基に該当するピーク(例えば、カルボキシ基のC=O伸縮振動)と、中和された酸基に該当するピーク(例えば、カルボキシレート基の対称伸縮振動)との面積比を求め、中和率(モル%)を算出する。
 樹脂における塩基性基の中和率の測定方法も、比較対象となるピークを塩基性基のピークと中和された塩基性基のピークに変更する以外は、上記酸基の中和率の測定方法と同様な方法で行うものとする。
The neutralization rate of the acid group or basic group in the resin in the present disclosure is represented by the following formula.
Neutralization rate (mol%) = 100 × mole equivalent of neutralized acid group or basic group in resin / mole equivalent of total acid group or basic group in resin In the present disclosure, neutralization rate of acid group in resin The measuring method is shown below.
Measures infrared absorption spectrum of resin, corresponds to acid group and neutralized acid group, or peak corresponding to acid group (eg C = O stretching vibration of carboxy group) and neutralized acid group The area ratio to the peak (for example, the symmetrical stretching vibration of the carboxylate group) is determined, and the neutralization rate (mol%) is calculated.
The measurement method of the neutralization rate of the basic group in the resin also measures the neutralization rate of the acid group except that the peak to be compared is changed to the peak of the basic group and the peak of the neutralized basic group The method is the same as the method.
 上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性樹脂の酸価は、保存安定性の観点から、0mgKOH/g~200mgKOH/gであることが好ましく、0mgKOH/g~150mgKOH/gであることがより好ましく、0mgKOH/g~100mgKOH/gであることが更に好ましい。
 また、上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂が、水溶性アクリル樹脂である場合、上記水溶性アルカリ可溶性樹脂の酸価は、保存安定性の観点から、0mgKOH/g~50mgKOH/gであることが好ましく、0mgKOH/g~20mgKOH/gであることがより好ましく、0mgKOH/g~10mgKOH/gであることが更に好ましい。
 上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂が、アルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂(好ましくは水溶性を有しないアルカリ可溶性樹脂)である場合、上記アルカリ可溶性樹脂の酸価は、保存安定性の観点から、30mgKOH/g~200mgKOH/gであることが好ましく、30mgKOH/g~150mgKOH/gであることがより好ましく、30mgKOH/g~100mgKOH/gであることが更に好ましい。酸価が200mgKOH/g以下であると、感光性樹脂層における酸分解性樹脂の不要な分解を抑制することができる。また、酸価が30mgKOH/g以上であると、感光性樹脂層と中間層との混合を抑制できる。
 なお、上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂の酸価は、後述する酸価の測定方法により測定するものとする。
From the viewpoint of storage stability, the acid value of the water-soluble or alkali-soluble resin is preferably 0 mgKOH / g to 200 mgKOH / g, more preferably 0 mgKOH / g to 150 mgKOH / g, and 0 mgKOH / g to More preferably, it is 100 mgKOH / g.
When the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is a water-soluble acrylic resin, the acid value of the water-soluble alkali-soluble resin is preferably 0 mgKOH / g to 50 mgKOH / g from the viewpoint of storage stability. 0 mg KOH / g to 20 mg KOH / g, more preferably 0 mg KOH / g to 10 mg KOH / g.
When the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is an alkali-soluble acrylic resin (preferably an alkali-soluble resin not having water solubility), the acid value of the alkali-soluble resin is from 30 mgKOH / g to from the viewpoint of storage stability. It is preferably 200 mgKOH / g, more preferably 30 mgKOH / g to 150 mgKOH / g, and still more preferably 30 mgKOH / g to 100 mgKOH / g. When the acid value is 200 mgKOH / g or less, unnecessary decomposition of the acid-decomposable resin in the photosensitive resin layer can be suppressed. Moreover, mixing with the photosensitive resin layer and an intermediate | middle layer can be suppressed as an acid value is 30 mgKOH / g or more.
In addition, the acid value of the said water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin shall be measured with the acid value measuring method mentioned later.
 本開示におけるアクリル樹脂は、(メタ)アクリレート化合物、(メタ)アクリルアミド化合物、及び、(メタ)アクリル酸よりなる群から選ばれた化合物由来の構成単位を50質量%以上含む樹脂であればよく、上記化合物由来の構成単位を70質量%以上含む樹脂であることが好ましく、上記化合物由来の構成単位を80質量%以上含む樹脂であることがより好ましく、上記化合物由来の構成単位を90質量%以上含む樹脂であることが特に好ましい。
 上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂への親水性基の導入方法としては、親水性基を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物や(メタ)アクリル酸を単独重合又は共重合する方法、及び、アクリル樹脂に対し、高分子反応を行い、親水性基を導入する方法等が挙げられる。
The acrylic resin in the present disclosure may be a resin containing 50% by mass or more of a structural unit derived from a compound selected from the group consisting of a (meth) acrylate compound, a (meth) acrylamide compound, and (meth) acrylic acid, It is preferably a resin containing 70% by mass or more of the structural unit derived from the compound, more preferably a resin containing 80% by mass or more of the structural unit derived from the compound, and 90% by mass or more of the structural unit derived from the compound. It is especially preferable that it is resin to contain.
As a method for introducing a hydrophilic group into the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin, a method of homopolymerizing or copolymerizing a (meth) acrylate compound or (meth) acrylic acid having a hydrophilic group, and an acrylic resin And a method of introducing a hydrophilic group by performing a polymer reaction.
 上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂が酸基又は酸基の塩を少なくとも有する場合は、上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂は、密着性の観点から、酸基若しくは酸基の塩を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物の共重合体、又は、(メタ)アクリル酸の共重合体であることが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸の共重合体であることがより好ましい。
 また、上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂がヒドロキシ基を有する場合は、上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂は、密着性の観点から、ヒドロキシ基を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物の単独重合体又は共重合体であることが好ましい。
 上記ヒドロキシ基を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物としては、特に制限はないが、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート化合物が好ましく挙げられ、ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレートがより好ましく挙げられる。
When the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin has at least an acid group or an acid group salt, the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin has an acid group or an acid group salt from the viewpoint of adhesion (meth). It is preferably a copolymer of an acrylate compound or a copolymer of (meth) acrylic acid, and more preferably a copolymer of (meth) acrylic acid.
When the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin has a hydroxy group, the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is a homopolymer or copolymer of a (meth) acrylate compound having a hydroxy group from the viewpoint of adhesion. It is preferably a coalescence.
Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular as said (meth) acrylate compound which has the said hydroxyl group, A hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate compound is mentioned preferably and a hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate is mentioned more preferably.
 上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂は、密着性の観点から、エチレン性不飽和基を有することが好ましく、エチレン性不飽和基を有する構成単位を有することがより好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和基としては、(メタ)アクリル基、アリル基、ビニル基、スチリル基(芳香族ビニル基)等が挙げられる。中でも、(メタ)アクリロキシ基又はアリル基が好ましく、アリル基がより好ましい。
From the viewpoint of adhesion, the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin preferably has an ethylenically unsaturated group, and more preferably has a structural unit having an ethylenically unsaturated group.
Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated group include a (meth) acryl group, an allyl group, a vinyl group, and a styryl group (aromatic vinyl group). Among these, a (meth) acryloxy group or an allyl group is preferable, and an allyl group is more preferable.
 上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂の重量平均分子量は、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性、パターン形成性、露光後の現像液への溶解性及び転写性の観点から、1,000以上であることが好ましく、2,000~100,000であることが好ましく、10,000~50,000であることがより好ましい。 The water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin has a weight average molecular weight of 1,000 or more from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer, pattern formation, solubility in the developer after exposure, and transferability. It is preferably 2,000 to 100,000, more preferably 10,000 to 50,000.
 上記中間層は、上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂を1種単独で含有していても、2種以上を含有していてもよい。
 上記中間層中の上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂の含有量は、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性、パターン形成性、露光後の現像液への溶解性及び転写性の観点から、中間層の全質量に対し、10質量%以上100質量%以下であることが好ましく、20質量%以上100質量%以下であることがより好ましく、40質量%以上100質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、60質量%以上100質量%以下であることが特に好ましい。
The said intermediate | middle layer may contain the said water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin individually by 1 type, or may contain 2 or more types.
The content of the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin in the intermediate layer is from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer, pattern formation, solubility in a developer after exposure, and transferability. It is preferably 10% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less, and further preferably 40% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the intermediate layer. It is particularly preferably 60% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less.
-上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂以外の樹脂-
 上記中間層は、上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂以外の樹脂を含んでいてもよく、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性及びパターン形成性の観点から、上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂以外の水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含むことが好ましい。
-Resins other than the above water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resins-
The intermediate layer may contain a resin other than the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin, and from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formability, the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin. It is preferable to contain other water-soluble or alkali-soluble resins.
 上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂以外の樹脂としては、例えば、フェノールホルムアルデヒド樹脂、m-クレゾールホルムアルデヒド樹脂、p-クレゾールホルムアルデヒド樹脂、m-/p-混合クレゾールホルムアルデヒド樹脂、フェノール/クレゾール(m-,p-,又はm-/p-混合のいずれでもよい)混合ホルムアルデヒド樹脂等のフェノール樹脂又はノボラック樹脂、ピロガロールアセトン樹脂、ポリヒドロキシスチレン樹脂、変性セルロース樹脂、デンプン類、グリコーゲン類、キチン類、アガロース類、カラギーナン類、プルラン類、アラビアガム、ソヤガム、ポリアミド樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、ポリアセタール樹脂、上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂以外のアクリル樹脂、ポリスチレン樹脂、ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール樹脂、ポリビニルホルマール、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリエチレンイミン、ポリアリルアミン、ポリアルキレングリコール等が挙げられる。 Examples of the resin other than the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin include phenol formaldehyde resin, m-cresol formaldehyde resin, p-cresol formaldehyde resin, m- / p-mixed cresol formaldehyde resin, phenol / cresol (m-, p (May be either-or m- / p-mixed) Phenol resins such as mixed formaldehyde resins or novolac resins, pyrogallol acetone resins, polyhydroxystyrene resins, modified cellulose resins, starches, glycogens, chitins, agaroses, Carrageenans, pullulans, gum arabic, soya gum, polyamide resins, epoxy resins, polyacetal resins, acrylic resins other than the above water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resins, polystyrene resins, polyurethane Tan resins, polyvinyl alcohol resins, polyvinyl formal, polyamide resin, polyester resin, polyethyleneimine, polyallylamine, polyalkylene glycol, and the like.
 これらの中でも、上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂以外の水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性及びパターン形成性の観点から、フェノール樹脂、変性セルロース樹脂、及び、ポリビニルアルコール樹脂よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の樹脂であることが好ましく、変性セルロース樹脂であることがより好ましい。
 また、変性セルロース樹脂としては、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性及びパターン形成性の観点から、ヒドロキシアルキル化セルロースが好ましい。
 ヒドロキシアルキル化セルロースとしては、ヒドロキシメチルセルロース、ヒドロキシエチルセルロース、ポリヒドロキシエチル化セルロース、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース、ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース、グリオキザール化ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース、ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロースフタレート等が好ましく挙げられる。
 中でも、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性及びパターン形成性の観点から、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース及びヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロースよりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の樹脂であることが好ましく、ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロースであることがより好ましい。
Among these, as the water-soluble or alkali-soluble resin other than the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin, from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formability, a phenol resin, a modified cellulose resin, and It is preferably at least one resin selected from the group consisting of polyvinyl alcohol resins, and more preferably a modified cellulose resin.
The modified cellulose resin is preferably hydroxyalkylated cellulose from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formation.
Preferred examples of the hydroxyalkylated cellulose include hydroxymethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, polyhydroxyethylated cellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, glyoxalized hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate and the like.
Among these, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formability, it is preferably at least one resin selected from the group consisting of hydroxypropylcellulose and hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, and is hydroxypropylmethylcellulose. It is more preferable.
 上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂以外の樹脂の重量平均分子量は、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性、パターン形成性、露光後の現像液への溶解性及び転写性の観点から、1,000以上であることが好ましく、2,000~100,000であることが好ましく、10,000~50,000であることがより好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight of the resin other than the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is 1 from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer, pattern formation, solubility in the developer after exposure, and transferability. Of 2,000 to 100,000, preferably 2,000 to 100,000, more preferably 10,000 to 50,000.
 上記中間層は、上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂以外の樹脂を1種単独で含有していても、2種以上を含有していてもよい。
 上記中間層中の上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂以外の樹脂の含有量は、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性、パターン形成性、露光後の現像液への溶解性及び転写性の観点から、中間層の全質量に対し、0質量%以上90質量%以下であることが好ましく、0質量%以上80質量%以下であることがより好ましく、5質量%以上60質量%以下であることが特に好ましい。
The intermediate layer may contain one kind of resin other than the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin alone, or may contain two or more kinds.
The content of the resin other than the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin in the intermediate layer is such that the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer, pattern formation, solubility in the developer after exposure, and transferability. From the viewpoint, it is preferably 0% by mass to 90% by mass, more preferably 0% by mass to 80% by mass, and more preferably 5% by mass to 60% by mass with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer. It is particularly preferred.
-粒子-
 上記中間層は、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性の観点から、粒子を含んでいてもよい。
 上記粒子としては、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性の観点から、金属酸化物粒子、又は、有機粒子であることが好ましく、Si、Ti及びZrよりなる群から選択される元素の酸化物粒子、又は、有機粒子であることがより好ましい。
 なお、本開示における金属酸化物粒子の金属には、B、Si、Ge、As、Sb、Te等の半金属も含まれるものとする。
 金属酸化物粒子としては、Be、Mg、Ca、Sr、Ba、Sc、Y、La、Ce、Gd、Tb、Dy、Yb、Lu、Ti、Zr、Hf、Nb、Mo、W、Zn、B、Al、Si、Ge、Sn、Pb、Sb、Bi、Te等の原子を含む酸化物粒子が好ましく、シリカ、酸化チタン、チタン複合酸化物、酸化亜鉛、酸化ジルコニウム、インジウム/スズ酸化物、又は、アンチモン/スズ酸化物がより好ましく、シリカ、酸化チタン、チタン複合酸化物、又は、酸化ジルコニウムが更に好ましく、シリカ、酸化チタン、又は、酸化ジルコニウムが特に好ましい。
 有機粒子としては、有機樹脂粒子が好ましく挙げられる。
 有機樹脂粒子としては例えば、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、アクリル酸エステル、メタクリル酸エステル等のアクリル酸系モノマーの単独重合体及び共重合体、ニトロセルロース、メチルセルロース、エチルセルロース、セルロースアセテートのようなセルロース系ポリマー、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、ポリスチレン、塩化ビニル系共重合体、塩化ビニル-酢酸ビニル共重合体、ポリビニルピロリドン、ポリビニルブチラール、ポリビニルアルコールのようなビニル系ポリマー及びビニル化合物の共重合体、ポリエステル、ポリウレタン、ポリアミドのような縮合系ポリマー、ブタジエン-スチレン共重合体のようなゴム系熱可塑性ポリマー、エポキシ化合物のような光重合性若しくは熱重合性化合物を重合、架橋させたポリマー、メラミン化合物等を挙げることができる。
 これらの中でも、有機粒子としては、アクリル樹脂粒子が好ましく挙げられ、ポリメチルメタクリレート粒子がより好ましく挙げられる。
 また、これら粒子は、分散安定性付与のために表面を有機材料や無機材料で処理することもできる。上記粒子は、表面が親水性の粒子であることが好ましい。例えば、表面が疎水性の粒子の表面を親水化処理する等が挙げられる。
-particle-
The intermediate layer may contain particles from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer.
From the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer, the particles are preferably metal oxide particles or organic particles, and an oxidation of an element selected from the group consisting of Si, Ti, and Zr. More preferably, it is a physical particle or an organic particle.
Note that the metal of the metal oxide particles in the present disclosure includes metalloids such as B, Si, Ge, As, Sb, and Te.
As the metal oxide particles, Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Sc, Y, La, Ce, Gd, Tb, Dy, Yb, Lu, Ti, Zr, Hf, Nb, Mo, W, Zn, B Oxide particles containing atoms such as Al, Si, Ge, Sn, Pb, Sb, Bi, Te, etc. are preferred, silica, titanium oxide, titanium composite oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium / tin oxide, or Antimony / tin oxide is more preferable, silica, titanium oxide, titanium composite oxide, or zirconium oxide is further preferable, and silica, titanium oxide, or zirconium oxide is particularly preferable.
As the organic particles, organic resin particles are preferably exemplified.
Examples of the organic resin particles include homopolymers and copolymers of acrylic acid monomers such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, acrylic ester, and methacrylic ester, and cellulose polymers such as nitrocellulose, methylcellulose, ethylcellulose, and cellulose acetate. , Polyethylene, polypropylene, polystyrene, vinyl chloride copolymers, vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymers, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyvinyl butyral, vinyl polymers such as polyvinyl alcohol, and copolymers of vinyl compounds, polyesters, polyurethanes, polyamides Condensation polymers such as butadiene-styrene copolymers, rubber-based thermoplastic polymers such as butadiene-styrene copolymers, polymers obtained by polymerizing and crosslinking photopolymerizable or thermopolymerizable compounds such as epoxy compounds, Min compounds and the like.
Among these, acrylic resin particles are preferable as the organic particles, and polymethyl methacrylate particles are more preferable.
Moreover, the surface of these particles can be treated with an organic material or an inorganic material in order to impart dispersion stability. The particles are preferably particles having a hydrophilic surface. For example, the surface of particles having a hydrophobic surface may be subjected to a hydrophilic treatment.
 上記粒子の算術平均粒子径は、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性の観点から、400nm以下であることが好ましく、250nm以下であることがより好ましく、150nm以下であることが更に好ましく、10nm~200nmであることが特に好ましい。
 本開示における粒子の算術平均粒子径の測定方法は、電子顕微鏡により任意の粒子200個の粒子径を測定し、その算術平均をいう。また、粒子の形状が球形でない場合には、最大径を径とする。
The arithmetic average particle diameter of the particles is preferably 400 nm or less, more preferably 250 nm or less, and further preferably 150 nm or less, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer. A thickness of 10 nm to 200 nm is particularly preferable.
The method for measuring the arithmetic average particle diameter of particles in the present disclosure refers to an arithmetic average obtained by measuring the particle diameter of 200 arbitrary particles with an electron microscope. When the particle shape is not spherical, the maximum diameter is taken as the diameter.
 上記中間層における上記粒子の体積分率(中間層における粒子が占める体積割合)は、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性の観点から、中間層の全体積に対し、5%~90%であることが好ましく、10%~80%であることがより好ましく、15%~70%であることが更に好ましく、20%~60%であることが特に好ましい。 The volume fraction of the particles in the intermediate layer (volume ratio of particles in the intermediate layer) is 5% to 90% with respect to the total volume of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer. It is preferably 10% to 80%, more preferably 15% to 70%, and particularly preferably 20% to 60%.
-色素-
 上記中間層は、露光パターンの確認容易性の観点から、発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が450nm以上であり、酸、塩基又はラジカルにより極大吸収波長が変化する色素を含有することが好ましい。
 色素が「酸、塩基又はラジカルにより極大吸収波長が変化する」とは、発色状態にある色素が酸、塩基又はラジカルにより消色する態様、消色状態にある色素が酸、塩基又はラジカルにより発色する態様、発色状態にある色素が他の色相の発色状態に変化する態様のいずれの態様を指すものであってもよい。
 具体的には、色素は、露光により消色状態から変化して発色する化合物であってもよいし、露光により発色状態から変化して消色する化合物であってもよい。この場合、露光により酸、塩基又はラジカルが組成物内に導入されることにより、発色又は消色の状態が変化する色素でもよく、酸、塩基又はラジカルが導入されることで系内の性状(例えばpH)が変化することで発色又は消色の状態が変化する色素でもよい。また、露光を介さずに、酸、塩基又はラジカルが刺激として直接的に与えられて発色又は消色の状態が変化する色素でもよい。
 中でも、色素は、露光により発色する化合物であっても、露光により消色する化合物であってもよいが、視認性の観点から、露光により消色する化合物であることが好ましく、光酸発生剤から発生する酸により消色する潜在性色素、すなわち、酸の発生によりpHが変化して消色するpH感受性色素であることがより好ましい。
-Dye-
From the viewpoint of easy confirmation of the exposure pattern, the intermediate layer contains a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development of 450 nm or more, and the maximum absorption wavelength being changed by an acid, base or radical. Is preferred.
“The maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, base or radical” when the dye is in a state where the dye in a colored state is decolored by an acid, base or radical, and the dye in a decolored state is colored by an acid, base or radical It may refer to any of the embodiments in which the dye in a colored state changes to a colored state in another hue.
Specifically, the dye may be a compound that changes color from a decolored state upon exposure or a compound that changes color from a developed state upon exposure. In this case, the dye may be changed in coloration or decoloration by introducing an acid, base or radical into the composition by exposure, and the properties in the system (by introducing the acid, base or radical) For example, it may be a dye whose coloring or decoloring state changes as the pH changes. Further, it may be a dye whose color development or decoloring state is changed by direct application of acid, base or radical as a stimulus without exposure.
Among them, the dye may be a compound that develops color by exposure or a compound that erases by exposure, but from the viewpoint of visibility, it is preferably a compound that can be erased by exposure. More preferably, it is a latent dye that is decolored by an acid generated from the acid, that is, a pH sensitive dye that is decolored by changing the pH due to the generation of an acid.
 pH感受性色素であることの確認は、以下の方法により行うことができる。
 色素0.1gを、エタノール及び水の混合溶液(エタノール/水=1/2[質量比])100mLに溶かし、0.1mol/L(1N)の塩酸水溶液を加えてpH=1に調整する。0.01mol/L(0.01N)の水酸化ナトリウム水溶液で滴定し、発色変化と発色変化が現れた際のpHとを確認する。なお、pHは、pHメーター(型番:HM-31、東亜ディーケーケー(株)製)を用いて25℃で測定される値である。
Confirmation of the pH-sensitive dye can be performed by the following method.
0.1 g of the dye is dissolved in 100 mL of a mixed solution of ethanol and water (ethanol / water = 1/2 [mass ratio]), and 0.1 mol / L (1N) aqueous hydrochloric acid solution is added to adjust to pH = 1. Titrate with 0.01 mol / L (0.01 N) aqueous sodium hydroxide to confirm the color change and the pH at which the color change appears. The pH is a value measured at 25 ° C. using a pH meter (model number: HM-31, manufactured by Toa DKK Co., Ltd.).
 色素は、発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nm極大吸収波長が450nm以上であり、視認性の観点から、550nm以上であることが好ましく、550nm以上700nm以下であることがより好ましく、550nm以上650nm以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、色素は、発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長を1つのみ有していてもよく、2つ以上有していてもよい。色素が発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長を2つ以上有する場合は、少なくとも1つの2つ以上の発色時における極大吸収波長のうち、吸光度の最も高い発色時における極大吸収波長が450nm以上であればよい。
The dye has a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development of 450 nm or more, and from the viewpoint of visibility, is preferably 550 nm or more, more preferably 550 nm to 700 nm, and more preferably 550 nm to 650 nm. More preferably it is.
Further, the dye may have only one maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, or may have two or more. When the dye has two or more maximum absorption wavelengths in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, among the maximum absorption wavelengths at the time of at least one two or more color development, the maximum absorption wavelength at the time of color development with the highest absorbance is 450 nm. That is all you need.
 本開示における極大吸収波長の測定方法は、大気の雰囲気下で、25℃にて分光光度計:UV3100((株)島津製作所製)を用いて、400nm~780nmの範囲で透過スペクトルを測定し、光の強度が極小となる波長(極大吸収波長)を測定するものとする。 The measurement method of the maximum absorption wavelength in the present disclosure is to measure a transmission spectrum in the range of 400 nm to 780 nm using a spectrophotometer: UV3100 (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) at 25 ° C. in an air atmosphere. The wavelength at which the light intensity is minimized (maximum absorption wavelength) is measured.
 露光により発色又は消色する色素としては、例えば、ロイコ化合物が挙げられる。
 また、露光により消色する色素としては、例えば、ロイコ化合物、ジフェニルメタン系色素、オキザジン系色素、キサンテン系色素、イミノナフトキノン系色素、アゾメチン系色素、アントラキノン系色素等が挙げられる。
 中でも、色素としては、視認性の観点から、ロイコ化合物が好ましい。
 ロイコ化合物としては、トリアリールメタン系(例えばトリフェニルメタン系)、スピロピラン系、フルオラン系、ジフェニルメタン系、ローダミンラクタム系、インドリルフタリド系、ロイコオーラミン系等のロイコ化合物が挙げられる。中でも、トリアリールメタン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(トリアリールメタン系色素)が好ましく、トリフェニルメタン系色素がより好ましい。
 また、ロイコ化合物としては、視認性の観点から、ラクトン環、スルチン環、又はスルトン環を有し、ラクトン環、スルチン環、又は、スルトン環が開環又は閉環するものが好ましく、スルトン環を有し、スルトン環が閉環して消色するロイコ化合物であることがより好ましい。
Examples of the dye that develops or decolors upon exposure include leuco compounds.
Examples of the dye that can be erased by exposure include leuco compounds, diphenylmethane dyes, oxazine dyes, xanthene dyes, iminonaphthoquinone dyes, azomethine dyes, anthraquinone dyes, and the like.
Among these, as the pigment, a leuco compound is preferable from the viewpoint of visibility.
Examples of the leuco compound include triarylmethane-based (for example, triphenylmethane-based), spiropyran-based, fluoran-based, diphenylmethane-based, rhodamine lactam-based, indolylphthalide-based, leucooramine-based leuco compounds. Among them, a leuco compound (triarylmethane dye) having a triarylmethane skeleton is preferable, and a triphenylmethane dye is more preferable.
In addition, from the viewpoint of visibility, the leuco compound preferably has a lactone ring, sultin ring, or sultone ring, and the lactone ring, sultin ring, or sultone ring is preferably opened or closed, and has a sultone ring. And it is more preferable that it is a leuco compound in which a sultone ring is closed and decolored.
 色素は、水系レジスト剥離液への色素の析出による欠陥を防止する目的で、水溶性の化合物であることが好ましい。
 水溶性とは、25℃の水100質量部に対する色素の溶解量が0.1質量部以上(好ましくは1質量部以上、より好ましくは5質量部以上)であることを意味する。
The dye is preferably a water-soluble compound for the purpose of preventing defects due to precipitation of the dye in the aqueous resist stripping solution.
Water-soluble means that the amount of the dye dissolved in 100 parts by mass of water at 25 ° C. is 0.1 parts by mass or more (preferably 1 part by mass or more, more preferably 5 parts by mass or more).
 上記の中でも、色素は、視認性の観点から、下記式PIで表される化合物であることが好ましい。 Among the above, the dye is preferably a compound represented by the following formula PI from the viewpoint of visibility.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
 式PI中、Ar1p及びAr2pはそれぞれ独立に、芳香族基を表し、R1p~R4pはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の置換基を表す。 In formula PI, Ar 1p and Ar 2p each independently represent an aromatic group, and R 1p to R 4p each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
 Ar1p及びAr2pにおける芳香族基は、アリール基であっても、ヘテロアリール基であってもよく、また、単環の芳香族基であっても、2環以上が縮合した縮合環であってもよい。
 また、Ar1p及びAr2pは、結合して環を形成してもよい。
 Ar1p及びAr2pにおける芳香族基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 上記置換基としては、ヒドロキシル基、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリーロキシ基、ジアルキルアミノ基、アルキルアリールアミノ基、ジアリールアミノ基等が挙げられ、ジアルキルアミノ基、アルキルアリールアミノ基、ジアリールアミノ基であることが好ましい。上記ハロゲン原子は、臭素原子又はヨウ素原子であることが好ましく、臭素原子であることがより好ましい。また、上記アルキル基はそれぞれ独立に、炭素数が1~20のアルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数が1~10のアルキル基であることがより好ましい。
 これらの置換基は、更に置換基により置換されていてもよい。
 Ar1p及びAr2pの総炭素数はそれぞれ独立に、感度及び視認性の観点から、4~50であることが好ましく、6~40であることがより好ましく、10~30であることが更に好ましい。
 R1p~R4pはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリーロキシ基、ジアルキルアミノ基、アルキルアリールアミノ基、ジアリールアミノ基等が挙げられる。中でも水素原子が好ましい。
The aromatic group in Ar 1p and Ar 2p may be an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, or a monocyclic aromatic group, which is a condensed ring in which two or more rings are condensed. May be.
Ar 1p and Ar 2p may combine to form a ring.
The aromatic group in Ar 1p and Ar 2p may have a substituent.
Examples of the substituent include a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a dialkylamino group, an alkylarylamino group, a diarylamino group, a dialkylamino group, an alkylarylamino group, A diarylamino group is preferred. The halogen atom is preferably a bromine atom or an iodine atom, and more preferably a bromine atom. In addition, each of the alkyl groups is preferably independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
These substituents may be further substituted with a substituent.
The total carbon number of Ar 1p and Ar 2p is each independently preferably 4 to 50, more preferably 6 to 40, and still more preferably 10 to 30 from the viewpoints of sensitivity and visibility. .
R 1p to R 4p each independently include a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a dialkylamino group, an alkylarylamino group, a diarylamino group, and the like. Of these, a hydrogen atom is preferable.
 色素の好ましい具体例として、化合物PI-1~PI-3を以下に記載するが、本開示における色素はこれらに限定されないことは言うまでもない。 As preferred specific examples of the dye, compounds PI-1 to PI-3 are described below, but it is needless to say that the dye in the present disclosure is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 色素は、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を使用してもよい。
 上記中間層における色素の含有量は、視認性の観点から、中間層の全質量に対し、0.01質量%~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.1質量%~8質量%であることがより好ましく、0.5質量%~5質量%であることが更に好ましく、1.0質量%~3.0質量%であることが特に好ましい。
The dye may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the pigment in the intermediate layer is preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass and preferably 0.1% by mass to 8% by mass with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of visibility. More preferably, it is more preferably 0.5% by mass to 5% by mass, and particularly preferably 1.0% by mass to 3.0% by mass.
-その他の添加剤-
 本開示における上記中間層は、上記成分に加え、必要に応じて公知の添加剤を含むことができる。
 その他の添加剤としては、後述する感光性樹脂層に用いられるその他の添加剤が好適に挙げられる。
 また、上記中間層は、着色剤を含んでいてもよい。
-Other additives-
The intermediate layer in the present disclosure may contain a known additive as necessary in addition to the above components.
As other additives, other additives used in the photosensitive resin layer described later are preferably exemplified.
The intermediate layer may contain a colorant.
-中間層の平均膜厚-
 上記中間層の平均膜厚は、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性、及び、パターン形成性の観点から、0.05μm~10μmが好ましく、0.05μm~5μmがより好ましく、0.05μm~3μmが更に好ましく、0.05μm~1μmが特に好ましい。
 また、上記中間層の平均膜厚は、保存安定性の観点から、3μm以下であることが好ましい。
 本開示における各層の平均膜厚の測定方法は、特に制限はなく、公知の方法を用いることができる。また、平均値は10点以上測定し算出することが好ましい。
 具体的には例えば、表面形状測定や、断面の光学顕微鏡又は電子顕微鏡観察等が挙げられる。また、表面形状測定には、ブルカー社製Dektakシリーズを好適に使用することができる。また、断面観察には、走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)を好適に用いることができる。
 また、上記中間層の厚みは、上記感光性樹脂層の厚みより薄いことが好ましい。
-Average thickness of intermediate layer-
The average film thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably 0.05 μm to 10 μm, more preferably 0.05 μm to 5 μm, more preferably 0.05 μm from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formability. Is more preferably 3 μm, and particularly preferably 0.05 μm to 1 μm.
The average film thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably 3 μm or less from the viewpoint of storage stability.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular in the measuring method of the average film thickness of each layer in this indication, A well-known method can be used. The average value is preferably measured and calculated at 10 points or more.
Specific examples include surface shape measurement and cross-sectional optical microscope or electron microscope observation. In addition, Bruker's Dektak series can be suitably used for surface shape measurement. Moreover, a scanning electron microscope (SEM) can be used suitably for cross-sectional observation.
Moreover, it is preferable that the thickness of the said intermediate | middle layer is thinner than the thickness of the said photosensitive resin layer.
-中間層の形成方法-
 中間層の形成方法は、特に制限はないが、各成分、及び、溶剤(好ましくは、水系溶剤)を所定の割合でかつ任意の方法で混合し、撹拌溶解して中間層を形成するための中間層形成用組成物を調製することができる。例えば、各成分を、それぞれ予め溶剤に溶解させた溶液とした後、得られた溶液を所定の割合で混合して組成物を調製することもできる。以上の如くして調製した組成物は、孔径5μmのフィルター等を用いてろ過した後に、使用に供することもできる。
 水系溶剤としては、水や、アルコール類等の水溶性溶剤が挙げられる。
-Formation method of intermediate layer-
The method for forming the intermediate layer is not particularly limited, but each component and a solvent (preferably an aqueous solvent) are mixed at a predetermined ratio and in an arbitrary method, and stirred to dissolve to form the intermediate layer. An intermediate layer forming composition can be prepared. For example, it is possible to prepare a composition by mixing each component with a predetermined ratio after preparing each solution in advance in a solvent. The composition prepared as described above can be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore diameter of 5 μm.
Examples of the aqueous solvent include water and water-soluble solvents such as alcohols.
 中間層形成用組成物を仮支持体に塗布し、乾燥させることで、仮支持体上に中間層を容易に形成することができる。
 塗布方法は特に限定されず、スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布、インクジェット塗布などの公知の方法で塗布することができる。
 なお、仮支持体上に後述のその他の層(例えば、熱可塑性樹脂層等)を形成した上に、中間層を塗布することもできる。
The intermediate layer can be easily formed on the temporary support by applying the intermediate layer-forming composition to the temporary support and drying it.
The coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, and inkjet coating.
In addition, after forming other layers (for example, a thermoplastic resin layer or the like) described later on the temporary support, an intermediate layer can be applied.
<水溶性樹脂層>
 本開示における感光性転写材料は、露光後の引き置き安定性(PED(post exposure delay))の観点から、上記中間層の上記感光性樹脂層が接している側とは反対側に、水溶性樹脂を含む水溶性樹脂層を更に有することが好ましく、上記中間層の上記感光性樹脂層が接している側とは反対側に、フェノール樹脂、変性セルロース樹脂、及び、ポリビニルアルコール樹脂よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の水溶性樹脂を含む水溶性樹脂層を更に有することがより好ましい。
<Water-soluble resin layer>
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is water-soluble on the side of the intermediate layer opposite to the side where the photosensitive resin layer is in contact from the viewpoint of post-exposure stability (PED (post exposure delay)). It is preferable to further have a water-soluble resin layer containing a resin, on the side opposite to the side where the photosensitive resin layer is in contact with the intermediate layer, from the group consisting of a phenol resin, a modified cellulose resin, and a polyvinyl alcohol resin. It is more preferable to further have a water-soluble resin layer containing at least one selected water-soluble resin.
 水溶性樹脂層は、水溶性樹脂を含有する。
 水溶性樹脂層に用いられる水溶性樹脂は、上述した中間層に用いられる上記水溶性アクリル樹脂、又は、上記水溶性アクリル樹脂以外の水溶性樹脂と同様のものを用いることができ、好ましい態様も同様である。
 水溶性樹脂層は、水溶性樹脂を、1種単独で含んでいてもよいし、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
 水溶性樹脂の含有量は、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性の観点から、水溶性樹脂層の全質量に対し、50質量%~100質量%であることが好ましく、65質量%~99質量%であることがより好ましく、80質量%~98質量%であることが特に好ましい。
The water-soluble resin layer contains a water-soluble resin.
As the water-soluble resin used in the water-soluble resin layer, the water-soluble acrylic resin used in the above-described intermediate layer or the same water-soluble resin as the water-soluble acrylic resin other than the water-soluble acrylic resin can be used. It is the same.
The water-soluble resin layer may contain one type of water-soluble resin, or may contain two or more types.
The content of the water-soluble resin is preferably 50% by mass to 100% by mass with respect to the total mass of the water-soluble resin layer, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, and preferably 65% by mass to It is more preferably 99% by mass, and particularly preferably 80% by mass to 98% by mass.
 水溶性樹脂層は、粒子を含有していてもよい。
 水溶性樹脂層に用いられる粒子は、上述した中間層に用いられる粒子と同様のものを用いることができ、好ましい態様も同様である。
 水溶性樹脂層は、粒子を、1種単独で含んでいてもよいし、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
 粒子の含有量は、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性の観点から、水溶性樹脂層の全質量に対し、5質量%以下であることが好ましく、3質量%以下であることがより好ましく、1質量%以下であることが特に好ましい。
The water-soluble resin layer may contain particles.
The particles used for the water-soluble resin layer can be the same as the particles used for the intermediate layer described above, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
The water-soluble resin layer may contain one kind of particles or two or more kinds.
The content of the particles is preferably 5% by mass or less and more preferably 3% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the water-soluble resin layer from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer. It is preferably 1% by mass or less.
 水溶性樹脂層は、上述した以外のその他の化合物を含んでいてもよい。
 水溶性樹脂層に用いられるその他の化合物は、特に制限はなく、上述した中間層に用いられるその他の化合物と同様のものを用いることができ、好ましい態様も同様である。
The water-soluble resin layer may contain other compounds other than those described above.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular in the other compound used for a water-soluble resin layer, The thing similar to the other compound used for the intermediate | middle layer mentioned above can be used, A preferable aspect is also the same.
 上記水溶性樹脂層の平均厚さは、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性、及び、パターン形成性の観点から、0.3μm~10μmが好ましく、0.3μm~5μmがより好ましく、0.3μm~2.5μmが特に好ましい。
 また、上記水溶性樹脂層の平均厚さは、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性、及び、パターン形成性の観点から、上記中間層の平均厚さよりも厚いことが好ましい。
 更に、本開示に係る感光性転写材料が中間層及び水溶性樹脂層の両方を有する場合、中間層と水溶性樹脂層との合計平均厚さは、保存安定性、及び、パターン形成性の観点から、0.3μm~10μmが好ましく、0.3μm~5μmがより好ましく、0.3μm~2.5μmが特に好ましい。
The average thickness of the water-soluble resin layer is preferably from 0.3 μm to 10 μm, more preferably from 0.3 μm to 5 μm, from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formation. Particularly preferred is 3 μm to 2.5 μm.
Moreover, it is preferable that the average thickness of the water-soluble resin layer is thicker than the average thickness of the intermediate layer from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formation.
Furthermore, when the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has both an intermediate layer and a water-soluble resin layer, the total average thickness of the intermediate layer and the water-soluble resin layer is a viewpoint of storage stability and pattern formability. Therefore, 0.3 μm to 10 μm is preferable, 0.3 μm to 5 μm is more preferable, and 0.3 μm to 2.5 μm is particularly preferable.
<<水溶性樹脂層の形成方法>>
 水溶性樹脂層の形成方法は、特に制限はなく公知の方法を用いることができる。
 また、水溶性樹脂層を形成する場合、上記水溶性樹脂層及び上記中間層を形成する方法としては、逐次塗布法、又は、重層塗布法を好適に用いることができる。
 逐次塗布法により形成した場合であっても、上記水溶性樹脂層及び上記中間層のバインダー成分は水溶性樹脂であるため、水溶性樹脂層形成用組成物を仮支持体上に塗布乾燥して水溶性樹脂層を形成し、形成された水溶性樹脂層の上に中間層形成用組成物を塗布した際に、上記水溶性樹脂層の一部が溶解して中間層形成用組成物と混合し、例えば、中間層形成用組成物における粒子の一部が水溶性樹脂層へ移動する。
 粒子を含まない水溶性樹脂層形成用組成物を用いた場合であっても、上記水溶性樹脂層は、粒子が含む層となる場合がある。
 重層塗布法により上記水溶性樹脂層及び上記中間層を形成する場合、上記混合がより顕著であると考えられる。
 上記水溶性樹脂層の形成に用いられる水溶性樹脂層形成用組成物は、粒子を含んでいても、含んでいなくともよいが、水溶性樹脂層形成用組成物の液安定性の観点から、粒子を含まないことが好ましい。
<< Method for forming water-soluble resin layer >>
There is no restriction | limiting in particular in the formation method of a water-soluble resin layer, A well-known method can be used.
Moreover, when forming a water-soluble resin layer, as a method of forming the said water-soluble resin layer and the said intermediate | middle layer, a sequential coating method or a multilayer coating method can be used suitably.
Even when it is formed by a sequential coating method, the binder component of the water-soluble resin layer and the intermediate layer is a water-soluble resin, so the composition for forming a water-soluble resin layer is applied onto a temporary support and dried. A water-soluble resin layer is formed, and when the intermediate layer forming composition is applied on the formed water-soluble resin layer, a part of the water-soluble resin layer is dissolved and mixed with the intermediate layer forming composition. For example, some of the particles in the intermediate layer forming composition move to the water-soluble resin layer.
Even when a composition for forming a water-soluble resin layer that does not contain particles is used, the water-soluble resin layer may be a layer that contains particles.
When the water-soluble resin layer and the intermediate layer are formed by a multilayer coating method, the mixing is considered to be more remarkable.
From the viewpoint of the liquid stability of the water-soluble resin layer forming composition, the water-soluble resin layer forming composition used for forming the water-soluble resin layer may or may not contain particles. It is preferable that no particles are contained.
 また、水溶性樹脂層形成用組成物は、上述した中間層形成用組成物と同様に調製することができる。各成分に水溶性溶剤を含有させて粘度を調節し、塗布及び乾燥することで、水溶性樹脂層を好適に形成することができる。 Further, the water-soluble resin layer forming composition can be prepared in the same manner as the above-described intermediate layer forming composition. A water-soluble resin layer can be suitably formed by adding a water-soluble solvent to each component, adjusting the viscosity, and applying and drying.
<感光性樹脂層>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、仮支持体、中間層、及び、感光性樹脂層を有し、仮支持体、中間層、及び、感光性樹脂層をこの順で有することが好ましい。
 上記感光性樹脂層は、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体、及び、光酸発生剤を含み、上記感光性樹脂層に含まれる上記重合体が、酸価が10mgKOH/g以下のアクリル樹脂である。
 また、上記感光性樹脂層は、ポジ型感光性樹脂層であり、化学増幅ポジ型感光性樹脂層であることが好ましい。
 後述するオニウム塩やオキシムスルホネート化合物等の光酸発生剤は、活性放射線(活性光線)に感応して生成される酸が、酸分解性で保護された酸基を有するバインダー中の保護された酸基の脱保護に対して触媒として作用するので、1個の光量子の作用で生成した酸が、多数の脱保護反応に寄与し、量子収率は1を超え、例えば、10の数乗のような大きい値となり、いわゆる化学増幅の結果として、高感度が得られる。
 一方、活性放射線に感応する光酸発生剤としてキノンジアジド化合物(NQD)を用いた場合、逐次型光化学反応によりカルボキシ基を生成するが、その量子収率は必ず1以下であり、化学増幅型には該当しない。
<Photosensitive resin layer>
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure includes a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin layer, and preferably includes the temporary support, the intermediate layer, and the photosensitive resin layer in this order.
The photosensitive resin layer includes a polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group, and a photoacid generator, and the polymer contained in the photosensitive resin layer has an acid value. Is an acrylic resin of 10 mg KOH / g or less.
The photosensitive resin layer is a positive photosensitive resin layer, and is preferably a chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin layer.
Photo acid generators such as onium salts and oxime sulfonate compounds described below are protected acids in a binder having an acid group in which the acid generated in response to actinic radiation (active light) is acid-decomposable and protected. Since it acts as a catalyst for the deprotection of the group, the acid generated by the action of one photon contributes to many deprotection reactions, and the quantum yield exceeds 1, for example, the power of 10 As a result of so-called chemical amplification, high sensitivity is obtained.
On the other hand, when a quinonediazide compound (NQD) is used as a photoacid generator sensitive to actinic radiation, a carboxy group is generated by a sequential photochemical reaction, but its quantum yield is always 1 or less. Not applicable.
<<酸分解性で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体>>
 上記感光性樹脂層は、酸分解性で保護された酸基を有する構成単位(「構成単位A」ともいう。)を有する重合体(「特定重合体」ともいう。)を含む。
 また、上記感光性樹脂層は、構成単位Aを有する重合体に加え、後述する他の重合体を含んでいてもよい。
 また、上記特定重合体は、アクリル樹脂である。
<< A polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected by acid-decomposability >>
The photosensitive resin layer includes a polymer (also referred to as “specific polymer”) having a structural unit (also referred to as “structural unit A”) having an acid-decomposable and protected acid group.
In addition to the polymer having the structural unit A, the photosensitive resin layer may contain other polymers described later.
The specific polymer is an acrylic resin.
 本開示における上記特定重合体の酸価は、10mgKOH/g以下であり、保存安定性の観点から、0mgKOH/g以上8mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、0mgKOH/g以上5mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましく、0mgKOH/g以上3mgKOH/g以下であることが更に好ましく、0mgKOH/g以上1mgKOH/g以下であることが特に好ましく、0mgKOH/gであることが最も好ましい。
 本明細書において、酸価は、JIS K0070(1992年)に記載の方法に従って、測定された値を意味する。
 特に酸価3mgKOH/g以下の疎水的なアクリル樹脂を含む感光性樹脂層である場合においては、保存安定性の観点から、上記中間層に含まれる上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂として、酸価が30mgKOH/g以上のものを含むことが好ましい。
The acid value of the specific polymer in the present disclosure is 10 mgKOH / g or less, and from the viewpoint of storage stability, it is preferably 0 mgKOH / g or more and 8 mgKOH / g or less, and 0 mgKOH / g or more and 5 mgKOH / g or less. Is more preferably 0 mgKOH / g or more and 3 mgKOH / g or less, particularly preferably 0 mgKOH / g or more and 1 mgKOH / g or less, and most preferably 0 mgKOH / g.
In this specification, an acid value means the value measured according to the method as described in JIS K0070 (1992).
In particular, in the case of a photosensitive resin layer containing a hydrophobic acrylic resin having an acid value of 3 mgKOH / g or less, from the viewpoint of storage stability, as the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin contained in the intermediate layer, the acid value Preferably contains 30 mg KOH / g or more.
 上記特定重合体のI/O値は、保存安定性、及び、パターン形状の観点から、1.00以下であることが好ましく、0.80以下であることがより好ましく、0.65以下であることが特に好ましい。また、上記特定重合体のI/O値の下限値は、保存安定性、及び、パターン形状の観点から、0.30以上であることが好ましく、0.40以上であることがより好ましく、0.50以上であることが更に好ましく、0.56以上であることが特に好ましい。
 本開示におけるI/O値は、有機概念図に基づく無機性値Iを有機性値Oで除したI/O値である。
 上記I/O値については、有機概念図(甲田善生 著、三共出版(1984));KUMAMOTO PHARMACEUTICAL BULLETIN,第1号、第1~16項(1954年);化学の領域、第11巻、第10号、719~725項(1957年);フレグランスジャーナル、第34号、第97~111項(1979年);フレグランスジャーナル、第50号、第79~82項(1981年);などの文献に詳細な説明がある。I/O値の概念は、化合物の性質を、共有結合性を表す有機性基と、イオン結合性を表わす無機性基とに分け、全ての有機化合物を有機軸、無機軸と名付けた直行座標上の1点ずつに位置づけて示すものである。
The I / O value of the specific polymer is preferably 1.00 or less, more preferably 0.80 or less, and 0.65 or less from the viewpoint of storage stability and pattern shape. It is particularly preferred. Further, the lower limit value of the I / O value of the specific polymer is preferably 0.30 or more, more preferably 0.40 or more, from the viewpoint of storage stability and pattern shape. Is more preferably 50 or more, and particularly preferably 0.56 or more.
The I / O value in the present disclosure is an I / O value obtained by dividing the inorganic value I based on the organic conceptual diagram by the organic value O.
Regarding the above I / O values, organic conceptual diagram (Yoshio Koda, Sankyo Publishing (1984)); No. 10, 719-725 (1957); Fragrance Journal, No. 34, 97-111 (1979); Fragrance Journal, No. 50, 79-82 (1981); There is a detailed explanation. The concept of the I / O value is that the properties of a compound are divided into an organic group that represents covalent bonding and an inorganic group that represents ionic bonding, and all the organic compounds are orthogonal coordinates named organic axes and inorganic axes. Each of the above points is shown.
 上記特定重合体は、露光により生じる触媒量の酸性物質の作用により、特定重合体中の酸分解性で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aが脱保護反応を受け酸基となる。この酸基により、硬化反応が可能となる。
 以下に構成単位Aの好ましい態様について説明する。
In the specific polymer, the structural unit A having an acid-decomposable protected acid group in the specific polymer undergoes a deprotection reaction to be an acid group by the action of a catalytic amount of an acidic substance generated by exposure. This acid group enables a curing reaction.
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the structural unit A will be described.
 上記感光性樹脂層は、更に、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体以外の重合体を含んでいてもよい。
 また、上記重合体成分に含まれる全ての重合体がそれぞれ、後述する酸基を有する構成単位を少なくとも有する重合体であることが好ましい。
 また、上記感光性樹脂層は、更に、これら以外の重合体を含んでいてもよい。本開示における上記重合体成分は、特に述べない限り、必要に応じて添加される他の重合体を含めたものを意味するものとする。なお、後述する架橋剤及び分散剤に該当する化合物は、高分子化合物であっても、上記重合体成分に含まないものとする。
The photosensitive resin layer may further contain a polymer other than the polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group.
Moreover, it is preferable that all the polymers contained in the said polymer component are polymers which have at least the structural unit which has the acid group mentioned later, respectively.
The photosensitive resin layer may further contain a polymer other than these. Unless otherwise specified, the polymer component in the present disclosure means a material including other polymers added as necessary. In addition, even if it is a high molecular compound, the compound applicable to the crosslinking agent and dispersing agent mentioned later shall not be contained in the said polymer component.
 上記特定重合体は、付加重合型の樹脂であることが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸又はそのエステルに由来する構成単位を有する重合体であることがより好ましい。なお、(メタ)アクリル酸又はそのエステルに由来する構成単位以外の構成単位、例えば、スチレンに由来する構成単位や、ビニル化合物に由来する構成単位等を有していてもよい。 The specific polymer is preferably an addition polymerization type resin, and more preferably a polymer having a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or an ester thereof. In addition, you may have structural units other than the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or its ester, for example, the structural unit derived from styrene, the structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, etc.
 上記感光性樹脂層は、パターン形状の変形抑制、現像液への溶解性及び転写性の観点から、上記特定重合体として、上記構成単位Aとして下記式Aで表される構成単位を有する重合体を含むことが好ましく、上記特定重合体として、上記構成単位Aとして下記式Aで表される構成単位を有し、かつガラス転移温度が90℃以下である特定重合体を含むことがより好ましい。
 上記感光性樹脂層に含まれる特定重合体は、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
The photosensitive resin layer is a polymer having a structural unit represented by the following formula A as the structural unit A as the specific polymer from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape, solubility in a developer, and transferability. As the specific polymer, it is more preferable to include a specific polymer having a structural unit represented by the following formula A as the structural unit A and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or lower.
The specific polymer contained in the photosensitive resin layer may be one type or two or more types.
-酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位-
 上記重合体Aは、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を少なくとも含む。
 上記感光性樹脂層は、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体Aを含むことにより、極めて高感度な化学増幅ポジ型の感光性樹脂層とすることができる。
 本開示における「酸分解性基で保護された酸基」は、酸基及び酸分解性基として公知のものを使用でき、特に限定されない。具体的な酸基としては、カルボキシ基、及び、フェノール性水酸基が好ましく挙げられる。また、酸分解性基で保護された酸基としては、酸により比較的分解し易い基(例えば、式Aで表される基で保護されたエステル基、テトラヒドロピラニルエステル基、又は、テトラヒドロフラニルエステル基等のアセタール系官能基)や酸により比較的分解し難い基(例えば、tert-ブチルエステル基等の第三級アルキル基、tert-ブチルカーボネート基等の第三級アルキルカーボネート基)を用いることができる。
 これらの中でも、上記酸分解性基としては、感度及び解像性の観点から、アセタールの形で保護された構造を有する基であることが好ましい。
-Constituent units having acid groups protected with acid-decomposable groups-
The polymer A includes at least a structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group.
By including the polymer A having the structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group, the photosensitive resin layer can be an extremely sensitive chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin layer.
As the “acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group” in the present disclosure, those known as an acid group and an acid-decomposable group can be used, and are not particularly limited. Specific examples of the acid group preferably include a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxyl group. The acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group is a group that is relatively easily decomposed by an acid (for example, an ester group, a tetrahydropyranyl ester group, or a tetrahydrofuranyl ester protected with a group represented by the formula A). An acetal functional group such as a group) or a group that is relatively difficult to decompose with an acid (for example, a tertiary alkyl group such as a tert-butyl ester group or a tertiary alkyl carbonate group such as a tert-butyl carbonate group). Can do.
Among these, the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a structure protected in the form of an acetal from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution.
 上記酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位は、感度及び解像性の観点から、下記式Aで表される構成単位であることが好ましい。 The structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula A from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 式A中、R31及びR32はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR31及びR32のいずれか一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R33はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。 In formula A, R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group or Represents an aryl group, and R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may combine to form a cyclic ether, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 0 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Represents.
 式A中、R31又はR32がアルキル基の場合、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましい。R31又はR32がアリール基の場合、フェニル基が好ましい。R31及びR32はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基が好ましい。
 式A中、R33は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。
 また、R31~R33におけるアルキル基及びアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 式A中、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成することが好ましい。環状エーテルの環員数は特に制限はないが、5又は6であることが好ましく、5であることがより好ましい。
 式A中、Xは単結合又はアリーレン基を表し、単結合が好ましい。アリーレン基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 上記式Aで表される構成単位は、酸分解性基で保護されたカルボキシ基を有する構成単位である。特定重合体が式Aで表される構成単位を含むことで、パターン形成時の感度に優れ、また、解像度より優れる。
In the formula A, when R 31 or R 32 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R 31 or R 32 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferable. R 31 and R 32 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In Formula A, R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
Further, the alkyl group and aryl group in R 31 to R 33 may have a substituent.
In Formula A, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and R 31 or R 32 and R 33 are preferably linked to form a cyclic ether. The number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
In Formula A, X 0 represents a single bond or an arylene group, and a single bond is preferable. The arylene group may have a substituent.
The structural unit represented by the formula A is a structural unit having a carboxy group protected with an acid-decomposable group. When the specific polymer contains the structural unit represented by the formula A, the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation is excellent and the resolution is superior.
 式A中、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、特定重合体のTgをより低くし得るという観点から、水素原子であることが好ましい。
 より具体的には、特定重合体に含まれる式Aで表される構成単位の全量に対し、式AにおけるR34が水素原子である構成単位は20質量%以上であることが好ましい。
 なお、上記酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位中の、式AにおけるR34が水素原子である構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-核磁気共鳴スペクトル(NMR)測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
In Formula A, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint that the Tg of the specific polymer can be further lowered.
More specifically, the structural unit in which R 34 in Formula A is a hydrogen atom is preferably 20% by mass or more with respect to the total amount of the structural unit represented by Formula A contained in the specific polymer.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit in which R 34 in formula A is a hydrogen atom in the structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group is 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance. It can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated from the spectrum (NMR) measurement by a conventional method.
 式Aで表される構成単位の中でも、下記式A2で表される構成単位が、パターン形成時の感度を更に高める観点からより好ましい。 Among the structural units represented by the formula A, the structural unit represented by the following formula A2 is more preferable from the viewpoint of further increasing the sensitivity during pattern formation.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 式A2中、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、R35~R41はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表す。
 式A2中、R34は水素原子が好ましい。
 式A2中、R35~R41は、水素原子が好ましい。
In formula A2, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and R 35 to R 41 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In formula A2, R 34 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
In formula A2, R 35 to R 41 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
 式Aで表される、酸分解性基で保護されたカルボキシ基を有する構成単位の好ましい具体例としては、下記の構成単位が例示できる。なお、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表す。 Preferable specific examples of the structural unit represented by the formula A having a carboxy group protected with an acid-decomposable group include the following structural units. R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 また、上記酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位としては、パターン形状の変形抑制の観点から、下記式A3で表される構成単位が好ましい。 The structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula A3 from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 式A3中、RB1及びRB2はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともRB1及びRB2のいずれか一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、RB3はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、RB1又はRB2と、RB3とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、RB4は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又は二価の連結基を表し、RB12は置換基を表し、nは0~4の整数を表す。 In Formula A3, R B1 and R B2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, at least one of R B1 and R B2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R B3 is an alkyl group or Represents an aryl group, R B1 or R B2 and R B3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X B represents a single bond or a divalent linking group; R B12 represents a substituent, and n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
 式A3中、RB1又はRB2がアルキル基の場合、炭素数は1~10のアルキル基が好ましい。RB1又はRB2がアリール基の場合、フェニル基が好ましい。RB1及びRB2はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基が好ましい。
 式A3中、RB3は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。
 また、RB1~RB3におけるアルキル基及びアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 式A3中、RB1又はRB2と、RB3とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、RB1又はRB2と、RB3とが連結して環状エーテルを形成することが好ましい。環状エーテルの環員数は特に制限はないが、5又は6であることが好ましく、5であることがより好ましい。
 式A3中、Xは単結合又は二価の連結基を表し、単結合又はアルキレン基、-C(=O)O-、-C(=O)NR-、-O-又はこれらの組み合わせが好ましく、単結合がより好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖状でも分岐を有していても環状構造を有していてもよく、置換基を有していてもよい。アルキレン基の炭素数は1~10が好ましく、1~4がより好ましい。Xが-C(=O)O-を含む場合、-C(=O)O-に含まれる炭素原子と、RB4が結合した炭素原子とが直接結合する態様が好ましい。Xが-C(=O)NR-を含む場合、-C(=O)NR-に含まれる炭素原子と、RB4が結合した炭素原子とが直接結合する態様が好ましい。Rはアルキル基又は水素原子を表し、炭素数1~4のアルキル基又は水素原子が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。
 式A3中、RB1~RB3を含む基と、Xとは、互いにパラ位で結合することが好ましい。
 式A3中、RB12は置換基を表し、アルキル基又はハロゲン原子が好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~4がより好ましい。
 式A3中、nは0~4の整数を表し、0又は1が好ましく、0がより好ましい。
In Formula A3, when R B1 or R B2 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R B1 or R B2 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferable. R B1 and R B2 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In Formula A3, R B3 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
In addition, the alkyl group and aryl group in R B1 to R B3 may have a substituent.
In Formula A3, R B1 or R B2 and R B3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and R B1 or R B2 and R B3 are preferably linked to form a cyclic ether. The number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
In Formula A3, X B represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and represents a single bond or an alkylene group, —C (═O) O—, —C (═O) NR N —, —O—, or a combination thereof. Are preferable, and a single bond is more preferable. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and may have a substituent. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms. When X B contains —C (═O) O—, an embodiment in which the carbon atom contained in —C (═O) O— and the carbon atom bonded to R B4 are directly bonded is preferable. When containing, -C (= O) NR N - - is X B -C (= O) NR N and carbon atoms contained in a mode in which the carbon atom to which R B4 is bonded is directly bonded is preferable. R N represents an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom, preferably an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
In Formula A3, the group containing R B1 to R B3 and X B are preferably bonded to each other at the para position.
In Formula A3, R B12 represents a substituent, and is preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In the formula A3, n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
 式A3中、RB4は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、重合体のTgをより低くし得るという観点から、水素原子であることが好ましい。
 より具体的には、重合体に含まれる上記酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位の全含有量に対し、式A3におけるRB4が水素原子である構成単位は20質量%以上であることが好ましい。
 なお、上記酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位中の、式A3におけるRB4が水素原子である構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-核磁気共鳴スペクトル(NMR)測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
In formula A3, R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint of lowering the Tg of the polymer.
More specifically, with respect to the total content of the structural unit having an acid group protected by the acid-decomposable group contained in the polymer, the structural unit in which R B4 in formula A3 is a hydrogen atom is 20% by mass or more. It is preferable that
In the structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group, the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit in which R B4 in formula A3 is a hydrogen atom is 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance. It can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated from the spectrum (NMR) measurement by a conventional method.
 式A3で表される構成単位の中でも、パターン形状の変形抑制の観点から、下記式A4で表される構成単位がより好ましい。 Among the structural units represented by the formula A3, the structural unit represented by the following formula A4 is more preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 式A4中、RB4は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、RB5~RB11はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、RB12は置換基を表し、nは0~4の整数を表す。
 式A4中、RB4は水素原子が好ましい。
 式A4中、RB5~RB11は、水素原子が好ましい。
 式A4中、RB12は置換基を表し、アルキル基又はハロゲン原子が好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~4がより好ましい。
 式A4中、nは0~4の整数を表し、0又は1が好ましく、0がより好ましい。
In Formula A4, R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R B5 to R B11 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, R B12 represents a substituent, and n is 0 Represents an integer of ~ 4.
In formula A4, R B4 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
In formula A4, R B5 to R B11 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
In Formula A4, R B12 represents a substituent, and is preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In the formula A4, n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
 式A4で表される構成単位A4の好ましい具体例としては、下記の構成単位が例示できる。なお、RB4は水素原子又はメチル基を表す。 Preferable specific examples of the structural unit A4 represented by the formula A4 include the following structural units. R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 重合体Aに含まれる上記酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位は、1種であっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 重合体Aにおける上記酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位の含有量は、重合体Aの全質量に対して、10質量%以上であることが好ましく、10質量%~90質量%であることがより好ましく、20質量%~70質量%であることが更に好ましい。
 重合体Aにおける上記酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
 また、全ての重合体成分を構成単位(モノマー単位)に分解したうえで、上記重合体成分における上記酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位の含有割合は、重合体成分の全質量に対して、5質量%~80質量%であることが好ましく、10質量%~80質量%であることがより好ましく、20質量%~70質量%であることが特に好ましい。
The structural unit having an acid group protected by the acid-decomposable group contained in the polymer A may be one type or two or more types.
The content of the structural unit having an acid group protected by the acid-decomposable group in the polymer A is preferably 10% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the polymer A, and is preferably 10% by mass to 90% by mass. %, More preferably 20% by mass to 70% by mass.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit having an acid group protected by the acid-decomposable group in the polymer A is confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method. can do.
Moreover, after decomposing all the polymer components into structural units (monomer units), the content ratio of the structural unit having an acid group protected by the acid-decomposable group in the polymer component is the total content of the polymer components. The mass is preferably 5% by mass to 80% by mass, more preferably 10% by mass to 80% by mass, and particularly preferably 20% by mass to 70% by mass.
 上記重合体Aは、現像性及び解像性の観点から、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位以外の構成単位(例えば、pKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位、酸基を有する構成単位、及び、その他の構成単位)を更に有することが好ましい。 From the viewpoints of developability and resolution, the polymer A is a structural unit other than a structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group (for example, a structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more, an acid group, And other structural units).
-酸基を有する構成単位-
 上記特定重合体は、酸価が10mgKOH/g以下の範囲で、酸基を有する構成単位を更に有していてもよい。
 酸基を有する構成単位は、保護基、例えば、酸分解性基で保護されていない酸基、すなわち、保護基を有さない酸基を有する構成単位である。重合体成分が酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体を含むことで、パターン形成時の感度が良好となり、パターン露光後の現像工程においてアルカリ性の現像液に溶けやすくなり、現像時間の短縮化を図ることができる。
 本明細書における酸基とは、pKaが12以下のプロトン解離性基を意味する。酸基は、通常、酸基を形成しうるモノマーを用いて、酸基を有する構成単位として、重合体に組み込まれる。感度向上の観点から、酸基のpKaは、10以下が好ましく、6以下がより好ましい。また、酸基のpKaは、-5以上であることが好ましい。
-Structural unit having an acid group-
The said specific polymer may further have the structural unit which has an acid group in the range whose acid value is 10 mgKOH / g or less.
The structural unit having an acid group is a structural unit having a protective group, for example, an acid group that is not protected by an acid-decomposable group, that is, an acid group that has no protective group. By including a polymer having a structural unit having an acid group in the polymer component, the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation becomes good, and it becomes easier to dissolve in an alkaline developer in the development process after pattern exposure, thereby shortening the development time. Can be planned.
The acid group in this specification means a proton dissociable group having a pKa of 12 or less. The acid group is usually incorporated into the polymer as a structural unit having an acid group using a monomer capable of forming an acid group. From the viewpoint of improving sensitivity, the pKa of the acid group is preferably 10 or less, and more preferably 6 or less. The pKa of the acid group is preferably −5 or more.
 酸分解性基で保護されていない酸基を有する構成単位を重合体成分中の重合体のいずれかに少なくとも有し、重合体成分のガラス転移温度を90℃以下とすることで、重合体を含有するポジ型感光性樹脂層は、転写性、仮支持体からの剥離性を良好なレベルに維持しつつ、パターン形成時の解像度及び感度がより良好となる。 Having at least a constituent unit having an acid group not protected by an acid-decomposable group in any of the polymers in the polymer component, and setting the glass transition temperature of the polymer component to 90 ° C. or less, The positive type photosensitive resin layer to be contained has better resolution and sensitivity at the time of pattern formation while maintaining transferability and peelability from the temporary support at good levels.
 上記酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホンアミド基、ホスホン酸基、スルホン酸基、フェノール性水酸基、及び、スルホニルイミド基等が例示される。中でも、カルボキシ基及びフェノール性水酸基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の酸基が好ましい。
 重合体への酸基を有する構成単位の導入は、酸基を有するモノマーを共重合させることで行うことができる。
 酸基を有する構成単位は、スチレンに由来する構成単位若しくはビニル化合物に由来する構成単位に対して酸基が置換した構成単位、又は、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位であることがより好ましい。
Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, and a sulfonylimide group. Among these, at least one acid group selected from the group consisting of a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable.
The introduction of the structural unit having an acid group into the polymer can be carried out by copolymerizing a monomer having an acid group.
The structural unit having an acid group is more preferably a structural unit derived from styrene or a structural unit obtained by substituting an acid group for a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, or a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid. preferable.
 酸基を有する構成単位としては、カルボキシ基を有する構成単位、又は、フェノール性水酸基を有する構成単位が、パターン形成時の感度がより良好となるという観点から好ましい。
 酸基を有する構成単位を形成しうる酸基を有するモノマーは既述の例に限定されない。
As the structural unit having an acid group, a structural unit having a carboxy group or a structural unit having a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable from the viewpoint that the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation becomes better.
The monomer having an acid group that can form a structural unit having an acid group is not limited to the examples described above.
 上記特定重合体に含まれる酸基を有する構成単位は、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 上記特定重合体が酸基を有する構成単位を有する場合、特定重合体の全質量に対し、酸基を有する構成単位を0.1質量%~20質量%含むことが好ましく、0.1質量%~10質量%含むことがより好ましく、0.1質量%~5質量%含むことが更に好ましい。上記範囲であると、パターン形成性がより良好となる。
 重合体における酸基を有する構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
The structural unit having an acid group contained in the specific polymer may be only one type or two or more types.
When the specific polymer has a structural unit having an acid group, the structural unit having an acid group is preferably contained in an amount of 0.1% by mass to 20% by mass with respect to the total mass of the specific polymer. More preferably, it is contained in an amount of ˜10% by mass, and more preferably 0.1% by mass to 5% by mass. When it is in the above range, the pattern formability becomes better.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit having an acid group in the polymer can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensity calculated by 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method.
-pKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位-
 上記特定重合体は、保存安定性の観点から、pKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位を更に有することが好ましい。
 本開示におけるpKaHは、共役酸のpKaであり、pKaHが3以上の基とは、その基の共役酸のpKaが3以上である基を表す。例えば、-NHのpKaHの値は、-NH のpKaの値である。
 また、本開示において、ACD/ChemSketch(ACD/Labs 8.00 Release Product Version:8.08)により求めた計算値である。
 具体的には、特定の官能基を有する構成単位の化学構造から、上記ACD/ChemSketchを用いて計算し、特定の官能基のpKaHの値を算出する。
-Structural unit in which pKaH has 3 or more groups-
The specific polymer preferably further includes a structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more from the viewpoint of storage stability.
PKaH in the present disclosure is a pKa of a conjugate acid, and a group having a pKaH of 3 or more represents a group having a pKa of a conjugate acid of the group of 3 or more. For example, the value of pKaH of —NH 2 is the value of pKa of —NH 3 + .
Further, in the present disclosure, it is a calculated value obtained by ACD / ChemSketch (ACD / Labs 8.00 Release Product Version: 8.08).
Specifically, from the chemical structure of the structural unit having a specific functional group, the above-mentioned ACD / ChemSketch is used to calculate the pKaH value of the specific functional group.
 上記pKaHが3以上の基は、解像性及び引き置き時間依存抑制性の観点から、pKaHが4以上の基であることが好ましく、pKaHが5以上の基であることがより好ましく、pKaHが5以上15以下の基であることが更に好ましく、pKaHが6以上10以下の基であることが特に好ましい。 The group having a pKaH of 3 or more is preferably a group having a pKaH of 4 or more, more preferably a group having a pKaH of 5 or more, from the viewpoints of resolution and retention time-dependent suppression. The group is more preferably 5 or more and 15 or less, and particularly preferably a group having a pKaH of 6 or more and 10 or less.
 上記pKaHが3以上の基としては、解像性及び引き置き時間依存抑制性の観点から、窒素原子を有する基であることが好ましく、脂肪族アミノ基、芳香族アミノ基、又は、含窒素複素芳香環基であることがより好ましく、脂肪族アミノ基、又は、含窒素複素芳香環基であることが更に好ましく、脂肪族アミノ基が特に好ましい。
 脂肪族アミノ基としては、第一級アミノ基、第二級アミノ基、又は、第三級アミノ基のいずれであってもよいが、解像性及び引き置き時間依存抑制性の観点から、第二級アミノ基、又は、第三級アミノ基であることが好ましい。
 芳香族アミノ基としては、アニリノ基、モノアルキルアニリノ基、又は、ジアルキルアニリノ基であることが好ましく、モノアルキルアニリノ基、又は、ジアルキルアニリノ基であることがより好ましい。
 含窒素複素芳香環基における含窒素複素芳香環としては、ピリジン環、イミダゾール環、又は、トリアゾール環であることが好ましく、ピリジン環、又は、イミダゾール環であることがより好ましく、ピリジン環であることが特に好ましい。
 また、上記含窒素複素芳香環基は、含窒素複素芳香環上に更に置換基を有していてもよい。上記置換基としては、特に制限はないが、アルキル基であることが好ましく、メチル基であることがより好ましい。
The group having a pKaH of 3 or more is preferably a group having a nitrogen atom from the viewpoint of resolution and retention time-dependent suppression, and is an aliphatic amino group, an aromatic amino group, or a nitrogen-containing complex. It is more preferably an aromatic ring group, further preferably an aliphatic amino group or a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring group, and particularly preferably an aliphatic amino group.
The aliphatic amino group may be any of a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, or a tertiary amino group, but from the viewpoints of resolution and retention time dependence suppression, It is preferably a secondary amino group or a tertiary amino group.
The aromatic amino group is preferably an anilino group, a monoalkylanilino group, or a dialkylanilino group, and more preferably a monoalkylanilino group or a dialkylanilino group.
The nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring in the nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic group is preferably a pyridine ring, an imidazole ring or a triazole ring, more preferably a pyridine ring or an imidazole ring, and a pyridine ring. Is particularly preferred.
The nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic group may further have a substituent on the nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring. The substituent is not particularly limited, but is preferably an alkyl group, and more preferably a methyl group.
 また、上記pKaHが3以上の基としては、解像性及び引き置き時間依存抑制性の観点から、アルキルアミン構造を有する基であることが特に好ましい。
 アルキルアミン構造としては、例えば、ジアルキルアミン、トリアルキルアミンが挙げられ、具体的には、ジメチルアミノ基、ジエチルアミノ基、ジプロピルアミノ基、ジイソプロピルアミノ基、1,2,2,6,6-ペンタアルキル-4-ピぺリジル基、2,2,6,6-テトラアルキル-4-ピぺリジル基等が挙げられる。
In addition, the group having a pKaH of 3 or more is particularly preferably a group having an alkylamine structure from the viewpoint of resolution and retention time-dependent suppression.
Examples of the alkylamine structure include dialkylamine and trialkylamine. Specifically, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, dipropylamino group, diisopropylamino group, 1,2,2,6,6-penta Examples include an alkyl-4-piperidyl group and a 2,2,6,6-tetraalkyl-4-piperidyl group.
 pKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位は、解像性及び引き置き時間依存抑制性の観点から、下記式I又は式IIで表される構成単位であることが好ましく、下記式Iで表される構成単位であることがより好ましい。 The structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula I or formula II from the viewpoint of resolution and retention time-dependent inhibition properties, and represented by the following formula I: More preferably, it is a structural unit.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 式I及び式II中、Rは水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Zは単結合、メチレン基、アリーレン基、-O-、-C(=O)-NH-又は-C(=O)-O-を表し、Rは単結合、又は、エーテル結合、ウレタン結合、ウレア結合、アミド結合、エステル結合及びカーボネート結合よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の基を有していてもよい炭素数1~10の直鎖状、分岐状若しくは環状のアルキレン基を表し、R及びRはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、又は、エーテル結合、チオエーテル結合、ヒドロキシ基、ホルミル基、アセトキシ基、シアノ基、ウレタン結合、ウレア結合、アミド結合、エステル結合、カーボネート結合、及び芳香族基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の直鎖状、分岐状若しくは環状のアルキル基を表し、RとR、RとR、又は、RとRはそれぞれ結合して環を形成していてもよく、Qは、窒素原子を有する芳香族基又は含窒素複素芳香族基を表す。 In Formulas I and II, R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and Z represents a single bond, a methylene group, an arylene group, —O—, —C (═O) —NH—, or —C (═O) —. Represents O—, and R 2 may have a single bond or at least one group selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a urethane bond, a urea bond, an amide bond, an ester bond and a carbonate bond. Represents a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group of 1 to 10, wherein R 3 and R 4 are each independently a hydrogen atom, or an ether bond, a thioether bond, a hydroxy group, a formyl group, an acetoxy group, a cyano group A linear group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have at least one group selected from the group consisting of a group, a urethane bond, a urea bond, an amide bond, an ester bond, a carbonate bond, and an aromatic group Represents a branched or cyclic alkyl group, R 2 and R 3 , R 2 and R 4 , or R 3 and R 4 may be bonded to each other to form a ring, and Q 1 is a nitrogen atom Represents an aromatic group having nitrogen or a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic group.
 式IにおけるZは、解像性、引き置き時間依存抑制性及び合成容易性の観点から、単結合、アリーレン基、-C(=O)-NH-又は-C(=O)-O-であることが好ましく、アリーレン基又は-C(=O)-O-であることがより好ましく、-C(=O)-NH-又は-C(=O)-O-であることが特に好ましい。
 式IIにおけるZは、解像性、引き置き時間依存抑制性及び合成容易性の観点から、単結合、アリーレン基又は-C(=O)-O-であることが好ましく、単結合であることがより好ましい。
 式IにおけるRは、解像性、引き置き時間依存抑制性及び合成容易性の観点から、エーテル結合、ウレタン結合及びウレア結合よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の基を有していてもよい炭素数1~10の直鎖状、分岐状若しくは環状のアルキレン基であることが好ましく、エーテル結合、ウレタン結合及びウレア結合よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の基を有していてもよい炭素数2~10の直鎖状、分岐状若しくは環状のアルキレン基であることがより好ましく、炭素数2~10の直鎖状、分岐状若しくは環状のアルキレン基であることが特に好ましい。
 式IIにおけるRは、解像性、引き置き時間依存抑制性及び合成容易性の観点から、単結合であることが好ましい。
Z in Formula I is a single bond, an arylene group, —C (═O) —NH— or —C (═O) —O— from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis. It is preferably an arylene group or —C (═O) —O—, more preferably —C (═O) —NH— or —C (═O) —O—.
Z in Formula II is preferably a single bond, an arylene group, or —C (═O) —O—, and is a single bond, from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis. Is more preferable.
R 2 in Formula I has at least one group selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a urethane bond, and a urea bond from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis. It is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and has at least one group selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a urethane bond and a urea bond. It is more preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
R 2 in Formula II is preferably a single bond from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis.
 式IにおけるR及びRは、解像性、引き置き時間依存抑制性及び合成容易性の観点から、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、又は、エーテル結合を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の直鎖状、分岐状若しくは環状のアルキル基であることが好ましく、水素原子、又は、炭素数1~20の直鎖状、分岐状若しくは環状のアルキル基であることがより好ましい。
 また、式Iにおいて、解像性及び引き置き時間依存抑制性の観点から、式IにおけるRとRとRとが結合し、含窒素脂肪族環を形成している態様が好ましく、ピペリジン環を形成している態様がより好ましい。
 式IIにおけるQは、解像性、引き置き時間依存抑制性及び合成容易性の観点から、含窒素複素芳香族基であることが好ましく、ピリジル基、メチルピリジル基、イミダゾイル基、メチルイミダゾイル基、又は、トリアゾリル基であることがより好ましく、ピリジル基であることが更に好ましく、4-ピリジル基であることが特に好ましい。
R 3 and R 4 in Formula I are each independently a hydrogen atom or a carbon number of 1 that may have an ether bond from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis. It is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group of ˜20, more preferably a hydrogen atom or a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group of 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
Further, in the formula I, from the viewpoints of resolution and retention time dependence suppression, an embodiment in which R 2 , R 3 and R 4 in the formula I are combined to form a nitrogen-containing aliphatic ring is preferable, An embodiment in which a piperidine ring is formed is more preferable.
Q 1 in Formula II is preferably a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic group from the viewpoints of resolution, retention time-dependent inhibition, and ease of synthesis, and is pyridyl, methylpyridyl, imidazolyl, methylimidazolyl Group or a triazolyl group is more preferable, a pyridyl group is more preferable, and a 4-pyridyl group is particularly preferable.
 pKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位を形成するモノマーとしては、具体的には、以下のモノマーが挙げられる。
 メタクリル酸1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチル-4-ピペリジル、メタクリル酸2-(ジメチルアミノ)エチル、アクリル酸2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル、メタクリル酸2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル、アクリル酸2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル、メタクリル酸2-(ジエチルアミノ)エチル、アクリル酸2-(ジメチルアミノ)エチル、アクリル酸2-(ジエチルアミノ)エチル、メタクリル酸N-(3-ジメチルアミノ)プロピル、アクリル酸N-(3-ジメチルアミノ)プロピル、メタクリル酸N-(3-ジエチルアミノ)プロピル、アクリル酸N-(3-ジエチルアミノ)プロピル、メタクリル酸2-モルホリノエチル、アクリル酸2-モルホリノエチル、アリルアミン、4-アミノスチレン、4-ビニルピリジン、2-ビニルピリジン、3-ビニルピリジン、1-ビニルイミダゾール、2-メチル-1-ビニルイミダゾール、1-アリルイミダゾール。
Specific examples of the monomer that forms a structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more include the following monomers.
1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate, 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl methacrylate, 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl acrylate, 2,2 methacrylate , 6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl, 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl acrylate, 2- (diethylamino) ethyl methacrylate, 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl acrylate, acrylic acid 2- (diethylamino) ethyl, N- (3-dimethylamino) propyl methacrylate, N- (3-dimethylamino) propyl acrylate, N- (3-diethylamino) propyl methacrylate, N- (3-diethylamino acrylate) ) Propyl, 2-morpholinoethyl methacrylate, 2-morpholinoethyl acrylate, allylamine, 4 Aminostyrene, 4-vinylpyridine, 2-vinylpyridine, 3-vinylpyridine, 1-vinylimidazole, 2-methyl-1-vinylimidazole, 1-allyl imidazole.
 pKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位としては、特開2015-187634号公報の段落0140、又は、特開2011-39266号公報の段落0068~段落0070に記載されたアミノ基又は含窒素複素環基を有するモノマーも挙げられる。 The structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more includes an amino group or a nitrogen-containing heterocycle described in paragraph 0140 of JP-A-2015-187634 or paragraphs 0068 to 0070 of JP-A-2011-39266. Also included are monomers having groups.
 上記特定重合体に含まれる上記pKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位は、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 上記特定重合体における上記pKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位の含有量は、解像性及び保存安定性の観点から、上記重合体の全質量に対し、0.01質量%以上30質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.05質量%以上20質量%以下であることがより好ましく、0.1質量%以上10質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、0.4質量%以上4質量%以下であることが特に好ましく、0.6質量%以上2質量%以下であることが最も好ましい。
 上記重合体AにおけるpKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
The pKaH contained in the specific polymer may have only one type of structural unit having 3 or more groups, or two or more types of structural units.
The content of the structural unit having the pKaH group of 3 or more in the specific polymer is 0.01% by mass or more and 30% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer from the viewpoint of resolution and storage stability. Is preferably 0.05% by mass or more and 20% by mass or less, more preferably 0.1% by mass or more and 10% by mass or less, and further preferably 0.4% by mass or more and 4% by mass or less. It is particularly preferable that the ratio be 0.6 mass% or more and 2 mass% or less.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit having a pKaH group of 3 or more in the polymer A can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method. .
-その他の構成単位-
 上記特定重合体は、既述の、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位、酸基を有する構成単位、及び、pKaHが3以上の基を有する構成単位以外の、その他の構成単位を、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の効果を損なわない範囲で含んでいてもよい。
 その他の構成単位を形成するモノマーとしては、特に制限はなく、例えば、スチレン類、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸環状アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸アリールエステル、不飽和ジカルボン酸ジエステル、ビシクロ不飽和化合物、マレイミド化合物、不飽和芳香族化合物、共役ジエン系化合物、不飽和モノカルボン酸、不飽和ジカルボン酸、不飽和ジカルボン酸無水物、脂肪族環式骨格を有する基、その他の不飽和化合物を挙げることができる。
 その他の構成単位を用いて、種類及び含有量の少なくともいずれかを調整することで、重合体の諸特性を調整することができる。特に、その他の構成単位を適切に使用することで、重合体成分のTgを90℃以下に容易に調整することができる。
 重合体は、その他の構成単位を1種のみ含んでもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。
-Other structural units-
The specific polymer has other constituents other than the constituent unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group, a constituent unit having an acid group, and a constituent unit having a pKaH of 3 or more. The unit may be included in a range not impairing the effect of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a monomer which forms other structural units, For example, styrenes, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid aryl ester, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid Diester, bicyclounsaturated compound, maleimide compound, unsaturated aromatic compound, conjugated diene compound, unsaturated monocarboxylic acid, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid anhydride, group having aliphatic cyclic skeleton, other Mention may be made of unsaturated compounds.
Various characteristics of the polymer can be adjusted by adjusting at least one of the type and content using other structural units. In particular, the Tg of the polymer component can be easily adjusted to 90 ° C. or lower by appropriately using other structural units.
The polymer may contain only 1 type of other structural units, and may contain 2 or more types.
 その他の構成単位は、具体的には、スチレン、tert-ブトキシスチレン、メチルスチレン、α-メチルスチレン、アセトキシスチレン、メトキシスチレン、エトキシスチレン、クロロスチレン、ビニル安息香酸メチル、ビニル安息香酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸ベンジル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソボルニル、アクリロニトリル、又は、エチレングリコールモノアセトアセテートモノ(メタ)アクリレートなどを重合して形成される構成単位を挙げることができる。その他、特開2004-264623号公報の段落0021~段落0024に記載の化合物を挙げることができる。 Other structural units are specifically styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, α-methylstyrene, acetoxystyrene, methoxystyrene, ethoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinylbenzoate, ethyl vinylbenzoate, (meta ) Methyl acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, (meth And a structural unit formed by polymerizing benzyl acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, acrylonitrile, ethylene glycol monoacetoacetate mono (meth) acrylate, or the like. In addition, the compounds described in paragraphs 0021 to 0024 of JP-A No. 2004-264623 can be given.
 また、その他の構成単位としては、芳香環を有する構成単位、又は、脂肪族環式骨格を有する構成単位が、得られる転写材料の電気特性を向上させる観点で好ましい。これら構成単位を形成するモノマーとして、具体的には、スチレン、tert-ブトキシスチレン、メチルスチレン、α-メチルスチレン、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート、及び、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。中でも、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位が好ましく挙げられる。 As other structural units, structural units having an aromatic ring or structural units having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton are preferable from the viewpoint of improving the electrical properties of the obtained transfer material. Specific examples of monomers that form these structural units include styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, α-methylstyrene, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, And benzyl (meth) acrylate etc. are mentioned. Especially, the structural unit derived from a cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate is mentioned preferably.
 また、その他の構成単位を形成するモノマーとしては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが、密着性の観点で好ましい。中でも、炭素数4~12のアルキル基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが密着性の観点でより好ましい。具体的には、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-ブチル、及び、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシルが挙げられる。中でも、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、及び、(メタ)アクリル酸エチルよりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種のモノマーが特に好ましい。 In addition, as a monomer that forms other structural unit, for example, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion. Among them, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion. Specific examples include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate. Among these, at least one monomer selected from the group consisting of methyl (meth) acrylate and ethyl (meth) acrylate is particularly preferable.
 その他の構成単位の含有量は、重合体の全質量に対し、70質量%以下が好ましく、60質量%以下がより好ましく、50質量%以下が更に好ましい。下限値としては、0質量%でもよいが、1質量%以上であることが好ましく、5質量%以上であることがより好ましい。上記範囲であると、解像度及び密着性がより向上する。 The content of other structural units is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and still more preferably 50% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the polymer. The lower limit may be 0% by mass, but is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more. Within the above range, the resolution and adhesion are further improved.
-特定重合体のガラス転移温度:Tg-
 本開示における特定重合体のガラス転移温度(Tg)は、90℃以下であることが好ましい。Tgが90℃以下であることで、上記感光性樹脂層は高い密着性を有し、転写性により優れる。
 上記Tgは、60℃以下であることがより好ましく、40℃以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、上記Tgの下限値には特に制限はないが、-20℃以上が好ましく、-10℃以上がより好ましい。特定重合体のTgが-20℃以上であることで、良好なパターン形成性が維持され、また、例えば、カバーフィルムを用いる場合、カバーフィルムを剥離する際の剥離性低下が抑制される。
 更に、本開示における上記重合体成分全体のガラス転移温度(Tg)は、転写性の観点から、90℃以下であることが好ましく、60℃以下であることがより好ましく、40℃以下であることが更に好ましい。
-Glass transition temperature of specific polymer: Tg-
The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the specific polymer in the present disclosure is preferably 90 ° C. or lower. When the Tg is 90 ° C. or lower, the photosensitive resin layer has high adhesion and is excellent in transferability.
The Tg is more preferably 60 ° C. or less, and further preferably 40 ° C. or less.
The lower limit of Tg is not particularly limited, but is preferably −20 ° C. or higher, and more preferably −10 ° C. or higher. When the Tg of the specific polymer is −20 ° C. or higher, good pattern formability is maintained, and, for example, when a cover film is used, a decrease in peelability when the cover film is peeled is suppressed.
Furthermore, the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the entire polymer component in the present disclosure is preferably 90 ° C. or lower, more preferably 60 ° C. or lower, and 40 ° C. or lower from the viewpoint of transferability. Is more preferable.
 本開示における重合体のガラス転移温度は、示差走査熱量測定(DSC)を用いて測定することができる。
 具体的な測定方法は、JIS K 7121(1987年)又はJIS K 6240(2011年)に記載の方法に順じて行った。本明細書におけるガラス転移温度は、補外ガラス転移開始温度(以下、Tigと称することがある)を用いている。
 ガラス転移温度の測定方法をより具体的に説明する。
 ガラス転移温度を求める場合、予想される重合体のTgより約 50℃低い温度にて装置が安定するまで保持した後、加熱速度:20℃/分で、ガラス転移が終了した温度よりも約30℃高い温度まで加熱し,DTA曲線又はDSC曲線を描かせる。
 補外ガラス転移開始温度(Tig)、すなわち、本明細書におけるガラス転移温度Tgは、DTA曲線又はDSC曲線における低温側のベースラインを高温側に延長した直線と、ガラス転移の階段状変化部分の曲線の勾配が最大になる点で引いた接線との交点の温度として求める。
The glass transition temperature of the polymer in the present disclosure can be measured using differential scanning calorimetry (DSC).
The specific measuring method was performed in accordance with the method described in JIS K 7121 (1987) or JIS K 6240 (2011). As the glass transition temperature in the present specification, an extrapolated glass transition start temperature (hereinafter sometimes referred to as Tig) is used.
The method for measuring the glass transition temperature will be described more specifically.
When determining the glass transition temperature, the apparatus is kept at a temperature about 50 ° C. lower than the expected Tg of the polymer until the apparatus is stabilized, and then heated at a rate of 20 ° C./min, about 30 times higher than the temperature at which the glass transition is completed. Heat to a higher temperature and draw a DTA or DSC curve.
The extrapolated glass transition start temperature (Tig), that is, the glass transition temperature Tg in the present specification, is a straight line obtained by extending the low-temperature base line in the DTA curve or DSC curve to the high-temperature side, and the stepwise change portion of the glass transition. Calculated as the temperature of the intersection with the tangent drawn at the point where the slope of the curve is maximum.
 重合体のTgを、既述の好ましい範囲に調整する方法としては、例えば、目的とする重合体の各構成単位の単独重合体のTgと各構成単位の質量比より、FOX式を指針にして、目的とする特定重合体のTgを制御することが可能である。
 FOX式について
 重合体に含まれる第1の構成単位の単独重合体のTgをTg1、第1の構成単位の共重合体における質量分率をW1とし、第2の構成単位の単独重合体のTgをTg2とし、第2の構成単位の共重合体における質量分率をW2としたときに、第1の構成単位と第2の構成単位とを含む共重合体のTg0(K)は、以下の式にしたがって推定することが可能である。
 FOX式:1/Tg0=(W1/Tg1)+(W2/Tg2)
 既述のFOX式を用いて、共重合体に含まれる各構成単位の種類と質量分率を調整して、所望のTgを有する共重合体を得ることができる。
 また、重合体の重量平均分子量を調整することにより、重合体のTgを調整することも可能である。
As a method for adjusting the Tg of the polymer to the above-described preferable range, for example, from the Tg of the homopolymer of each constituent unit of the target polymer and the mass ratio of each constituent unit, the FOX formula is used as a guideline. It is possible to control the Tg of the target specific polymer.
Regarding the FOX formula: Tg of the homopolymer of the first structural unit contained in the polymer is Tg1, the mass fraction in the copolymer of the first structural unit is W1, and the Tg of the homopolymer of the second structural unit Is Tg2 and the mass fraction in the copolymer of the second structural unit is W2, the Tg0 (K) of the copolymer containing the first structural unit and the second structural unit is It is possible to estimate according to the equation.
FOX formula: 1 / Tg0 = (W1 / Tg1) + (W2 / Tg2)
A copolymer having a desired Tg can be obtained by adjusting the type and mass fraction of each structural unit contained in the copolymer using the FOX formula described above.
It is also possible to adjust the Tg of the polymer by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of the polymer.
-重合体の分子量:Mw-
 特定重合体の分子量は、ポリスチレン換算重量平均分子量で、60,000以下であることが好ましい。特定重合体の重量平均分子量が60,000以下であることで、感光性樹脂層の溶融粘度を低く抑え、上記基板と貼り合わせる際において低温(例えば130℃以下)での貼り合わせを実現することができる。
 また、特定重合体の重量平均分子量は、2,000~60,000であることが好ましく、3,000~50,000であることがより好ましい。
 なお、重合体の重量平均分子量及び数平均分子量は、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー)によって測定することができ、測定装置としては、様々な市販の装置を用いることができ、装置の内容、及び、測定技術は当業者に公知である。
 ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)による重量平均分子量の測定は、測定装置として、HLC(登録商標)-8220GPC(東ソー(株)製)を用い、カラムとして、TSKgel(登録商標)Super HZM-M(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ4000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ3000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ2000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)をそれぞれ1本、直列に連結したものを用い、溶離液として、THF(テトラヒドロフラン)を用いることができる。
 また、測定条件としては、試料濃度を0.2質量%、流速を0.35ml/min、サンプル注入量を10μl、及び測定温度を40℃とし、示差屈折率(RI)検出器を用いて行うことができる。
 検量線は、東ソー(株)製の「標準試料TSK standard,polystyrene」:「F-40」、「F-20」、「F-4」、「F-1」、「A-5000」、「A-2500」及び「A-1000」の7サンプルのいずれかのサンプルを2つ以上用いて作製できる。
-Molecular weight of polymer: Mw-
The molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 60,000 or less in terms of polystyrene-equivalent weight average molecular weight. When the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is 60,000 or less, the melt viscosity of the photosensitive resin layer is suppressed to be low, and the bonding at a low temperature (for example, 130 ° C. or less) is realized when bonding to the substrate. Can do.
Further, the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 2,000 to 60,000, and more preferably 3,000 to 50,000.
In addition, the weight average molecular weight and number average molecular weight of the polymer can be measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography), and various commercially available apparatuses can be used as the measuring apparatus, and the contents of the apparatus, and Measurement techniques are known to those skilled in the art.
For the measurement of the weight average molecular weight by gel permeation chromatography (GPC), HLC (registered trademark) -8220GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) was used as a measuring device, and TSKgel (registered trademark) Super HZM-M (4 .6 mm ID × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), Super HZ4000 (4.6 mm ID × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), Super HZ3000 (4.6 mm ID × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), Super HZ2000 (4.6 mm ID) × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corp.), each connected in series, and THF (tetrahydrofuran) can be used as an eluent.
Measurement conditions are 0.2% by mass, flow rate is 0.35 ml / min, sample injection amount is 10 μl, measurement temperature is 40 ° C., and a differential refractive index (RI) detector is used. be able to.
The calibration curve is “Standard sample TSK standard, polystyrene” manufactured by Tosoh Corporation: “F-40”, “F-20”, “F-4”, “F-1”, “A-5000”, “ It can be produced by using two or more of any of the seven samples of “A-2500” and “A-1000”.
 特定重合体の数平均分子量と重量平均分子量との比(分散度)は、1.0~5.0が好ましく、1.05~3.5がより好ましい。 The ratio (dispersion degree) between the number average molecular weight and the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, more preferably 1.05 to 3.5.
-特定重合体の製造方法-
 特定重合体の製造方法(合成法)は特に限定されないが、一例を挙げると、式Aで表される構成単位A1を形成するための重合性単量体、酸基を有する構成単位Bを形成するための重合性単量体、更に必要に応じて、その他の構成単位Cを形成するための重合性単量体を含む有機溶剤中、重合開始剤を用いて重合することにより合成することができる。また、いわゆる高分子反応で合成することもできる。
-Manufacturing method of specific polymer-
The production method (synthesis method) of the specific polymer is not particularly limited. For example, a polymerizable monomer for forming the structural unit A1 represented by the formula A and a structural unit B having an acid group are formed. It is possible to synthesize by polymerizing using a polymerization initiator in an organic solvent containing a polymerizable monomer for the purpose, and further, if necessary, a polymerizable monomer for forming other structural unit C. it can. It can also be synthesized by so-called polymer reaction.
 本開示における上記感光性樹脂層は、上記基板に対して良好な密着性を発現させる観点から、感光性樹脂層の全固形分に対し、上記重合体成分を50質量%~99.9質量%の割合で含むことが好ましく、70質量%~98質量%の割合で含むことがより好ましい。
 また、上記感光性樹脂層は、上記基板に対して良好な密着性を発現させる観点から、感光性樹脂層の全固形分に対し、上記特定重合体を50質量%~99.9質量%の割合で含むことが好ましく、70質量%~98質量%の割合で含むことがより好ましい。
In the present disclosure, the photosensitive resin layer is 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass of the polymer component with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin layer, from the viewpoint of developing good adhesion to the substrate. Preferably, it is contained in a proportion of 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
In addition, the photosensitive resin layer has a specific polymer content of 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin layer, from the viewpoint of developing good adhesion to the substrate. It is preferably contained in a proportion, more preferably in a proportion of 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
<<他の重合体>>
 上記感光性樹脂層は、上記特定重合体に加え、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の効果を損なわない範囲において、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有しない重合体(「他の重合体」と称する場合がある。)を更に含んでいてもよい。上記感光性樹脂層が他の重合体を含む場合、他の重合体の配合量は、全重合体成分中、50質量%以下であることが好ましく、30質量%以下であることがより好ましく、20質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
<< other polymers >>
In addition to the specific polymer, the photosensitive resin layer is a polymer having no structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group within a range not impairing the effect of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure ( It may be referred to as “other polymer”). When the photosensitive resin layer contains another polymer, the blending amount of the other polymer is preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less in the total polymer component, More preferably, it is 20 mass% or less.
 上記感光性樹脂層は、上記特定重合体に加え、他の重合体を1種類のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。
 他の重合体として、例えばポリヒドロキシスチレンを用いることができ、市販されている、SMA 1000P、SMA 2000P、SMA 3000P、SMA 1440F、SMA 17352P、SMA 2625P、及び、SMA 3840F(以上、サートマー社製)、ARUFON UC-3000、ARUFON UC-3510、ARUFON UC-3900、ARUFON UC-3910、ARUFON UC-3920、及び、ARUFON UC-3080(以上、東亞合成(株)製)、並びに、Joncryl 690、Joncryl 678、Joncryl 67、及び、Joncryl 586(以上、BASF社製)等を用いることもできる。
In addition to the specific polymer, the photosensitive resin layer may contain only one type of other polymer, or may contain two or more types.
As other polymers, for example, polyhydroxystyrene can be used and are commercially available, such as SMA 1000P, SMA 2000P, SMA 3000P, SMA 1440F, SMA 17352P, SMA 2625P, and SMA 3840F (above, manufactured by Sartomer). , ARUFON UC-3000, ARUFON UC-3510, ARUFON UC-3900, ARUFON UC-3910, ARUFON UC-3920, and ARUFON UC-3080 (above, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and Joncryl 690, Joncryl 6 Joncryl 67, Joncryl 586 (manufactured by BASF) or the like can also be used.
<<光酸発生剤>>
 上記感光性樹脂層は、光酸発生剤を含有する。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤としては、紫外線、遠紫外線、X線、及び、荷電粒子線等の放射線を照射することにより酸を発生することができる化合物である。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤としては、波長300nm以上、好ましくは波長300nm~450nmの活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物が好ましいが、その化学構造は制限されない。また、波長300nm以上の活性光線に直接感応しない光酸発生剤についても、増感剤と併用することによって波長300nm以上の活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物であれば、増感剤と組み合わせて好ましく用いることができる。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤としては、pKaが4以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤が好ましく、pKaが3以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤がより好ましく、pKaが2以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤が特に好ましい。pKaの下限値は特に定めないが、例えば、-10.0以上であることが好ましい。
<< Photoacid generator >>
The photosensitive resin layer contains a photoacid generator.
The photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is a compound capable of generating an acid by irradiation with radiation such as ultraviolet rays, far ultraviolet rays, X-rays, and charged particle beams.
The photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a compound that generates an acid in response to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably 300 nm to 450 nm, but its chemical structure is not limited. Further, a photoacid generator that is not directly sensitive to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more can be used as a sensitizer as long as it is a compound that reacts with an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid when used in combination with a sensitizer. It can be preferably used in combination.
The photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less, more preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 3 or less, and a pKa of 2 or less. A photoacid generator that generates an acid is particularly preferable. The lower limit of pKa is not particularly defined, but is preferably −10.0 or more, for example.
 光酸発生剤としては、イオン性光酸発生剤と、非イオン性光酸発生剤とを挙げることができる。
 また、光酸発生剤としては、感度及び解像度の観点から、後述するオニウム塩化合物、及び、後述するオキシムスルホネート化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含むことが好ましく、オキシムスルホネート化合物を含むことがより好ましい。
Examples of the photoacid generator include an ionic photoacid generator and a nonionic photoacid generator.
The photoacid generator preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an onium salt compound described later and an oxime sulfonate compound described later from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, and an oxime sulfonate compound. It is more preferable to contain.
 非イオン性光酸発生剤の例として、トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、ジアゾメタン化合物、イミドスルホネート化合物、及び、オキシムスルホネート化合物などを挙げることができる。これらの中でも、感度、解像度、及び、密着性の観点から、光酸発生剤がオキシムスルホネート化合物であることが好ましい。これら光酸発生剤は、1種単独又は2種類以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、及び、ジアゾメタン誘導体の具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0083~段落0088に記載の化合物が例示できる。 Examples of nonionic photoacid generators include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds. Among these, the photoacid generator is preferably an oxime sulfonate compound from the viewpoints of sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion. These photoacid generators can be used singly or in combination of two or more. Specific examples of trichloromethyl-s-triazines and diazomethane derivatives include the compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP 2011-212494A.
 オキシムスルホネート化合物、すなわち、オキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物としては、下記式(B1)で表されるオキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物が好ましい。 As the oxime sulfonate compound, that is, a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure, a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the following formula (B1) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 式(B1)中、R21は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、*は他の原子又は他の基との結合部位を表す。 In formula (B1), R 21 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and * represents a bonding site with another atom or another group.
 式(B1)で表されるオキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物は、いずれの基も置換されてもよく、R21におけるアルキル基は、直鎖状であっても、分岐構造を有していても、環構造を有していてもよい。許容される置換基は以下に説明する。
 R21のアルキル基としては、炭素数1~10の、直鎖状又は分岐状アルキル基が好ましい。R21のアルキル基は、炭素数6~11のアリール基、炭素数1~10のアルコキシ基、シクロアルキル基(7,7-ジメチル-2-オキソノルボルニル基などの有橋式脂環基を含む、好ましくはビシクロアルキル基等)、又は、ハロゲン原子で置換されてもよい。
 R21のアリール基としては、炭素数6~18のアリール基が好ましく、フェニル基又はナフチル基がより好ましい。R21のアリール基は、炭素数1~4のアルキル基、アルコキシ基及びハロゲン原子よりなる群から選ばれた1つ以上の基で置換されてもよい。
In the compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the formula (B1), any group may be substituted, and the alkyl group in R 21 may be linear or branched. It may have a ring structure. Acceptable substituents are described below.
The alkyl group for R 21 is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group of R 21 is an aryl group having 6 to 11 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group (7,7-dimethyl-2-oxonorbornyl group or other bridged alicyclic group) , Preferably a bicycloalkyl group or the like), or a halogen atom.
The aryl group for R 21 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group. The aryl group of R 21 may be substituted with one or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group, and a halogen atom.
 式(B1)で表されるオキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物は、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0078~0111に記載のオキシムスルホネート化合物であることも好ましい。 The compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the formula (B1) is preferably an oxime sulfonate compound described in paragraphs 0078 to 0111 of JP-A-2014-85643.
 イオン性光酸発生剤の例として、ジアリールヨードニウム塩類及びトリアリールスルホニウム塩類等のオニウム塩化合物、第四級アンモニウム塩類等を挙げることができる。これらのうち、オニウム塩化合物が好ましく、トリアリールスルホニウム塩類及びジアリールヨードニウム塩類が特に好ましい。 Examples of the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, quaternary ammonium salts, and the like. Of these, onium salt compounds are preferable, and triarylsulfonium salts and diaryliodonium salts are particularly preferable.
 イオン性光酸発生剤としては特開2014-85643号公報の段落0114~0133に記載のイオン性光酸発生剤も好ましく用いることができる。 As the ionic photoacid generator, ionic photoacid generators described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-85643 can also be preferably used.
 光酸発生剤は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 上記感光性樹脂層における光酸発生剤の含有量は、感度、解像度の観点から、上記感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.1質量%~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.5質量%~5質量%であることがより好ましい。
A photo-acid generator may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
The content of the photoacid generator in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. More preferably, the content is 5% by mass to 5% by mass.
<<ベンゾトリアゾール化合物>>
 上記感光性樹脂層は、パターン形状、及び、エッチングにより形成される回路配線の直線性の観点から、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 ベンゾトリアゾール化合物としては、ベンゾトリアゾール骨格を有する化合物であれば制限されず、公知のベンゾトリアゾール化合物を用いることができる。
 ベンゾトリアゾール化合物としては、例えば、1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、1-[N,N-ビス(2-エチルヘキシル)アミノメチル]ベンゾトリアゾール、5-カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール、1-(ヒドロキシメチル)-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、1-アセチル-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、1-アミノベンゾトリアゾール、9-(1H-ベンゾトリアゾール-1-イルメチル)-9H-カルバゾール、1-クロロ-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、1-(2-ピリジニル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-ヒドロキシベンゾトリアゾール、1-メチルベンゾトリアゾール、1-エチルベンゾトリアゾール、1-(1’-ヒドロキシエチル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-(2’-ヒドロキシエチル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-プロピルベンゾトリアゾール、1-(1’-ヒドロキシプロピル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-(2’-ヒドロキシプロピル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-(3’-ヒドロキシプロピル)ベンゾトリアゾール、4-ヒドロキシ-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、5-メチル-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、メチルベンゾトリアゾール-5-カルボキシレート、エチルベンゾトリアゾール-5-カルボキシレート、t-ブチル-ベンゾトリアゾール-5-カルボキシレート、シクロペンチルエチル-ベンゾトリアゾール-5-カルボキシレート、1H-ベンゾトリアゾール-4-スルホン酸、1H-ベンゾトリアゾール-1-アセトニトリル、1H-ベンゾトリアゾール-1-カルボキシアルデヒド、2-メチル-2H-ベンゾトリアゾール、2-エチル-2H-ベンゾトリアゾールなどが挙げられる。
<< benzotriazole compound >>
The photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a benzotriazole compound from the viewpoint of pattern shape and linearity of circuit wiring formed by etching.
The benzotriazole compound is not limited as long as it is a compound having a benzotriazole skeleton, and a known benzotriazole compound can be used.
Examples of the benzotriazole compound include 1,2,3-benzotriazole, 1- [N, N-bis (2-ethylhexyl) aminomethyl] benzotriazole, 5-carboxybenzotriazole, 1- (hydroxymethyl) -1H. -Benzotriazole, 1-acetyl-1H-benzotriazole, 1-aminobenzotriazole, 9- (1H-benzotriazol-1-ylmethyl) -9H-carbazole, 1-chloro-1H-benzotriazole, 1- (2- Pyridinyl) benzotriazole, 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, 1-methylbenzotriazole, 1-ethylbenzotriazole, 1- (1′-hydroxyethyl) benzotriazole, 1- (2′-hydroxyethyl) benzotriazole, 1-propyl Benzoto Azole, 1- (1′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 1- (2′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 1- (3′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 4-hydroxy-1H-benzotriazole, 5-methyl -1H-benzotriazole, methylbenzotriazole-5-carboxylate, ethylbenzotriazole-5-carboxylate, t-butyl-benzotriazole-5-carboxylate, cyclopentylethyl-benzotriazole-5-carboxylate, 1H-benzo Triazole-4-sulfonic acid, 1H-benzotriazole-1-acetonitrile, 1H-benzotriazole-1-carboxaldehyde, 2-methyl-2H-benzotriazole, 2-ethyl-2H-benzotriazo And the like.
 また、上記ベンゾトリアゾール化合物としては、パターン形状、及び、エッチングにより形成される回路配線の直線性の観点から、下記式(1)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。 Also, the benzotriazole compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (1) from the viewpoint of pattern shape and linearity of circuit wiring formed by etching.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 式(1)中、Pは、水素原子、又は置換基を表し、Qは、置換基を表し、nは、0~4の整数を表し、nが2以上の場合、複数のQは、同一でも異なっていてもよい。ただし、スルホン酸基、チオール基、及びチオエーテル基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の官能基を有するベンゾトリアゾール化合物を除く。 In formula (1), P represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, Q represents a substituent, n represents an integer of 0 to 4, and when n is 2 or more, a plurality of Q are the same But it can be different. However, a benzotriazole compound having at least one functional group selected from the group consisting of a sulfonic acid group, a thiol group, and a thioether group is excluded.
 式(1)において、Pで表される置換基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アシル基、アミノ基、カルボキシ基、アルキルアミノ基、ジアルキルアミノ基、-Z-Y基などが挙げられる。 In the formula (1), examples of the substituent represented by P include a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, and a dialkylamino group. , -ZY group and the like.
 式(1)中、Pで表されるハロゲン原子としては、例えば、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子などが挙げられる。 In the formula (1), examples of the halogen atom represented by P include a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
 式(1)中、Pで表されるアルキル基は、直鎖状のアルキル基でもよく、分岐状のアルキル基でもよく、環状アルキル基でもよい。アルキル基は、好ましくは炭素数が1~12のアルキル基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が1~6のアルキル基であり、特に好ましくは炭素数が1~3のアルキル基である。炭素数が1~12のアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、ブチル基、tert-ブチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、オクチル基、デシル基、ドデシル基などが挙げられる。 In formula (1), the alkyl group represented by P may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group. The alkyl group is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an iso-propyl group, a butyl group, a tert-butyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, and a dodecyl group. Etc.
 式(1)中、Pで表されるアリール基は、単環のアリール基でもよく、縮合環のアリール基でもよい。アリール基は、好ましくは炭素数が6~18のアリール基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が6~12のアリール基である。炭素数が6~18のアリール基としては、例えば、フェニル基、ビフェニル基、ナフチル基、フェナントリル基、ターフェニル基、フルオレニル基などが挙げられる。 In formula (1), the aryl group represented by P may be a monocyclic aryl group or a condensed ring aryl group. The aryl group is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms. Examples of the aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms include a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a naphthyl group, a phenanthryl group, a terphenyl group, and a fluorenyl group.
 式(1)中、Pで表される複素環基は、脂肪族の複素環基でもよく、芳香族の複素環基でもよい。また、Pで表される複素環基は、単環の複素環基でもよく、縮合環の複素環基でもよい。複素環基は、好ましくは炭素数が1~18の複素環基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が3~12の複素環基である。炭素数が1~18の複素環基としては、例えば、フリル基、ピロリル基、イミダゾリル基、ピラゾリル基、ピリジニル基、ピラジニル基、ピリミジニル基、インドリル基、イソキノリル基、カルバゾリル基、フェナントリジニル基、フェナントロリニル基などが挙げられる。 In the formula (1), the heterocyclic group represented by P may be an aliphatic heterocyclic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group. The heterocyclic group represented by P may be a monocyclic heterocyclic group or a condensed heterocyclic group. The heterocyclic group is preferably a heterocyclic group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably a heterocyclic group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms. Examples of the heterocyclic group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms include a furyl group, pyrrolyl group, imidazolyl group, pyrazolyl group, pyridinyl group, pyrazinyl group, pyrimidinyl group, indolyl group, isoquinolyl group, carbazolyl group, phenanthridinyl group And phenanthrolinyl group.
 式(1)中、Pで表されるアシル基は、好ましくは炭素数が1~12のアシル基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が2~8のアシル基であり、特に好ましくは炭素数が2~4のアシル基である。炭素数が1~12のアシル基としては、例えば、アセチル基、プロピオニル基、ブタノイル基、ベンゾイル基などが挙げられる。 In the formula (1), the acyl group represented by P is preferably an acyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably an acyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a carbon number. 2 to 4 acyl groups. Examples of the acyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms include acetyl group, propionyl group, butanoyl group, benzoyl group and the like.
 式(1)中、Pで表されるアルキルアミノ基におけるアルキル基は、直鎖状のアルキル基でもよく、分岐状のアルキル基でもよく、環状のアルキル基でもよい。アルキルアミノ基は、好ましくは、炭素数が1~10のアルキルアミノ基であり、より好ましくは、炭素数が3~10のアルキルアミノ基であり、特に好ましくは、炭素数が6~10のアルキルアミノ基である。炭素数が1~10のアルキルアミノ基におけるアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、ブチル基、tert-ブチル基、ヘキシル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、オクチル基、デシル基などが挙げられる。 In formula (1), the alkyl group in the alkylamino group represented by P may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group. The alkylamino group is preferably an alkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylamino group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an alkylamino group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. It is an amino group. Examples of the alkyl group in the alkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an iso-propyl group, a butyl group, a tert-butyl group, a hexyl group, a 2-ethylhexyl group, and a cyclohexyl group. Octyl group, decyl group and the like.
 式(1)中、Pで表されるジアルキルアミノ基における各アルキル基は、直鎖状のアルキル基でもよく、分岐状のアルキル基でもよく、環状のアルキル基でもよい。また、ジアルキルアミノ基における各アルキル基は、同一でも異なっていてもよい。ジアルキルアミノ基は、好ましくは、各アルキル基の炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基であり、より好ましくは、各アルキル基の炭素数が3~10のジアルキルアミノ基であり、特に好ましくは、各アルキル基の炭素数が6~10のジアルキルアミノ基である。各アルキル基の炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基におけるアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、ブチル基、tert-ブチル基、ヘキシル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、オクチル基、デシル基などが挙げられる。 In formula (1), each alkyl group in the dialkylamino group represented by P may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group. In addition, each alkyl group in the dialkylamino group may be the same or different. The dialkylamino group is preferably a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, more preferably a dialkylamino group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, particularly preferably Each alkyl group is a dialkylamino group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkyl group in the dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms of each alkyl group include, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, iso-propyl group, butyl group, tert-butyl group, hexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl Group, cyclohexyl group, octyl group, decyl group and the like.
 式(1)中、Pで表される-Z-Y基において、Zは、アルキレン基を表し、Yは、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、アルキルアミノ基、又はジアルキルアミノ基を表す。
 Zで表されるアルキレン基は、好ましくは炭素数が1~6のアルキレン基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が1又は2のアルキレン基であり、更に好ましくは、カルボキシ基で置換されていてもよい、炭素数が1又は2のアルキレン基であり、特に好ましくは、炭素数が1又は2の無置換のアルキレン基であり、最も好ましくは、無置換のメチレン基である。炭素数が1~6のアルキレン基としては、例えば、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基、ヘキシレン基などが挙げられる。
 Yは、好ましくは、ヒドロキシ基、又は各アルキル基の炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基である。
 Yで表されるアルキルアミノ基及びジアルキルアミノ基におけるアルキル基は、直鎖状のアルキル基でもよく、分岐状のアルキル基でもよく、環状のアルキル基でもよい。また、ジアルキルアミノ基における各アルキル基は、同一でも異なっていてもよい。アルキルアミノ基は、好ましくは、炭素数が1~10のアルキルアミノ基であり、より好ましくは、炭素数が3~10のアルキルアミノ基であり、特に好ましくは、炭素数が6~10のアルキルアミノ基である。ジアルキルアミノ基は、好ましくは、各アルキル基の炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基であり、より好ましくは、各アルキル基の炭素数が3~10のジアルキルアミノ基であり、特に好ましくは、各アルキル基の炭素数が6~10のジアルキルアミノ基である。炭素数が1~10のアルキルアミノ基、及び各アルキル基の炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基におけるアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、ブチル基、tert-ブチル基、ヘキシル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、オクチル基、デシル基などが挙げられる。
In the formula (1), in the —ZY group represented by P, Z represents an alkylene group, and Y represents a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, or a dialkylamino group.
The alkylene group represented by Z is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms, and even more preferably an alkylene group substituted with a carboxy group. Preferred is an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms, particularly preferably an unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms, and most preferably an unsubstituted methylene group. Examples of the alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, and a hexylene group.
Y is preferably a hydroxy group or a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, more preferably a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
The alkyl group in the alkylamino group and dialkylamino group represented by Y may be a linear alkyl group, a branched alkyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group. In addition, each alkyl group in the dialkylamino group may be the same or different. The alkylamino group is preferably an alkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylamino group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an alkylamino group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. It is an amino group. The dialkylamino group is preferably a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, more preferably a dialkylamino group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, particularly preferably Each alkyl group is a dialkylamino group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkyl group in the alkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms and the dialkylamino group in which each alkyl group has 1 to 10 carbon atoms include, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, iso-propyl group, butyl group Tert-butyl group, hexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, cyclohexyl group, octyl group, decyl group and the like.
 式(1)中、Pは、好ましくは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アシル基、アミノ基、カルボキシ基、アルキルアミノ基、ジアルキルアミノ基、又は-Z-Y基であり、より好ましくは、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アシル基、アミノ基、又は-Z-Y基であり、更に好ましくは、水素原子、アルキル基、又は-Z-Y基であり、特に好ましくは、水素原子、又は-Z-Y基である。 In formula (1), P is preferably a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, an alkylamino group, a dialkylamino group, or — A ZY group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an acyl group, an amino group, or a -ZY group, still more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or -ZY group. A group, particularly preferably a hydrogen atom or a -ZY group.
 式(1)中、Qで表される置換基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アシル基、アミノ基、-Z-Y基、アルコキシ基、カルボキシ基、アルコキシアシル基などが挙げられる。 In the formula (1), examples of the substituent represented by Q include a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an amino group, a —ZY group, an alkoxy group, a carboxy group, and the like. Group, alkoxyacyl group and the like.
 式(1)中、Qで表されるハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アシル基、及び-Z-Y基は、それぞれ、上記式(1)においてPで表されるハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アシル基、及び-Z-Y基と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 In the formula (1), a halogen atom represented by Q, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, and a —ZY group are each a halogen atom represented by P in the above formula (1). , An alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, and a -ZY group, and the preferred range is also the same.
 式(1)中、Qで表されるアルコキシ基は、直鎖状のアルコキシ基でもよく、分岐状のアルコキシ基でもよい。Qで表されるアルコキシ基は、好ましくは炭素数が1~12のアルコキシ基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が1~6のアルコキシ基である。炭素数が1~12のアルコキシ基としては、例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、ブトキシ基、tert-ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、オクチルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基などが挙げられる。 In the formula (1), the alkoxy group represented by Q may be a linear alkoxy group or a branched alkoxy group. The alkoxy group represented by Q is preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms include methoxy group, ethoxy group, butoxy group, tert-butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, octyloxy group, dodecyloxy group and the like.
 式(1)中、Qで表されるアルコキシアシル基におけるアルコキシ基は、直鎖状のアルコキシ基でもよく、分岐状のアルコキシ基でもよい。Qで表されるアルコキシアシル基は、好ましくは炭素数が1~12のアルコキシアシル基であり、より好ましくは炭素数が1~6のアルコキシアシル基である。炭素数が1~12のアルコキシアシル基としては、例えば、メトキシアシル基(すなわち、メトキシカルボニル基)、エトキシアシル基(すなわち、エトキシカルボニル基)、ブトキシアシル基(すなわち、ブトキシカルボニル基)、tert-ブトキシアシル基(すなわち、ブトキシカルボニル基)、ペンチルオキシアシル基(すなわち、ペンチルオキシカルボニル基)、ヘキシルオキシアシル基(すなわち、ヘキシルオキシカルボニル基)、オクチルオキシアシル基(すなわちオクチルオキシカルボニル基)、ドデシルオキシアシル基(すなわち、ドデシルオキシカルボニル基)などが挙げられる。 In formula (1), the alkoxy group in the alkoxyacyl group represented by Q may be a linear alkoxy group or a branched alkoxy group. The alkoxyacyl group represented by Q is preferably an alkoxyacyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkoxyacyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkoxyacyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms include a methoxyacyl group (namely, methoxycarbonyl group), ethoxyacyl group (namely, ethoxycarbonyl group), butoxyacyl group (namely, butoxycarbonyl group), tert- Butoxyacyl group (ie, butoxycarbonyl group), pentyloxyacyl group (ie, pentyloxycarbonyl group), hexyloxyacyl group (ie, hexyloxycarbonyl group), octyloxyacyl group (ie, octyloxycarbonyl group), dodecyl An oxyacyl group (namely, dodecyloxycarbonyl group) etc. are mentioned.
 式(1)中、Qは、好ましくは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、複素環基、アシル基、アミノ基、-Z-Y基、アルコキシ基、カルボキシ基、又はアルコキシアシル基であり、より好ましくは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アシル基、アミノ基、カルボキシ基、又はアルコキシアシル基であり、特に好ましくは、アルキル基、又はアルコキシ基である。 In the formula (1), Q is preferably a halogen atom, hydroxy group, alkyl group, aryl group, heterocyclic group, acyl group, amino group, —ZY group, alkoxy group, carboxy group, or alkoxyacyl group. And more preferably a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, or an alkoxyacyl group, and particularly preferably an alkyl group or an alkoxy group.
 式(1)におけるP及びQの好ましい組み合わせは、下記(a)から任意に選ばれる基群と、下記(b)から任意に選ばれる基群と、を組み合わせた態様を包含する。
(a)Pは、好ましくは、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アシル基、アミノ基、又は-Z-Y基であり、より好ましくは、水素原子、アルキル基、又は-Z-Y基であり、特に好ましくは、水素原子、又は-Z-Y基である。
(b)Qは、好ましくは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アシル基、アミノ基、カルボキシ基、又はアルコキシアシル基であり、より好ましくは、アルキル基、又はアルコキシ基である。
Preferable combinations of P and Q in the formula (1) include an embodiment in which a group group arbitrarily selected from the following (a) and a group group arbitrarily selected from the following (b) are combined.
(A) P is preferably a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an acyl group, an amino group, or a —ZY group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or a —ZY group. And particularly preferably a hydrogen atom or a —ZY group.
(B) Q is preferably a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyl group, an amino group, a carboxy group, or an alkoxyacyl group, and more preferably an alkyl group or an alkoxy group.
 式(1)におけるP及びQのより好ましい組み合わせは、下記(a’)から任意に選ばれる基群と、下記(b’)から任意に選ばれる基群と、を組み合わせた態様を包含する。
(a’)Pは、好ましくは、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、炭素数が1~6のアルキル基、炭素数が1~6のアシル基、アミノ基、又は-Z-Y基であり、Zが、カルボキシ基で置換されていてもよい、炭素数が1又は2のアルキレン基であり、Yが、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、又は各アルキル基の炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基であり、より好ましくは、水素原子、炭素数が1~6のアルキル基、又は-Z-Y基であり、Zが、カルボキシ基で置換されていてもよい、炭素数が1又は2のアルキレン基であり、Yが、各アルキル基の炭素数が1~10のジアルキルアミノ基であり、更に好ましくは、水素原子、又は-Z-Y基であり、Zが、カルボキシ基で置換されていてもよい、炭素数が1又は2のアルキレン基であり、Yが、各アルキル基の炭素数が1以上10以下のジアルキルアミノ基であり、特に好ましくは、水素原子、又は-Z-Y基であり、Zが、炭素数が1又は2の無置換のアルキレン基であり、Yが、各アルキル基の炭素数が1以上10以下のジアルキルアミノ基である。
(b’)Qは、好ましくは、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、炭素数が1~6のアルキル基、炭素数が1~6のアシル基、アミノ基、炭素数が1~6のアルコキシ基、カルボキシ基、又は炭素数が1~6のアルコキシアシル基であり、より好ましくは、炭素数が1~6のアルキル基、又は炭素数が1~6のアルコキシ基である。
More preferable combinations of P and Q in the formula (1) include an embodiment in which a group group arbitrarily selected from the following (a ′) and a group group arbitrarily selected from the following (b ′) are combined.
(A ′) P is preferably a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an acyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an amino group, or a —ZY group, and Z is , An alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a carboxy group, Y is a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, or a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group; More preferably, it is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or a -ZY group, and Z is an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a carboxy group. Y is a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or a -ZY group, and Z may be substituted with a carboxy group. An alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms, and Y is each A dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in the alkyl group, particularly preferably a hydrogen atom or a -ZY group, and Z is an unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms. , Y is a dialkylamino group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in each alkyl group.
(B ′) Q is preferably a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an acyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an amino group, an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, carboxy Or an alkoxyacyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms or an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
 式(1)中、nは、0~4の整数を表し、好ましくは0~2の整数であり、より好ましくは0又は1であり、特に好ましくは0である。 In the formula (1), n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1, and particularly preferably 0.
 本開示において、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物は、1種単独で用いられてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いられてもよい。
 ベンゾトリアゾール化合物の含有量は、転写性、パターン形状、及び、エッチングにより形成される回路配線の直線性の観点から、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.01質量%~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.05質量%~10質量%であることがより好ましく、0.05質量%~2質量%であることが更に好ましく、0.05質量%~1質量%であることが特に好ましい。
In the present disclosure, the benzotriazole compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the benzotriazole compound is 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of transferability, pattern shape, and linearity of circuit wiring formed by etching. It is preferably 0.05% by mass to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.05% by mass to 2% by mass, and even more preferably 0.05% by mass to 1% by mass. Is particularly preferred.
<<塩基性化合物>>
 上記感光性樹脂層は、塩基性化合物を更に含んでいてもよい。
 本開示における塩基性化合物の分子量は、2,000未満であり、1,000未満であることが好ましい。
 また、本開示における塩基性化合物は、上記ベンゾトリアゾール化合物以外の化合物であるものとする。
 塩基性化合物としては、化学増幅ポジ型レジストで用いられる塩基性化合物の中から任意に選択して使用することができる。例えば、脂肪族アミン、芳香族アミン、複素環式アミン、第四級アンモニウムヒドロキシド、及び、カルボン酸の第四級アンモニウム塩等が挙げられる。これらの具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0204~段落0207に記載の化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<< basic compound >>
The photosensitive resin layer may further contain a basic compound.
The molecular weight of the basic compound in the present disclosure is less than 2,000, and preferably less than 1,000.
Moreover, the basic compound in this indication shall be compounds other than the said benzotriazole compound.
As the basic compound, any basic compound used in a chemically amplified positive resist can be selected and used. Examples thereof include aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, and quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids. Specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A-2011-212494, paragraphs 0204 to 0207, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 具体的には、脂肪族アミンとしては、例えば、トリメチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、ジ-n-プロピルアミン、トリ-n-プロピルアミン、ジ-n-ペンチルアミン、トリ-n-ペンチルアミン、ジエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミン、ジシクロヘキシルアミン、及び、ジシクロヘキシルメチルアミンなどが挙げられる。
 芳香族アミンとしては、例えば、アニリン、ベンジルアミン、N,N-ジメチルアニリン、及び、ジフェニルアミンなどが挙げられる。
 複素環式アミンとしては、例えば、ピリジン、2-メチルピリジン、4-メチルピリジン、2-エチルピリジン、4-エチルピリジン、2-フェニルピリジン、4-フェニルピリジン、N-メチル-4-フェニルピリジン、4-ジメチルアミノピリジン、イミダゾール、ベンズイミダゾール、4-メチルイミダゾール、2-フェニルベンズイミダゾール、2,4,5-トリフェニルイミダゾール、ニコチン、ニコチン酸、ニコチン酸アミド、キノリン、8-オキシキノリン、ピラジン、ピラゾール、ピリダジン、プリン、ピロリジン、ピペリジン、ピペラジン、モルホリン、4-メチルモルホリン、1,5-ジアザビシクロ[4.3.0]-5-ノネン、及び、1,8-ジアザビシクロ[5.3.0]-7-ウンデセンなどが挙げられる。
 第四級アンモニウムヒドロキシドとしては、例えば、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、及び、テトラ-n-ヘキシルアンモニウムヒドロキシドなどが挙げられる。
 カルボン酸の第四級アンモニウム塩としては、例えば、テトラメチルアンモニウムアセテート、テトラメチルアンモニウムベンゾエート、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムアセテート、及び、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムベンゾエートなどが挙げられる。
Specific examples of the aliphatic amine include trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, di-n-propylamine, tri-n-propylamine, di-n-pentylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, and the like. Examples include ethanolamine, dicyclohexylamine, and dicyclohexylmethylamine.
Examples of the aromatic amine include aniline, benzylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, and diphenylamine.
Examples of the heterocyclic amine include pyridine, 2-methylpyridine, 4-methylpyridine, 2-ethylpyridine, 4-ethylpyridine, 2-phenylpyridine, 4-phenylpyridine, N-methyl-4-phenylpyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, imidazole, benzimidazole, 4-methylimidazole, 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, nicotine, nicotinic acid, nicotinamide, quinoline, 8-oxyquinoline, pyrazine, Pyrazole, pyridazine, purine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, 4-methylmorpholine, 1,5-diazabicyclo [4.3.0] -5-nonene, and 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.3.0] -7-Undecene.
Examples of the quaternary ammonium hydroxide include tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetra-n-butylammonium hydroxide, and tetra-n-hexylammonium hydroxide.
Examples of the quaternary ammonium salt of carboxylic acid include tetramethylammonium acetate, tetramethylammonium benzoate, tetra-n-butylammonium acetate, and tetra-n-butylammonium benzoate.
 上記塩基性化合物は、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 塩基性化合物の含有量は、保存安定性の観点から、上記感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.001質量%~5質量%であることが好ましく、0.005質量%~3質量%であることがより好ましい。
The said basic compound may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together.
The content of the basic compound is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5% by mass, and preferably 0.005% by mass to 3% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of storage stability. % Is more preferable.
<<その他の添加剤>>
 本開示における上記感光性樹脂層は、上記成分以外にも、必要に応じて公知の添加剤を含むことができる。
<< Other additives >>
The said photosensitive resin layer in this indication can contain a well-known additive as needed besides the said component.
-界面活性剤-
 上記感光性樹脂層は、膜厚均一性の観点から界面活性剤を含有することが好ましい。界面活性剤としては、アニオン系、カチオン系、ノニオン系(非イオン系)、又は、両性のいずれでも使用することができるが、好ましい界面活性剤はノニオン界面活性剤である。
 ノニオン系界面活性剤の例としては、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルフェニルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレングリコールの高級脂肪酸ジエステル類、シリコーン系、フッ素系界面活性剤を挙げることができる。また、以下商品名で、KP(信越化学工業(株)製)、ポリフロー(共栄社化学(株)製)、エフトップ(JEMCO社製)、メガファック(DIC(株)製)、フロラード(住友スリーエム(株)製)、アサヒガード、サーフロン(旭硝子(株)製)、PolyFox(OMNOVA社製)、及び、SH-8400(東レ・ダウコーニング(株)製)等の各シリーズを挙げることができる。
 また、界面活性剤として、下記式I-1で表される構成単位A及び構成単位Bを含み、テトラヒドロフラン(THF)を溶剤とした場合のゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィーで測定されるポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量(Mw)が1,000以上10,000以下である共重合体を好ましい例として挙げることができる。
-Surfactant-
The photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of film thickness uniformity. As the surfactant, any of anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic), or amphoteric can be used, but a preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
Examples of nonionic surfactants include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl phenyl ethers, higher fatty acid diesters of polyoxyethylene glycol, silicone-based and fluorine-based surfactants. . The following trade names are KP (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), Polyflow (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), F-Top (manufactured by JEMCO), MegaFuck (manufactured by DIC Corporation), and Florard (Sumitomo 3M). Asahi Guard, Surflon (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PolyFox (manufactured by OMNOVA), and SH-8400 (manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.).
Further, as a surfactant, it contains a structural unit A and a structural unit B represented by the following formula I-1, and is a weight average in terms of polystyrene measured by gel permeation chromatography using tetrahydrofuran (THF) as a solvent. A preferable example is a copolymer having a molecular weight (Mw) of 1,000 or more and 10,000 or less.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
 式(I-1)中、R401及びR403はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、R402は炭素数1以上4以下の直鎖アルキレン基を表し、R404は水素原子又は炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基を表し、Lは炭素数3以上6以下のアルキレン基を表し、p及びqは重合比を表す質量百分率であり、pは10質量%以上80質量%以下の数値を表し、qは20質量%以上90質量%以下の数値を表し、rは1以上18以下の整数を表し、sは1以上10以下の整数を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。 In formula (I-1), R 401 and R 403 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 402 represents a linear alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R 404 represents a hydrogen atom or a carbon group. Represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, L represents an alkylene group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms, p and q are mass percentages representing a polymerization ratio, and p is a numerical value of 10 mass% to 80 mass%. Q represents a numerical value of 20% to 90% by mass, r represents an integer of 1 to 18, s represents an integer of 1 to 10, and * represents a bonding site with another structure. Represent.
 Lは、下記式(I-2)で表される分岐アルキレン基であることが好ましい。式(I-2)におけるR405は、炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基を表し、相溶性と被塗布面に対する濡れ性の点で、炭素数1以上3以下のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数2又は3のアルキル基がより好ましい。pとqとの和(p+q)は、p+q=100、すなわち、100質量%であることが好ましい。 L is preferably a branched alkylene group represented by the following formula (I-2). R 405 in formula (I-2) represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms in terms of compatibility and wettability to the coated surface. Two or three alkyl groups are more preferred. The sum (p + q) of p and q is preferably p + q = 100, that is, 100% by mass.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 共重合体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、1,500以上5,000以下がより好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the copolymer is more preferably from 1,500 to 5,000.
 また、界面活性剤としては、塗布面状、及び、得られる樹脂パターンのディンプル抑制性の観点から、フッ素原子を有する構成単位を含む重合体(以下、重合体Fともいう。)を好ましく用いることができる。
 また、上記重合体Fにおけるフッ素原子の含有量は、塗布面状、及び、得られる樹脂パターンのディンプル抑制性の観点から、上記重合体Fの全質量に対し、20質量%以上50質量%以下であることが好ましく、20質量%以上45質量%以下であることがより好ましく、20質量%以上40質量%以下であることが特に好ましい。
 本開示における上記重合体Fにおけるフッ素原子の含有量は、重合体F全体に対する質量基準のフッ素原子の含有量であり、重合体Fの化学構造の解析又は元素分析を行い、(重合体Fにおけるフッ素原子の全質量)/(重合体Fの全質量)より算出することができる。
Moreover, as the surfactant, a polymer containing a structural unit having a fluorine atom (hereinafter also referred to as polymer F) is preferably used from the viewpoint of the coated surface and the dimple suppression of the resulting resin pattern. Can do.
In addition, the fluorine atom content in the polymer F is 20% by mass or more and 50% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the polymer F from the viewpoint of the coated surface and the dimple suppression of the resulting resin pattern. It is preferable that it is 20 mass% or more and 45 mass% or less, and it is especially preferable that it is 20 mass% or more and 40 mass% or less.
The fluorine atom content in the polymer F in the present disclosure is the mass-based fluorine atom content with respect to the entire polymer F. The chemical structure analysis or elemental analysis of the polymer F is performed (in the polymer F It can be calculated from (total mass of fluorine atoms) / (total mass of polymer F).
 上記重合体FのI/O値は、特に制限はないが、上記重合体FのI/O値が0.45未満である場合、上記重合体Fは、後述する酸基又は塩基性基を有する構成単位を含むことが好ましい。
 本開示におけるI/O値は、有機概念図に基づく無機性値Iを有機性値Oで除したI/O値である。
 上記I/O値については、有機概念図(甲田善生 著、三共出版(1984));KUMAMOTO PHARMACEUTICAL BULLETIN,第1号、第1~16項(1954年);化学の領域、第11巻、第10号、719~725項(1957年);フレグランスジャーナル、第34号、第97~111項(1979年);フレグランスジャーナル、第50号、第79~82項(1981年);などの文献に詳細な説明がある。I/O値の概念は、化合物の性質を、共有結合性を表す有機性基と、イオン結合性を表わす無機性基とに分け、全ての有機化合物を有機軸、無機軸と名付けた直行座標上の1点ずつに位置づけて示すものである。
The I / O value of the polymer F is not particularly limited. However, when the I / O value of the polymer F is less than 0.45, the polymer F has an acid group or a basic group described later. It is preferable that the structural unit which has is included.
The I / O value in the present disclosure is an I / O value obtained by dividing the inorganic value I based on the organic conceptual diagram by the organic value O.
Regarding the above I / O values, organic conceptual diagram (Yoshio Koda, Sankyo Publishing (1984)); No. 10, 719-725 (1957); Fragrance Journal, No. 34, 97-111 (1979); Fragrance Journal, No. 50, 79-82 (1981); There is a detailed explanation. The concept of the I / O value is that the properties of a compound are divided into an organic group that represents covalent bonding and an inorganic group that represents ionic bonding, and all the organic compounds are orthogonal coordinates named organic axes and inorganic axes. Each of the above points is shown.
 上記重合体FのI/O値は、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制の観点から、0.20以上であることが好ましく、0.30以上であることがより好ましく、0.30以上1.50以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、上記重合体Fは、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制及び面状の観点から、酸基又は塩基性基を有する構成単位を含むことが好ましい。
The I / O value of the polymer F is preferably 0.20 or more, more preferably 0.30 or more, and more preferably 0.30 or more from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the resulting pattern. More preferably, it is 50 or less.
In addition, the polymer F preferably includes a structural unit having an acid group or a basic group from the viewpoint of suppressing generation of dimples in a pattern to be obtained and a planar shape.
 上記重合体Fのガラス転移温度(Tg)は、パターン形成性、転写性、及び、得られるパターンの面状の観点から、90℃以下であることが好ましく、50℃以下であることがより好ましく、-30℃以上50℃以下であることが更に好ましく、-10℃以上20℃以下であることが特に好ましい。また、上記範囲であると、カバーフィルムを用いる場合、カバーフィルムの密着不良、又は、カバーフィルムを剥離する際の剥離不良が抑制される。 The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer F is preferably 90 ° C. or less, more preferably 50 ° C. or less, from the viewpoints of pattern formability, transferability, and surface shape of the resulting pattern. The temperature is more preferably −30 ° C. or more and 50 ° C. or less, and particularly preferably −10 ° C. or more and 20 ° C. or less. Moreover, when using a cover film as it is the said range, the adhesion defect of a cover film or the peeling defect at the time of peeling a cover film is suppressed.
 重合体Fの重量平均分子量(Mw)は、2,000以上であることが好ましく、2,000~100,000であることがより好ましく、2,000~20,000であることが更に好ましい。
 重合体Fの数平均分子量(Mn)と重量平均分子量(Mw)との比(Mw/Mn、分散度)は、1.0~5.0が好ましく、1.05~3.5がより好ましい。
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer F is preferably 2,000 or more, more preferably 2,000 to 100,000, and still more preferably 2,000 to 20,000.
The ratio (Mw / Mn, degree of dispersion) of the number average molecular weight (Mn) and the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer F is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, more preferably 1.05 to 3.5. .
〔フッ素原子を有する構成単位〕
 上記重合体Fは、フッ素原子を有する構成単位を含む。
 上記フッ素原子を有する構成単位におけるフッ素原子の数は、特に制限はないが、塗布時の面状の観点から、5以上50以下であることが好ましく、7以上30以下であることがより好ましく、7以上20以下であることが更に好ましい。
[Structural unit having fluorine atom]
The polymer F includes a structural unit having a fluorine atom.
The number of fluorine atoms in the structural unit having fluorine atoms is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or more and 50 or less, more preferably 7 or more and 30 or less, from the viewpoint of the surface state during coating. More preferably, it is 7 or more and 20 or less.
 上記フッ素原子を有する構成単位は、塗布時の面状の観点から、フッ素原子をパーフルオロアルキル基又はパーフルオロアリール基として有することが好ましく、パーフルオロアルキル基として有することがより好ましい。言い換えると、上記フッ素原子を有する構成単位は、塗布時の面状の観点から、パーフルオロアルキル基又はパーフルオロアリール基を有することが好ましく、パーフルオロアルキル基を有することがより好ましい。
 上記パーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数は、塗布時の面状の観点から、4以上30以下であることが好ましく、6以上24以下であることがより好ましく、9以上15以下であることが特に好ましい。
The structural unit having a fluorine atom preferably has a fluorine atom as a perfluoroalkyl group or a perfluoroaryl group, more preferably as a perfluoroalkyl group, from the viewpoint of planarity at the time of coating. In other words, the structural unit having a fluorine atom preferably has a perfluoroalkyl group or a perfluoroaryl group, and more preferably has a perfluoroalkyl group, from the viewpoint of planarity at the time of coating.
The number of carbon atoms of the perfluoroalkyl group is preferably 4 or more and 30 or less, more preferably 6 or more and 24 or less, and particularly preferably 9 or more and 15 or less, from the viewpoint of the surface state during coating. .
 上記フッ素原子を有する構成単位は、塗布時の面状の観点から、下記式F-1で表される構成単位であることが好ましい。 The structural unit having a fluorine atom is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula F-1 from the viewpoint of planarity during coating.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 式F-1中、Rf1は、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xf1は、単結合、-COO-、-OCO-、又は、アリーレン基を表し、Lf1は、単結合、アルキレン基、又は、アルキレン基、-COO-、-OCO-及びアリーレン基よりなる群から選ばれた基を2種以上結合した基を表し、Rfは、パーフルオロアルキル基を表す。 In Formula F-1, R f1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, X f1 represents a single bond, —COO—, —OCO—, or an arylene group, and L f1 represents a single bond, an alkylene group, Alternatively, it represents a group in which two or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkylene group, —COO—, —OCO—, and an arylene group are bonded, and Rf represents a perfluoroalkyl group.
 式F-1におけるXf1は、入手性及び合成適性の観点から、単結合、又は、-COO-であることが好ましく、-COO-であることがより好ましい。
 式F-1におけるLf1は、入手性及び合成適性の観点から、アルキレン基、又は、-COO-、-OCO-及びアリーレン基よりなる群から選ばれた基を2種以上結合した基であることが好ましく、アルキレン基、又は、-COO-及び-OCO-よりなる群から選ばれた基を2種以上結合した基であることがより好ましく、アルキレン基であることが特に好ましい。
 上記アルキレン基は、直鎖状であっても、分岐鎖状であっても、環構造を有していてもよい。また、上記アルキレン基は、炭素数2~10のアルキレン基であることが好ましく、炭素数2~6のアルキレン基であることがより好ましく、メチレン基、エチレン基であることが特に好ましい。
 式F-1におけるRfは、塗布時の面状の観点から、炭素数4~30のパーフルオロアルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数4~24のパーフルオロアルキル基であることがより好ましく、炭素数9~15のパーフルオロアルキル基であることが特に好ましい。
 上記パーフルオロアルキル基は、直鎖状であっても、分岐鎖状であっても、環構造を有していてもよいが、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制及び塗布時の面状の観点から、直鎖又は分岐パーフルオロアルキル基であることが好ましく、直鎖パーフルオロアルキル基であることがより好ましい。
X f1 in formula F-1 is preferably a single bond or —COO—, more preferably —COO—, from the viewpoints of availability and synthesis suitability.
L f1 in Formula F-1 is an alkylene group or a group in which two or more groups selected from the group consisting of —COO—, —OCO—, and an arylene group are bonded from the viewpoint of availability and synthesis suitability. An alkylene group or a group formed by bonding two or more groups selected from the group consisting of —COO— and —OCO— is more preferable, and an alkylene group is particularly preferable.
The alkylene group may be linear, branched, or have a ring structure. The alkylene group is preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a methylene group or an ethylene group.
Rf in Formula F-1 is preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 4 to 24 carbon atoms, from the viewpoint of the surface state during coating. A perfluoroalkyl group having 9 to 15 carbon atoms is particularly preferred.
The perfluoroalkyl group may be linear, branched, or have a ring structure, but it is possible to suppress dimple generation in the pattern obtained and to obtain a planar view at the time of coating. Therefore, a linear or branched perfluoroalkyl group is preferable, and a linear perfluoroalkyl group is more preferable.
 重合体Fは、フッ素原子を有する構成単位を1種単独で有していても、2種以上を有していてもよい。
 フッ素原子を有する構成単位は、後述する酸基又は塩基性基を有する構成単位及び親水性基を有する構成単位とは異なる構成単位であることが好ましい。また、酸基又は塩基性基を有する構成単位及び親水性基を有する構成単位は、フッ素原子を有しないことが好ましい。
 上記重合体Fは、塗布時の面状の観点から、フッ素原子を有する構成単位を、重合体Fの全質量に対し、20質量%以上99質量%以下含むことが好ましく、30質量%以上99質量%以下含むことがより好ましく、30質量%以上95質量%以下含むことが更に好ましく、35質量%以上70質量%以下含むことが特に好ましい。
 重合体Fにおけるフッ素原子を有する構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定又は19F-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
The polymer F may have the structural unit which has a fluorine atom individually by 1 type, or may have 2 or more types.
The structural unit having a fluorine atom is preferably a structural unit different from the structural unit having an acid group or basic group and the structural unit having a hydrophilic group, which will be described later. Moreover, it is preferable that the structural unit which has an acid group or a basic group, and the structural unit which has a hydrophilic group do not have a fluorine atom.
The polymer F preferably contains 20% by mass or more and 99% by mass or less, and 30% by mass or more and 99% by mass or less of a structural unit having a fluorine atom with respect to the total mass of the polymer F, from the viewpoint of planarity at the time of coating. More preferably, it is more preferably 30% by mass or more and 95% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 35% by mass or more and 70% by mass or less.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit having a fluorine atom in the polymer F can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by 13 C-NMR measurement or 19 F-NMR measurement by a conventional method. it can.
〔酸基又は塩基性基を有する構成単位〕
 上記重合体Fは、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制の観点から、酸基又は塩基性基を有する構成単位を含むことが好ましく、上記重合体FのI/O値が0.45未満である場合、酸基又は塩基性基を有する構成単位を含むことがより好ましい。
[Structural unit having acid group or basic group]
The polymer F preferably contains a structural unit having an acid group or a basic group from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the resulting pattern, and the I / O value of the polymer F is less than 0.45. In this case, it is more preferable to include a structural unit having an acid group or a basic group.
 上記重合体Fにおける酸基を有する構成単位における酸基のpKaは、感度向上の観点から、10以下が好ましく、6以下がより好ましい。また、酸基のpKaは、-5以上であることが好ましい。
 上記酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホンアミド基、ホスホン酸基、スルホン酸基、フェノール性水酸基、及び、スルホニルイミド基等が例示される。中でも、カルボキシ基及びフェノール性水酸基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の酸基が好ましい。
 重合体への酸基を有する構成単位の導入は、酸基を有するモノマーを共重合させることで行うことができる。
 酸基を有する構成単位は、スチレンに由来する構成単位若しくはビニル化合物に由来する構成単位に対して酸基が置換した構成単位、又は、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位であることがより好ましい。
The pKa of the acid group in the structural unit having an acid group in the polymer F is preferably 10 or less, more preferably 6 or less, from the viewpoint of improving sensitivity. The pKa of the acid group is preferably −5 or more.
Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, and a sulfonylimide group. Among these, at least one acid group selected from the group consisting of a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable.
The introduction of the structural unit having an acid group into the polymer can be carried out by copolymerizing a monomer having an acid group.
The structural unit having an acid group is more preferably a structural unit derived from styrene or a structural unit obtained by substituting an acid group for a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, or a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid. preferable.
 酸基を有する構成単位としては、パターン形成性、並びに、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制の観点から、カルボキシ基を有する構成単位、又は、フェノール性水酸基を有する構成単位が好ましく、カルボキシ基を有する構成単位がより好ましい。
 酸基を有する構成単位を形成しうる酸基を有するモノマーは既述の例に限定されない。
The structural unit having an acid group is preferably a structural unit having a carboxy group or a structural unit having a phenolic hydroxyl group, from the viewpoint of pattern formation and suppression of the occurrence of dimples in the resulting pattern, and has a carboxy group. A structural unit is more preferable.
The monomer having an acid group that can form a structural unit having an acid group is not limited to the examples described above.
 重合体Fに含まれる酸基を有する構成単位は、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 上記重合体Fは、パターン形成性、並びに、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制の観点から、重合体Fの全質量に対し、酸基を有する構成単位を0.1質量%~20質量%含むことが好ましく、0.5質量%~15質量%含むことがより好ましく、1質量%~10質量%含むことが更に好ましい。
 重合体Fにおける酸基を有する構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
The structural unit having an acid group contained in the polymer F may be only one type or two or more types.
The polymer F contains 0.1% by mass to 20% by mass of a structural unit having an acid group with respect to the total mass of the polymer F, from the viewpoints of pattern formability and suppression of occurrence of dimples in the resulting pattern. The content is preferably 0.5% by mass to 15% by mass, more preferably 1% by mass to 10% by mass.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit having an acid group in the polymer F can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method.
 塩基性基としては、パターン形成性、及び、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制の観点から、窒素原子を有する基であることが好ましく、脂肪族アミノ基、芳香族アミノ基、又は、含窒素複素芳香環基であることがより好ましく、脂肪族アミノ基、又は、含窒素複素芳香環基であることが更に好ましく、脂肪族アミノ基が特に好ましい。
 脂肪族アミノ基としては、第一級アミノ基、第二級アミノ基、又は、第三級アミノ基のいずれであってもよいが、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制及び面状の観点から、第二級アミノ基、又は、第三級アミノ基であることが好ましく、第三級アミノ基であることがより好ましい。
 第三級アミノ基としては、ジアルキルアミノ基、又は、N-アルキルモルフォリノ基が好ましい。
 塩基性基を有する構成単位は、(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する構成単位であることが好ましい。
The basic group is preferably a group having a nitrogen atom from the viewpoint of pattern formation and suppression of dimple formation in the resulting pattern, and is preferably an aliphatic amino group, an aromatic amino group, or a nitrogen-containing complex. It is more preferably an aromatic ring group, further preferably an aliphatic amino group or a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring group, and particularly preferably an aliphatic amino group.
The aliphatic amino group may be a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, or a tertiary amino group, but from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the pattern obtained and a planar shape, It is preferably a secondary amino group or a tertiary amino group, more preferably a tertiary amino group.
The tertiary amino group is preferably a dialkylamino group or an N-alkylmorpholino group.
The structural unit having a basic group is preferably a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound.
 重合体Fに含まれる塩基性基を有する構成単位は、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 上記重合体Fは、パターン形成性、並びに、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制の観点から、重合体Fの全質量に対し、塩基性基を有する構成単位を0.1質量%~50質量%含むことが好ましく、1質量%~40質量%含むことがより好ましく、5質量%~30質量%含むことが更に好ましい。
 重合体Fにおける塩基性基を有する構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
The structural unit having a basic group contained in the polymer F may be only one type or two or more types.
From the viewpoint of pattern formation and suppression of dimple formation in the resulting pattern, the polymer F contains 0.1% by mass to 50% by mass of a structural unit having a basic group with respect to the total mass of the polymer F. It is preferably contained, more preferably 1% by mass to 40% by mass, and even more preferably 5% by mass to 30% by mass.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit having a basic group in the polymer F can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensity calculated by 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method.
 上記酸基又は塩基性基を有する構成単位は、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制の観点から、下記式F-2で表される構成単位であることが好ましい。 The structural unit having an acid group or basic group is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula F-2 from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the resulting pattern.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 式F-2中、Rf2は、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xf2は、単結合、-COO-、-OCO-、又は、アリーレン基を表し、Lf2は、単結合、アルキレン基、又は、アルキレン基、-COO-、-OCO-及びアリーレン基よりなる群から選ばれた基を2種以上結合した基を表し、Rは、酸基又は塩基性基を表す。 In Formula F-2, R f2 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, X f2 represents a single bond, —COO—, —OCO—, or an arylene group, and L f2 represents a single bond, an alkylene group, Alternatively, it represents a group in which two or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkylene group, —COO—, —OCO— and an arylene group are bonded, and R p represents an acid group or a basic group.
 式F-2におけるXf2は、入手性及び合成適性の観点から、単結合、又は、-COO-であることが好ましい。
 式F-2におけるLf2は、入手性及び合成適性の観点から、単結合、アルキレン基、又は、アルキレン基、-COO-及び-OCO-よりなる群から選ばれた基を2種以上結合した基であることが好ましく、単結合、又は、アルキレン基であることがより好ましい。
 上記アルキレン基は、直鎖状であっても、分岐鎖状であっても、環構造を有していてもよい。また、上記アルキレン基は、炭素数2~10のアルキレン基であることが好ましく、炭素数2~6のアルキレン基であることがより好ましく、エチレン基又はプロピレン基であることが特に好ましい。
 式F-2におけるRは、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制の観点から、カルボキシ基、又は、窒素原子を有する基であることが好ましく、カルボキシ基、又は、第三級アミノ基を有する基であることがより好ましく、カルボキシ基、ジアルキルアミノ基、又は、N-アルキルモルフォリノ基であることが特に好ましい。
X f2 in Formula F-2 is preferably a single bond or —COO— from the viewpoints of availability and synthesis suitability.
L f2 in Formula F-2 is a single bond, an alkylene group, or two or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkylene group, —COO—, and —OCO— bonded from the viewpoint of availability and synthesis suitability. It is preferably a group, more preferably a single bond or an alkylene group.
The alkylene group may be linear, branched, or have a ring structure. The alkylene group is preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an ethylene group or a propylene group.
R p in Formula F-2 is preferably a carboxy group or a group having a nitrogen atom from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the resulting pattern, and a group having a carboxy group or a tertiary amino group Of these, a carboxy group, a dialkylamino group, or an N-alkylmorpholino group is particularly preferable.
 また、上記酸基又は塩基性基を有する構成単位は、酸基及び塩基性基以外に、後述する親水性基を更に有していてもよい。
 更に、上記酸基又は塩基性基を有する構成単位は、後述する親水性基を有する構成単位とは異なる構成単位である。
Moreover, the structural unit which has the said acid group or basic group may further have the hydrophilic group mentioned later other than an acid group and a basic group.
Furthermore, the structural unit having an acid group or a basic group is a structural unit different from the structural unit having a hydrophilic group described later.
〔親水性基を有する構成単位〕
 上記重合体Fは、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制の観点から、親水性基を有する構成単位を含むことが好ましく、親水性基を側鎖に有する構成単位を含むことがより好ましい。
 また、本開示において、「主鎖」とは樹脂を構成する高分子化合物の分子中で相対的に最も長い結合鎖を表し、「側鎖」とは主鎖から枝分かれしている炭素鎖を表す。
 親水性基としては、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制及び面状の観点から、ヒドロキシ基、エーテル結合、チオエーテル結合、カルボニル基、アミド構造、ラクトン構造、エステル結合、チオエステル結合、ウレア結合、チオウレア結合、ウレタン結合、及び、シアノ基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の構造が好ましく、ヒドロキシ基、エーテル結合、チオエーテル結合、カルボニル基、アミド構造、ラクトン構造、チオエステル結合、ウレア結合、チオウレア結合、ウレタン結合、及び、シアノ基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の構造がより好ましく、ヒドロキシ基、エーテル結合、アミド構造、ラクトン構造、ウレア結合、ウレタン結合、及び、シアノ基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の構造が更に好ましく、ヒドロキシ基、鎖状エーテル構造又は環状エーテル基であることが特に好ましい。
 言い換えると、上記重合体Fは、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制及び塗布時の面状の観点から、ヒドロキシ基、エーテル結合、チオエーテル結合、カルボニル基、アミド構造、ラクトン構造、エステル結合、チオエステル結合、ウレア結合、チオウレア結合、ウレタン結合、及び、シアノ基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の構造を有する構成単位を含むことが好ましく、ヒドロキシ基、エーテル結合、チオエーテル結合、カルボニル基、アミド構造、ラクトン構造、チオエステル結合、ウレア結合、チオウレア結合、ウレタン結合、及び、シアノ基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の構造がより好ましく、ヒドロキシ基、エーテル結合、アミド構造、ラクトン構造、ウレア結合、ウレタン結合、及び、シアノ基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の構造を有する構成単位を含むことが更に好ましく、ヒドロキシ基又は環状エーテル基を有する構成単位を含むことが特に好ましい。
 上記環状エーテル基は、4員環~6員環の環状エーテル環を有する基であることが好ましく、5員環又は6員環の環状エーテル環を有する基であることがより好ましく、5員環の環状エーテル環を有する基であることが特に好ましい。
 中でも、上記環状エーテル基としては、テトラヒドロフラニル基、又は、テトラヒドロピラニル基が好ましく、テトラヒドロフラニル基がより好ましい。
 また、上記カルボニル基及びエーテル結合は、エステル結合を形成していないカルボニル基及びエーテル結合であることを意味している。
[Structural unit having hydrophilic group]
The polymer F preferably contains a structural unit having a hydrophilic group, and more preferably contains a structural unit having a hydrophilic group in the side chain, from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the resulting pattern.
In the present disclosure, “main chain” represents a relatively long bond chain in the molecule of the polymer compound constituting the resin, and “side chain” represents a carbon chain branched from the main chain. .
Hydrophilic groups include hydroxy group, ether bond, thioether bond, carbonyl group, amide structure, lactone structure, ester bond, thioester bond, urea bond, thiourea bond from the viewpoint of suppressing dimple generation in the resulting pattern and planarity. And at least one structure selected from the group consisting of a urethane bond and a cyano group is preferred, a hydroxy group, an ether bond, a thioether bond, a carbonyl group, an amide structure, a lactone structure, a thioester bond, a urea bond, a thiourea bond, and a urethane More preferable is at least one structure selected from the group consisting of a bond and a cyano group, and at least selected from the group consisting of a hydroxy group, an ether bond, an amide structure, a lactone structure, a urea bond, a urethane bond, and a cyano group. One kind of structure The preferred, hydroxy group, and particularly preferably a chain ether structure or a cyclic ether group.
In other words, the polymer F has a hydroxy group, an ether bond, a thioether bond, a carbonyl group, an amide structure, a lactone structure, an ester bond, and a thioester bond from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the pattern obtained and the surface state during coating. A structural unit having at least one structure selected from the group consisting of a urea bond, a thiourea bond, a urethane bond, and a cyano group, a hydroxy group, an ether bond, a thioether bond, a carbonyl group, an amide structure, At least one structure selected from the group consisting of a lactone structure, a thioester bond, a urea bond, a thiourea bond, a urethane bond, and a cyano group is more preferable, and a hydroxy group, an ether bond, an amide structure, a lactone structure, a urea bond, and a urethane Bond and cyano More preferably comprising a structural unit having at least one structure selected from the group consisting of, and particularly preferably contains a structural unit having a hydroxy group or a cyclic ether group.
The cyclic ether group is preferably a group having a 4-membered to 6-membered cyclic ether ring, more preferably a group having a 5-membered or 6-membered cyclic ether ring. Particularly preferred is a group having a cyclic ether ring.
Among them, the cyclic ether group is preferably a tetrahydrofuranyl group or a tetrahydropyranyl group, and more preferably a tetrahydrofuranyl group.
The carbonyl group and the ether bond mean a carbonyl group and an ether bond that do not form an ester bond.
 上記親水性を有する構成単位は、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制及び塗布時の面状の観点から、下記式F-3で表される構成単位であることが好ましい。 The structural unit having hydrophilicity is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula F-3, from the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of dimples in the pattern obtained and the surface state during coating.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 式F-3中、Rf3は、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xf3は、単結合、-COO-、-OCO-、-CONR-、又は、アリーレン基を表し、Lf3は、単結合、アルキレン基、又は、アルキレン基、-COO-、-OCO-、-O-及びアリーレン基よりなる群から選ばれた基を2種以上結合した基を表し、Raqは、親水性基を表し、Rは、水素原子又は炭素数1~10のアルキル基を表す。 In Formula F-3, R f3 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, X f3 represents a single bond, —COO—, —OCO—, —CONR a —, or an arylene group, and L f3 represents a single bond Represents a bond, an alkylene group, or a group in which two or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkylene group, —COO—, —OCO—, —O— and an arylene group are bonded, and R aq represents a hydrophilic group. R a represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
 式F-3におけるXf3は、入手性及び合成適性の観点から、-COO-又は-CONRa-であることが好ましく、-COO-であることがより好ましい。
 式F-3におけるLf3は、入手性及び合成適性の面状の観点から、アルキレン基、又は、-COO-、-OCO-、-O-及びアリーレン基よりなる群から選ばれた基であることが好ましく、アルキレン基、又は、-COO-及び-OCO-よりなる群から選ばれた基であることがより好ましく、アルキレン基であることが特に好ましい。
 上記アルキレン基は、直鎖状であっても、分岐鎖状であっても、環構造を有していてもよい。また、上記アルキレン基は、炭素数1~10のアルキレン基であることが好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキレン基であることがより好ましく、メチレン基又はエチレン基であることが特に好ましい。
 式F-3におけるRaqは、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制の面状の観点から、ヒドロキシ基、エーテル結合、チオエーテル結合、カルボニル基、アミド構造、ラクトン構造、エステル結合、チオエステル結合、ウレア結合、チオウレア結合、ウレタン結合、及び、シアノ基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の構造が好ましく、ヒドロキシ基、環状エーテル基、ポリアルキレンオキシ基、アルキレンオキシ基又は、シアノ基であることが好ましく、ヒドロキシ基、アルキレンオキシ基又は環状エーテル基であることがより好ましい。
X f3 in formula F-3 is preferably —COO— or —CONR a —, more preferably —COO—, from the viewpoint of availability and synthesis suitability.
L f3 in Formula F-3 is an alkylene group, or a group selected from the group consisting of —COO—, —OCO—, —O—, and an arylene group, from the viewpoint of availability and surface suitability for synthesis. An alkylene group or a group selected from the group consisting of —COO— and —OCO— is more preferable, and an alkylene group is particularly preferable.
The alkylene group may be linear, branched, or have a ring structure. The alkylene group is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a methylene group or an ethylene group.
R aq in Formula F-3 is a hydroxy group, an ether bond, a thioether bond, a carbonyl group, an amide structure, a lactone structure, an ester bond, a thioester bond, or a urea bond, from the viewpoint of suppressing the dimple generation in the resulting pattern. , At least one structure selected from the group consisting of a thiourea bond, a urethane bond, and a cyano group is preferable, and is preferably a hydroxy group, a cyclic ether group, a polyalkyleneoxy group, an alkyleneoxy group, or a cyano group, More preferably, it is a hydroxy group, an alkyleneoxy group or a cyclic ether group.
 重合体Fは、親水性基を有する構成単位を1種単独で有していても、2種以上を有していてもよい。
 上記重合体Fが親水性基を有する構成単位を含む場合、上記重合体Fは、パターン形成性、転写性、並びに、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制及び塗布時の面状の観点から、親水性基を有する構成単位を、重合体Fの全質量に対し、0質量%を超え70質量%以下含むことが好ましく、5質量%以上70質量%以下含むことがより好ましく、10質量%以上65質量%以下含むことが更に好ましく、20質量%以上60質量%以下含むことが特に好ましい。
 重合体Fにおける親水性基を有する構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
The polymer F may have the structural unit which has a hydrophilic group individually by 1 type, or may have 2 or more types.
When the polymer F includes a structural unit having a hydrophilic group, the polymer F is hydrophilic from the viewpoints of pattern formability, transferability, generation of dimples in the resulting pattern, and surface conditions during coating. The structural unit having a functional group is preferably contained in an amount of more than 0% by mass and 70% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass to 70% by mass, more preferably 10% by mass to 65%, based on the total mass of the polymer F. More preferably, it is contained in an amount of 20% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 20% by mass or more and 60% by mass or less.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit having a hydrophilic group in the polymer F can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensity calculated from 13 C-NMR measurement by a conventional method.
〔酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位〕
 上記重合体Fは、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制及び塗布時の面状の観点から、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を含むことが好ましい。
 酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位としては、上記特定重合体における酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位と同様のものを適用できる。
 上記重合体Fにおける、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位の含有量は、重合体Fの全質量に対し、70質量%以下が好ましく、60質量%以下がより好ましく、50質量%以下が更に好ましい。下限値としては、0質量%でもよいが、1質量%以上であることが好ましく、5質量%以上であることがより好ましい。上記範囲であると、解像度及び密着性がより向上する。
 重合体Fにおけるその他の構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
[Structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group]
The polymer F preferably includes a structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group, from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the pattern to be obtained and the surface state during coating.
As the structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group, those similar to the structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group in the specific polymer can be applied.
70 mass% or less is preferable with respect to the total mass of the polymer F, and, as for content of the structural unit which has the acid group protected by the acid-decomposable group in the said polymer F, 50 mass% or less is more preferable, 50 A mass% or less is more preferable. The lower limit may be 0% by mass, but is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more. Within the above range, the resolution and adhesion are further improved.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of other structural units in the polymer F can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
〔その他の構成単位〕
 重合体Fは、既述の、フッ素原子を有する構成単位、酸基又は塩基性基を有する構成単位、親水性基を有する構成単位、及び、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位以外の、その他の構成単位を、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の効果を損なわない範囲で含んでいてもよい。
 その他の構成単位を形成するモノマーとしては、特に制限はなく、例えば、スチレン類、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸環状アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸アリールエステル、不飽和ジカルボン酸ジエステル、ビシクロ不飽和化合物、不飽和芳香族化合物、共役ジエン系化合物、その他の不飽和化合物を挙げることができる。
 その他の構成単位を用いて、種類及び含有量の少なくともいずれかを調整することで、重合体の諸特性を調整することができる。特に、その他の構成単位を適切に使用することで、重合体のTgを容易に調整することができる。
[Other structural units]
The polymer F has the above-described constitutional unit having a fluorine atom, a constitutional unit having an acid group or a basic group, a constitutional unit having a hydrophilic group, and an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group. Other structural units other than the unit may be included within a range that does not impair the effects of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a monomer which forms other structural units, For example, styrenes, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid aryl ester, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid Examples include diesters, bicyclounsaturated compounds, unsaturated aromatic compounds, conjugated diene compounds, and other unsaturated compounds.
Various characteristics of the polymer can be adjusted by adjusting at least one of the type and content using other structural units. In particular, the Tg of the polymer can be easily adjusted by appropriately using other structural units.
 その他の構成単位は、具体的には、スチレン、メチルスチレン、α-メチルスチレン、アセトキシスチレン、メトキシスチレン、エトキシスチレン、クロロスチレン、ビニル安息香酸メチル、ビニル安息香酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸ベンジル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソボルニルなどを重合して形成される構成単位を挙げることができる。その他、特開2004-264623号公報の段落0021~段落0024に記載の化合物を挙げることができる。 Other structural units are specifically styrene, methyl styrene, α-methyl styrene, acetoxy styrene, methoxy styrene, ethoxy styrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinyl benzoate, ethyl vinyl benzoate, methyl (meth) acrylate, Examples include structural units formed by polymerizing ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, and the like. it can. In addition, the compounds described in paragraphs 0021 to 0024 of JP-A No. 2004-264623 can be given.
 また、その他の構成単位を形成するモノマーとしては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制の観点で好ましい。中でも、炭素数4~12のアルキル基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが密着性の観点でより好ましい。具体的には、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-ブチル、及び、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシルが挙げられる。 Further, as a monomer that forms other structural unit, for example, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the resulting pattern. Among them, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion. Specific examples include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate.
 上記重合体Fは、その他の構成単位を1種のみ含んでもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。
 上記重合体Fにおけるその他の構成単位の含有量は、重合体Fの全質量に対し、70質量%以下が好ましく、60質量%以下がより好ましく、50質量%以下が更に好ましい。下限値としては、0質量%でもよいが、1質量%以上であることが好ましく、5質量%以上であることがより好ましい。上記範囲であると、解像度及び密着性がより向上する。
 重合体Fにおけるその他の構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
The said polymer F may contain only 1 type of other structural units, and may contain 2 or more types.
70 mass% or less is preferable with respect to the total mass of the polymer F, as for content of the other structural unit in the said polymer F, 60 mass% or less is more preferable, and 50 mass% or less is still more preferable. The lower limit may be 0% by mass, but is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more. Within the above range, the resolution and adhesion are further improved.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of other structural units in the polymer F can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
 転写性及びパターン形成性の観点から、上記重合体Fにおけるその他の構成単位としては、カルボン酸エステル構造を有する構成単位であることが好ましく、アルキル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位であることがより好ましい。
 また、転写性及びパターン形成性の観点から、上記重合体Fにおけるその他の構成単位としては、下記式F-4で表される構成単位であることが好ましい。
From the viewpoint of transferability and pattern formability, the other structural unit in the polymer F is preferably a structural unit having a carboxylic acid ester structure, and more preferably a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth) acrylate. preferable.
Further, from the viewpoint of transferability and pattern formability, the other structural unit in the polymer F is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula F-4.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 式F-4中、Rf4は、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xf4は、単結合、-COO-、-OCO-、又は、アリーレン基を表し、Lf4は、単結合、アルキレン基、又は、アルキレン基、-COO-、-OCO-及びアリーレン基よりなる群から選ばれた基を2種以上結合した基を表し、Ralは、直鎖、分岐若しくは環状アルキル基、又は、アリール基を表す。 In Formula F-4, R f4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, X f4 represents a single bond, —COO—, —OCO—, or an arylene group, and L f4 represents a single bond, an alkylene group, Or a group in which two or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkylene group, —COO—, —OCO—, and an arylene group are bonded, and R al represents a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group, or an aryl group Represents.
 式F-4におけるXf4は、入手性及び合成適性の観点から、単結合、又は、-COO-であることが好ましく、-COO-であることがより好ましい。
 式F-4におけるLf4は、入手性及び合成適性の観点から、単結合であることが好ましい。
 式F-4におけるRalは、転写性及びパターン形成性の観点から、直鎖、分岐又は環状アルキル基であることが好ましく、直鎖又は環状アルキル基であることがより好ましい。
 また、式F-4におけるRalの炭素数は、転写性及びパターン形成性の観点から、1~30であることが好ましく、8~20であることがより好ましく、10~20であることが特に好ましい。
 式F-4におけるRalとして具体的には、転写性及びパターン形成性の観点から、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル、シクロヘキシル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、n-オクチル基、n-デシル基、n-ドデシル基、ジシクロペンタニル基、及び、ベンジル基が好ましく挙げられ、シクロヘキシル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、n-オクチル基、n-デシル基、n-ドデシル基、及び、ジシクロペンタニル基がより好ましく挙げられ、n-ドデシル基、及び、ジシクロペンタニル基が特に好ましく挙げられる。
X f4 in formula F-4 is preferably a single bond or —COO—, more preferably —COO—, from the viewpoints of availability and synthesis suitability.
L f4 in Formula F-4 is preferably a single bond from the viewpoints of availability and synthesis suitability.
R al in formula F-4 is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group, more preferably a linear or cyclic alkyl group, from the viewpoint of transferability and pattern formation.
In addition, the carbon number of R al in Formula F-4 is preferably 1 to 30, more preferably 8 to 20, and more preferably 10 to 20 from the viewpoint of transferability and pattern formability. Particularly preferred.
Specific examples of R al in Formula F-4 include methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl, cyclohexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, n from the viewpoint of transferability and pattern formation. -Octyl group, n-decyl group, n-dodecyl group, dicyclopentanyl group and benzyl group are preferred, and cyclohexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, n-octyl group, n-decyl group, n-dodecyl group More preferred are a group and a dicyclopentanyl group, and particularly preferred are an n-dodecyl group and a dicyclopentanyl group.
 上記重合体Fは、その他の構成単位を1種のみ含んでもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。
 上記重合体Fが上記式F-4で表される構成単位を含む場合には、転写性及びパターン形成性の観点から、上記式F-4で表される構成単位を、重合体Fの全質量に対し、1質量%~70質量%含むことが好ましく、10質量%~60質量%含むことがより好ましく、20質量%~50質量%含むことが更に好ましく、25質量%~50質量%含むことが特に好ましい。
The said polymer F may contain only 1 type of other structural units, and may contain 2 or more types.
In the case where the polymer F contains the structural unit represented by the formula F-4, the structural unit represented by the formula F-4 is all of the polymer F from the viewpoint of transferability and pattern formation. 1% to 70% by mass, preferably 10% to 60% by mass, more preferably 20% to 50% by mass, and more preferably 25% to 50% by mass with respect to the mass. It is particularly preferred.
 上記重合体Fは、フッ素原子を有する構成単位を含んでいればよいが、転写性、パターン形成性、並びに、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制及び面状の観点から、フッ素原子を有する構成単位、及び、親水性基を有する構成単位を含むことが好ましく、フッ素原子を有する構成単位、親水性基を有する構成単位、及び、酸基又は塩基性基を有する構成単位を含むことがより好ましい。
 また、上記重合体Fが含む形態としては、転写性、パターン形成性、並びに、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制及び面状の観点から、上記式F-1で表される構成単位、及び、上記F-3で表される構成単位を含む形態、及び、上記式F-1で表される構成単位、上記F-3で表される構成単位、及び、上記式F-2又は式F-4で表される構成単位を含む形態が挙げられる。
 更に、上記重合体Fは、転写性、パターン形成性、並びに、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制及び面状の観点から、下記式F-5で表される重合体であることが好ましい。
The polymer F only needs to contain a structural unit having a fluorine atom. However, from the viewpoint of transferability, pattern formation, and dimple generation suppression and planarity in the resulting pattern, the structural unit having a fluorine atom. It is preferable to include a structural unit having a hydrophilic group, and it is more preferable to include a structural unit having a fluorine atom, a structural unit having a hydrophilic group, and a structural unit having an acid group or a basic group.
In addition, as the form contained in the polymer F, from the viewpoint of transferability, pattern formation, and dimple generation suppression and planarity in the resulting pattern, the structural unit represented by the formula F-1, and A form including the structural unit represented by F-3, the structural unit represented by Formula F-1, the structural unit represented by F-3, and Formula F-2 or Formula F- The form containing the structural unit represented by 4 is mentioned.
Further, the polymer F is preferably a polymer represented by the following formula F-5 from the viewpoints of transferability, pattern formation, and suppression of dimple generation in the pattern to be obtained and a planar shape.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 式F-5中、Rf1~Rf4はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xf1~Xf4はそれぞれ独立に、単結合、-COO-、-OCO-、又は、アリーレン基を表し、Lf1~Lf4はそれぞれ独立に、単結合、アルキレン基、又は、アルキレン基、-COO-、-OCO-及びアリーレン基よりなる群から選ばれた基を2種以上結合した基を表し、Rfは、パーフルオロアルキル基を表し、Rは、酸基又は塩基性基を表し、Raqは、親水性基を表し、Ralは、直鎖、分岐若しくは環状アルキル基、又は、アリール基を表し、r1~r4は各構成単位の質量比を表し、r1+r2+r3+r4の合計は100であり、r1は、30~99を表し、r2~r4はそれぞれ独立に、0~70を表し、r2~r4のうち少なくとも1つは、1以上である。 In Formula F-5, R f1 to R f4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X f1 to X f4 each independently represents a single bond, —COO—, —OCO—, or an arylene group. L f1 to L f4 each independently represents a single bond, an alkylene group, or a group in which two or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkylene group, —COO—, —OCO—, and an arylene group are bonded. , Rf represents a perfluoroalkyl group, R p represents an acid group or a basic group, R aq represents a hydrophilic group, R al represents a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group, or aryl R1 to r4 represent the mass ratio of each structural unit, the sum of r1 + r2 + r3 + r4 is 100, r1 represents 30 to 99, r2 to r4 each independently represents 0 to 70, r2 to r4 out of r4 One even without is greater than or equal to 1.
 上記式F-5におけるRf1~Rf4、Xf1~Xf4、Lf1~Lf4、Rf、R、Raq、及び、Ralは、上記式F-1~式F-4におけるRf1~Rf4、Xf1~Xf4、Lf1~Lf4、Rf、R、Raq、及び、Ralとそれぞれ同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
 r1は、面状の観点から、30~95であることが好ましく、35~70であることがより好ましい。
 r2は、パターン形成性、並びに、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制の観点から、0~50であることが好ましく、0~40であることがより好ましく、0~30であることが更に好ましい。また、重合体Fが、酸基又は塩基性基を有する構成単位を含む場合、r2は、パターン形成性、並びに、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制及び面状の観点から、1~50であることが好ましく、5~40であることがより好ましく、10~30であることが更に好ましい。
 r3は、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制の観点から、0~70であることが好ましく、0~60であることがより好ましい。また、重合体Fが、親水性基を有する構成単位を含む場合、r3は、転写性、パターン形成性、並びに、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制及び面状の観点から、5~70であることが好ましく、10~65であることがより好ましく、20~60であることが更に好ましい。
 r4は、転写性及びパターン形成性の観点から、0~60であることが好ましく、0~50であることがより好ましい。また、重合体Fが、上記式F-4で表される構成単位を含む場合、r4は、パターン形成性、並びに、得られるパターンにおけるディンプルの発生抑制及び面状の観点から、1~70であることが好ましく、10~60であることがより好ましく、20~50であることが更に好ましく、25~50であることが特に好ましい。
R f1 to R f4 , X f1 to X f4 , L f1 to L f4 , Rf, R p , R aq , and R al in the above formula F-5 are the same as R in the above formulas F-1 to F-4. f1 to R f4 , X f1 to X f4 , L f1 to L f4 , Rf, R p , R aq , and R al are synonymous with each other, and preferred embodiments are also the same.
r1 is preferably from 30 to 95, more preferably from 35 to 70, from the viewpoint of planarity.
r2 is preferably from 0 to 50, more preferably from 0 to 40, and even more preferably from 0 to 30 from the viewpoints of pattern formability and suppression of dimple generation in the resulting pattern. In the case where the polymer F includes a structural unit having an acid group or a basic group, r2 is 1 to 50 from the viewpoints of pattern formation, suppression of dimple generation in the resulting pattern, and planar shape. It is preferably 5 to 40, more preferably 10 to 30.
r3 is preferably 0 to 70, more preferably 0 to 60, from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of dimples in the resulting pattern. In the case where the polymer F includes a structural unit having a hydrophilic group, r3 is 5 to 70 from the viewpoints of transferability, pattern formation, and dimple generation suppression and planarity in the resulting pattern. It is preferably 10 to 65, more preferably 20 to 60.
r4 is preferably from 0 to 60, more preferably from 0 to 50, from the viewpoints of transferability and pattern formability. In the case where the polymer F contains the structural unit represented by the formula F-4, r4 is 1 to 70 from the viewpoints of pattern formability, suppression of dimple generation in the obtained pattern, and planarity. It is preferably 10 to 60, more preferably 20 to 50, and particularly preferably 25 to 50.
 また、r2が0である場合は、面状の観点から、r1が30~95であり、r3が5~70であり、r4が0~65であることが好ましい。
 更に、r2が1~70である場合は、面状の観点から、r1が30~99であり、r3が0~69であり、r4が0~69であることが好ましい。
When r2 is 0, it is preferable that r1 is 30 to 95, r3 is 5 to 70, and r4 is 0 to 65 from the viewpoint of planarity.
Further, when r2 is 1 to 70, it is preferable that r1 is 30 to 99, r3 is 0 to 69, and r4 is 0 to 69 from the viewpoint of planarity.
〔重合体Fの製造方法〕
 重合体Fの製造方法(合成法)は特に限定されないが、一例を挙げると、フッ素原子を有する構成単位を形成するための重合性単量体、更に必要に応じて、酸基又は塩基性基を有する構成単位を形成するための重合性単量体、及び、親水性基を有する構成単位を形成するための重合性単量体等を含む有機溶剤中、重合開始剤を用いて重合することにより合成することができる。また、いわゆる高分子反応により他の重合体から合成することもできる。
[Production Method of Polymer F]
The production method (synthesis method) of the polymer F is not particularly limited. For example, a polymerizable monomer for forming a structural unit having a fluorine atom, and, if necessary, an acid group or a basic group. Polymerization using a polymerization initiator in an organic solvent containing a polymerizable monomer for forming a structural unit having a polymerizable monomer and a polymerizable monomer for forming a structural unit having a hydrophilic group Can be synthesized. It can also be synthesized from other polymers by so-called polymer reaction.
 その他、特許第4502784号公報の段落0017、特開2009-237362号公報の段落0060~段落0071に記載の界面活性剤も用いることができる。 In addition, surfactants described in paragraph 0017 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 and paragraphs 0060 to 0071 of JP-A-2009-237362 can also be used.
 界面活性剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 界面活性剤の添加量は、上記感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、10質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.001質量%~10質量%であることがより好ましく、0.01質量%~3質量%であることが更に好ましい。
Surfactant may be used individually by 1 type and may use 2 or more types together.
The addition amount of the surfactant is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass, and 0.01% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. More preferably, the content is from 3% to 3% by mass.
-重合禁止剤-
 上記感光性樹脂層は、重合禁止剤を少なくとも1種含有してもよい。
 重合禁止剤としては、例えば、特許第4502784号公報の段落0018に記載された熱重合防止剤を用いることができる。
 中でも、フェノチアジン、フェノキサジン又は4-メトキシフェノールを好適に用いることができる。
-Polymerization inhibitor-
The photosensitive resin layer may contain at least one polymerization inhibitor.
As the polymerization inhibitor, for example, a thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0018 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 can be used.
Of these, phenothiazine, phenoxazine or 4-methoxyphenol can be preferably used.
 上記感光性樹脂層が重合禁止剤を含有する場合、重合禁止剤の含有量は、上記感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.01質量%~3質量%が好ましく、0.01質量%~1質量%がより好ましく、0.01質量%~0.8質量%が更に好ましい。 When the photosensitive resin layer contains a polymerization inhibitor, the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01% by mass to 3% by mass, and 0.01% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. % To 1% by mass is more preferable, and 0.01% to 0.8% by mass is even more preferable.
-溶剤-
 上記感光性樹脂層は、溶剤を含んでいてもよい。
 また、上記感光性樹脂層を形成する感光性樹脂組成物は、上記感光性樹脂層を容易に形成するため、一旦溶剤を含有させて感光性樹脂組成物の粘度を調節し、溶剤を含む感光性樹脂組成物を塗布及び乾燥して、上記感光性樹脂層を好適に形成することができる。
 本開示に使用される溶剤としては、公知の溶剤を用いることができる。溶剤としては、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、エチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、プロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、ジエチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、ジエチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、ジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、ジプロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、ジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、エステル類、ケトン類、アミド類、及び、ラクトン類等が例示できる。また、溶剤の具体例としては特開2011-221494号公報の段落0174~段落0178に記載の溶剤も挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
-solvent-
The photosensitive resin layer may contain a solvent.
In addition, the photosensitive resin composition for forming the photosensitive resin layer is a photosensitive resin composition containing a solvent by adjusting the viscosity of the photosensitive resin composition once by adding a solvent in order to easily form the photosensitive resin layer. The photosensitive resin layer can be suitably formed by applying and drying the photosensitive resin composition.
As the solvent used in the present disclosure, a known solvent can be used. Solvents include ethylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, ethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, propylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, propylene glycol dialkyl ethers, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers And diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol dialkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, esters, ketones, amides, and lactones. Specific examples of the solvent include the solvents described in paragraphs 0174 to 0178 of JP2011-212494A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 また、既述の溶剤に、更に必要に応じて、ベンジルエチルエーテル、ジヘキシルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノフェニルエーテルアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、イソホロン、カプロン酸、カプリル酸、1-オクタノール、1-ノナール、ベンジルアルコール、アニソール、酢酸ベンジル、安息香酸エチル、シュウ酸ジエチル、マレイン酸ジエチル、炭酸エチレン、又は、炭酸プロピレン等の溶剤を添加することもできる。
 溶剤は、1種のみ用いてもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
 本開示に用いることができる溶剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種を併用することがより好ましい。溶剤を2種以上使用する場合には、例えば、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類とジアルキルエーテル類との併用、ジアセテート類とジエチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類との併用、又は、エステル類とブチレングリコールアルキルエーテルアセテート類との併用が好ましい。
In addition, benzyl ethyl ether, dihexyl ether, ethylene glycol monophenyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, isophorone, caproic acid, caprylic acid, 1-octanol, -Solvents such as nonal, benzyl alcohol, anisole, benzyl acetate, ethyl benzoate, diethyl oxalate, diethyl maleate, ethylene carbonate or propylene carbonate can also be added.
Only 1 type may be used for a solvent and 2 or more types may be used for it.
The solvent which can be used for this indication may be used individually by 1 type, and it is more preferable to use 2 types together. When two or more solvents are used, for example, combined use of propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates and dialkyl ethers, combined use of diacetates and diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, or esters and butylene glycol alkyl ether acetates Use in combination with the other is preferred.
 また、溶剤としては、沸点130℃以上160℃未満の溶剤、沸点160℃以上の溶剤、又は、これらの混合物であることが好ましい。
 沸点130℃以上160℃未満の溶剤としては、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(沸点146℃)、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート(沸点158℃)、プロピレングリコールメチル-n-ブチルエーテル(沸点155℃)、及び、プロピレングリコールメチル-n-プロピルエーテル(沸点131℃)が例示できる。
 沸点160℃以上の溶剤としては、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル(沸点170℃)、ジエチレングリコールメチルエチルエーテル(沸点176℃)、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルプロピオネート(沸点160℃)、ジプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテート(沸点213℃)、3-メトキシブチルエーテルアセテート(沸点171℃)、ジエチレングリコールジエチエルエーテル(沸点189℃)、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル(沸点162℃)、プロピレングリコールジアセテート(沸点190℃)、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート(沸点220℃)、ジプロピレングリコールジメチルエーテル(沸点175℃)、及び、1,3-ブチレングリコールジアセテート(沸点232℃)が例示できる。
Further, the solvent is preferably a solvent having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C., a solvent having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or higher, or a mixture thereof.
Solvents having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C. include propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (boiling point 146 ° C.), propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (boiling point 158 ° C.), propylene glycol methyl-n-butyl ether (boiling point 155 ° C.), and An example is propylene glycol methyl-n-propyl ether (boiling point 131 ° C.).
Solvents having a boiling point of 160 ° C or higher include ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (boiling point 170 ° C), diethylene glycol methyl ethyl ether (boiling point 176 ° C), propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate (boiling point 160 ° C), dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate. (Bp 213 ° C), 3-methoxybutyl ether acetate (bp 171 ° C), diethylene glycol diethyl ether (bp 189 ° C), diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (bp 162 ° C), propylene glycol diacetate (bp 190 ° C), diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (Boiling point 220 ° C), dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether (boiling point 175 ° C), and 1,3-butylene glycol diacetate (boiling point 232 ° C) There can be exemplified.
 感光性樹脂組成物を塗布する際における溶剤の含有量は、感光性樹脂組成物中の全固形分100質量部あたり、50質量部~1,900質量部であることが好ましく、100質量部~900質量部であることがより好ましい。
 また、上記感光性樹脂層における溶剤の含有量は、上記感光性樹脂層の全質量に対し、2質量%以下であることが好ましく、1質量%以下であることがより好ましく、0.5質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
The content of the solvent in applying the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 50 parts by weight to 1,900 parts by weight, preferably 100 parts by weight to 100 parts by weight of the total solid content in the photosensitive resin composition. More preferably, it is 900 parts by mass.
The content of the solvent in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 2% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or less, and more preferably 0.5% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. % Or less is more preferable.
-可塑剤-
 上記感光性樹脂層は、可塑性を改良する目的で、可塑剤を含有してもよい。
 上記可塑剤は、上記a1又はa2で示される重合体よりも重量平均分子量が小さいことが好ましい。
 可塑剤の重量平均分子量は、可塑性付与の観点から500以上10,000未満が好ましく、700以上5,000未満がより好ましく、800以上4,000未満が更に好ましい。
 可塑剤は、特定重合体と相溶して可塑性を発現する化合物であれば特に限定されないが、可塑性付与の観点から、可塑剤は、分子中にアルキレンオキシ基を有することが好ましい。可塑剤に含まれるアルキレンオキシ基は下記構造を有することが好ましい。
-Plasticizer-
The photosensitive resin layer may contain a plasticizer for the purpose of improving plasticity.
The plasticizer preferably has a weight average molecular weight smaller than that of the polymer represented by a1 or a2.
The weight average molecular weight of the plasticizer is preferably 500 or more and less than 10,000, more preferably 700 or more and less than 5,000, and still more preferably 800 or more and less than 4,000 from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity.
The plasticizer is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that is compatible with the specific polymer and exhibits plasticity, but from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity, the plasticizer preferably has an alkyleneoxy group in the molecule. The alkyleneoxy group contained in the plasticizer preferably has the following structure.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
 上記式中、Rは炭素数2~8のアルキル基であり、nは1~50の整数を表し、*は他の原子との結合部位を表す。 In the above formula, R represents an alkyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, n represents an integer of 1 to 50, and * represents a bonding site with another atom.
 なお、例えば、上記構造のアルキレンオキシ基を有する化合物(「化合物X」とする。)であっても、化合物X、特定重合体及び光酸発生剤を混合して得た化学増幅ポジ型感光性樹脂組成物が、化合物Xを含まずに形成した化学増幅ポジ型感光性樹脂組成物に比べて可塑性が向上しない場合は、本開示における可塑剤には該当しない。例えば、任意に添加される界面活性剤は、一般に感光性樹脂組成物に可塑性をもたらす量で使用されることはないため、本明細書における可塑剤には該当しない。 For example, even a compound having an alkyleneoxy group having the above structure (referred to as “compound X”) is a chemically amplified positive photosensitive material obtained by mixing compound X, a specific polymer, and a photoacid generator. When plasticity does not improve compared with the chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin composition formed without containing compound X, the resin composition does not fall under the plasticizer in the present disclosure. For example, the optionally added surfactant is generally not used in an amount that brings plasticity to the photosensitive resin composition, and thus does not correspond to the plasticizer in the present specification.
 上記可塑剤としては、例えば、下記構造を有する化合物が挙げられるが、これらに限定されるものではない。 Examples of the plasticizer include, but are not limited to, compounds having the following structure.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 可塑剤の含有量は、密着性の観点から、上記感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、1質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、2質量%~20質量%であることがより好ましい。
 上記感光性樹脂層は、可塑剤を1種のみを含んでいてもよく、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
The content of the plasticizer is preferably 1% by mass to 50% by mass and more preferably 2% by mass to 20% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of adhesion. preferable.
The said photosensitive resin layer may contain only 1 type of plasticizers, and may contain 2 or more types.
-増感剤-
 上記感光性樹脂層は、増感剤を更に含むことができる。
 増感剤は、活性光線を吸収して電子励起状態となる。電子励起状態となった増感剤は、光酸発生剤と接触して、電子移動、エネルギー移動、及び、発熱などの作用が生じる。これにより光酸発生剤は化学変化を起こして分解し、酸を生成する。
 増感剤を含有させることで、露光感度を向上させることができる。
-Sensitizer-
The photosensitive resin layer can further contain a sensitizer.
The sensitizer absorbs actinic rays and enters an electronically excited state. The sensitizer in an electronically excited state comes into contact with the photoacid generator, and effects such as electron transfer, energy transfer, and heat generation occur. Thereby, a photo-acid generator raise | generates a chemical change and decomposes | disassembles and produces | generates an acid.
Exposure sensitivity can be improved by containing a sensitizer.
 増感剤としては、アントラセン誘導体、アクリドン誘導体、チオキサントン誘導体、クマリン誘導体、ベーススチリル誘導体、及び、ジスチリルベンゼン誘導体よりなる群からえらばれた化合物が好ましく、アントラセン誘導体がより好ましい。
 アントラセン誘導体としては、アントラセン、9,10-ジブトキシアントラセン、9,10-ジクロロアントラセン、2-エチル-9,10-ジメトキシアントラセン、9-ヒドロキシメチルアントラセン、9-ブロモアントラセン、9-クロロアントラセン、9,10-ジブロモアントラセン、2-エチルアントラセン、又は、9,10-ジメトキシアントラセンが好ましい。
As the sensitizer, a compound selected from the group consisting of an anthracene derivative, an acridone derivative, a thioxanthone derivative, a coumarin derivative, a base styryl derivative, and a distyrylbenzene derivative is preferable, and an anthracene derivative is more preferable.
Anthracene derivatives include anthracene, 9,10-dibutoxyanthracene, 9,10-dichloroanthracene, 2-ethyl-9,10-dimethoxyanthracene, 9-hydroxymethylanthracene, 9-bromoanthracene, 9-chloroanthracene, 9 1,10-dibromoanthracene, 2-ethylanthracene, or 9,10-dimethoxyanthracene is preferred.
 上記増感剤としては、国際公開第2015/093271号の段落0139~段落0141に記載の化合物を挙げることができる。 Examples of the sensitizer include compounds described in paragraphs 0139 to 0141 of International Publication No. 2015/092731.
 増感剤の含有量は、上記感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0質量%~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.1質量%~10質量%であることがより好ましい。 The content of the sensitizer is preferably 0% by mass to 10% by mass and more preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer.
-ヘテロ環状化合物-
 本開示における感光性樹脂層は、ヘテロ環状化合物を含むことができる。
 本開示におけるヘテロ環状化合物には、特に制限はない。例えば、以下に述べる分子内にエポキシ基又はオキセタニル基を有する化合物、アルコキシメチル基含有ヘテロ環状化合物、その他、各種環状エーテル、環状エステル(ラクトン)などの含酸素モノマー、更には珪素、硫黄、リンなどのd電子をもつヘテロ環モノマー等を添加することができる。
-Heterocyclic compounds-
The photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure can include a heterocyclic compound.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular in the heterocyclic compound in this indication. For example, the following compounds having an epoxy group or oxetanyl group in the molecule, alkoxymethyl group-containing heterocyclic compounds, other cyclic ethers, oxygen-containing monomers such as cyclic esters (lactones), silicon, sulfur, phosphorus, etc. Heterocyclic monomers having the following d electrons can be added.
 感光性樹脂層中におけるヘテロ環状化合物の添加量は、ヘテロ環状化合物を添加する場合には、上記感光性樹脂層の全質量に対し、0.01質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、0.1質量%~10質量%であることがより好ましく、1質量%~5質量%であることが更に好ましい。上記範囲であると、密着性及びエッチング耐性の観点で好ましい。ヘテロ環状化合物は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を併用することもできる。 The addition amount of the heterocyclic compound in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.01% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer when the heterocyclic compound is added. The content is more preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, and further preferably 1% by mass to 5% by mass. It is preferable in the said range from a viewpoint of adhesiveness and etching tolerance. Only 1 type may be used for a heterocyclic compound and it can also use 2 or more types together.
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物の具体例としては、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂等を挙げることができる。 Specific examples of the compound having an epoxy group in the molecule include bisphenol A type epoxy resin, bisphenol F type epoxy resin, phenol novolac type epoxy resin, cresol novolac type epoxy resin, aliphatic epoxy resin and the like.
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物は市販品として入手できる。例えば、JER828、JER1007、JER157S70(三菱化学(株)製)、JER157S65((株)三菱ケミカルホールディングス製)など、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0189に記載の市販品などが挙げられる。
 その他の市販品として、ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S、同EP-4003S、同EP-4010S、同EP-4011S(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、NC-2000、NC-3000、NC-7300、XD-1000、EPPN-501、EPPN-502(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、デナコールEX-611、EX-612、EX-614、EX-614B、EX-622、EX-512、EX-521、EX-411、EX-421、EX-313、EX-314、EX-321、EX-211、EX-212、EX-810、EX-811、EX-850、EX-851、EX-821、EX-830、EX-832、EX-841、EX-911、EX-941、EX-920、EX-931、EX-212L、EX-214L、EX-216L、EX-321L、EX-850L、DLC-201、DLC-203、DLC-204、DLC-205、DLC-206、DLC-301、DLC-402、EX-111,EX-121、EX-141、EX-145、EX-146、EX-147、EX-171、EX-192(以上ナガセケムテック製)、YH-300、YH-301、YH-302、YH-315、YH-324、YH-325(以上、新日鐵住金化学(株)製)セロキサイド2021P、2081、2000、3000、EHPE3150、エポリードGT400、セルビナースB0134、B0177((株)ダイセル製)などが挙げられる。
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物は1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。
A compound having an epoxy group in the molecule can be obtained as a commercial product. For example, JER828, JER1007, JER157S70 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Co., Ltd.), JER157S65 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Holdings Co., Ltd.), and the like, commercially available products described in paragraph 0189 of JP2011-221494A, and the like can be mentioned.
Other commercially available products include ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S, EP-4003S, EP-4010S, EP-4011S (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), NC-2000, NC-3000, NC-7300, XD- 1000, EPPN-501, EPPN-502 (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), Denacol EX-611, EX-612, EX-614, EX-614B, EX-622, EX-512, EX-521, EX- 411, EX-421, EX-313, EX-314, EX-321, EX-211, EX-212, EX-810, EX-811, EX-850, EX-851, EX-821, EX-830, EX-832, EX-841, EX-911, EX-941, EX-920, EX-931, EX-212 , EX-214L, EX-216L, EX-321L, EX-850L, DLC-201, DLC-203, DLC-204, DLC-205, DLC-206, DLC-301, DLC-402, EX-111, EX -121, EX-141, EX-145, EX-146, EX-147, EX-171, EX-192 (manufactured by Nagase Chemtech), YH-300, YH-301, YH-302, YH-315, YH-324, YH-325 (manufactured by Nippon Steel & Sumikin Chemical Co., Ltd.) Celoxide 2021P, 2081, 2000, 3000, EHPE3150, Epolide GT400, Cellbiners B0134, B0177 (manufactured by Daicel Corporation), and the like.
The compound which has an epoxy group in a molecule | numerator may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物の中でも、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂及び脂肪族エポキシ樹脂がより好ましく挙げられ、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂が特に好ましく挙げられる。 Among the compounds having an epoxy group in the molecule, bisphenol A type epoxy resin, bisphenol F type epoxy resin, phenol novolac type epoxy resin and aliphatic epoxy resin are more preferable, and aliphatic epoxy resin is particularly preferable.
 分子内にオキセタニル基を有する化合物の具体例としては、アロンオキセタンOXT-201、OXT-211、OXT-212、OXT-213、OXT-121、OXT-221、OX-SQ、PNOX(以上、東亞合成(株)製)を用いることができる。 Specific examples of compounds having an oxetanyl group in the molecule include Aron Oxetane OXT-201, OXT-211, OXT-212, OXT-213, OXT-121, OXT-221, OX-SQ, PNOX (above, Toagosei Co., Ltd.) Can be used.
 また、オキセタニル基を含む化合物は、単独で又はエポキシ基を含む化合物と混合して使用することが好ましい。 In addition, the compound containing an oxetanyl group is preferably used alone or mixed with a compound containing an epoxy group.
 本開示における感光性樹脂層においては、ヘテロ環状化合物がエポキシ基を有する化合物であることが、エッチング耐性及び線幅安定性の観点から好ましい。 In the photosensitive resin layer according to the present disclosure, the heterocyclic compound is preferably a compound having an epoxy group from the viewpoint of etching resistance and line width stability.
-アルコキシシラン化合物-
 上記感光性樹脂層は、アルコキシシラン化合物を含有してもよい。アルコキシシラン化合物としては、トリアルコキシシラン化合物が好ましく挙げられる。
 アルコキシシラン化合物としては、例えば、γ-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、γ-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリアコキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシプロピルアルキルジアルコキシシラン、γ-メタクリロキシプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、γ-メタクリロキシプロピルアルキルジアルコキシシラン、γ-クロロプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、γ-メルカプトプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、β-(3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシル)エチルトリアルコキシシラン、ビニルトリアルコキシシランが挙げられる。これらのうち、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリアルコキシシランやγ-メタクリロキシプロピルトリアルコキシシランがより好ましく、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリアルコキシシランが更に好ましく、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシランが特に好ましい。これらは1種単独又は2種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。
-Alkoxysilane compounds-
The photosensitive resin layer may contain an alkoxysilane compound. Preferred examples of the alkoxysilane compound include trialkoxysilane compounds.
Examples of the alkoxysilane compound include γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, γ-aminopropyltriethoxysilane, γ-glycidoxypropyltriacoxysilane, γ-glycidoxypropylalkyldialkoxysilane, and γ-methacryloxy. Propyltrialkoxysilane, γ-methacryloxypropylalkyldialkoxysilane, γ-chloropropyltrialkoxysilane, γ-mercaptopropyltrialkoxysilane, β- (3,4-epoxycyclohexyl) ethyltrialkoxysilane, vinyltrialkoxysilane Is mentioned. Of these, γ-glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane and γ-methacryloxypropyltrialkoxysilane are more preferable, γ-glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane is more preferable, and 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane is particularly preferable. preferable. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
-その他の成分-
 本開示における感光性樹脂層には、金属酸化物粒子、酸化防止剤、分散剤、酸増殖剤、現像促進剤、導電性繊維、着色剤、熱ラジカル重合開始剤、熱酸発生剤、紫外線吸収剤、増粘剤、架橋剤、及び、有機又は無機の沈殿防止剤などの公知の添加剤を更に加えることができる。
 その他の成分の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0165~段落0184にそれぞれ記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
-Other ingredients-
The photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure includes metal oxide particles, antioxidants, dispersants, acid multipliers, development accelerators, conductive fibers, colorants, thermal radical polymerization initiators, thermal acid generators, and ultraviolet absorption. Known additives such as agents, thickeners, crosslinking agents, and organic or inorganic suspending agents can be further added.
Preferred embodiments of the other components are described in JP-A-2014-85643, paragraphs 0165 to 0184, respectively, and the contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
<<感光性樹脂層の平均膜厚>>
 上記感光性樹脂層の平均膜厚は、転写性(ラミネート性)の観点から、1.0μm以上が好ましく、2.0μm以上がより好ましく、5.0μm以上が更に好ましい。また、上記感光性樹脂層の平均膜厚は、製造適性の観点から、20μm以下が好ましく、15μm以下がより好ましい。
<< Average film thickness of photosensitive resin layer >>
The average film thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 1.0 μm or more, more preferably 2.0 μm or more, and still more preferably 5.0 μm or more, from the viewpoint of transferability (laminate). The average film thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 20 μm or less, more preferably 15 μm or less, from the viewpoint of production suitability.
<<感光性樹脂層の形成方法>>
 各成分、及び、溶剤を任意の割合でかつ任意の方法で混合し、撹拌溶解して感光性樹脂層を形成するための感光性樹脂組成物を調製することができる。例えば、各成分を、それぞれ予め溶剤に溶解させた溶液とした後、得られた溶液を所定の割合で混合して組成物を調製することもできる。以上の如くして調製した組成物は、孔径0.2μmのフィルター等を用いてろ過した後に、使用に供することもできる。
<< Method for Forming Photosensitive Resin Layer >>
A photosensitive resin composition for forming a photosensitive resin layer can be prepared by mixing each component and a solvent in an arbitrary ratio and by an arbitrary method, and dissolving by stirring. For example, it is possible to prepare a composition by mixing each component with a predetermined ratio after preparing each solution in advance in a solvent. The composition prepared as described above can be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 0.2 μm or the like.
 感光性樹脂組成物を中間層上に塗布し、乾燥させることで、仮支持体上に感光性樹脂層を有する本開示に係る感光性転写材料を得ることができる。
 塗布方法は特に限定されず、スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布、インクジェット塗布などの公知の方法で塗布することができる。
 なお、中間層上に後述のその他の層を形成した上に、感光性樹脂層を塗布することもできる。
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure having the photosensitive resin layer on the temporary support can be obtained by applying the photosensitive resin composition onto the intermediate layer and drying it.
The coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, and inkjet coating.
In addition, the photosensitive resin layer can also be applied after forming other layers described later on the intermediate layer.
<その他の層>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、上記仮支持体、中間層及び感光性樹脂層以外の層(以下、「その他の層」と称することがある)を有していてもよい。その他の層としては、コントラストエンハンスメント層、カバーフィルム、熱可塑性樹脂層等を挙げることができる。
<Other layers>
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a layer other than the temporary support, the intermediate layer, and the photosensitive resin layer (hereinafter, may be referred to as “other layer”). Examples of other layers include a contrast enhancement layer, a cover film, and a thermoplastic resin layer.
-熱可塑性樹脂層、カバーフィルム等-
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、転写性の観点から、上記仮支持体と上記中間層との間に、熱可塑性樹脂層を更に有することが好ましい。
 また、本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、上記感光性樹脂層を保護する目的でカバーフィルムを有していてもよい。
 熱可塑性樹脂層の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0189~段落0193、他の層の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0194~段落0196にそれぞれ記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
 中でも、転写性の観点から、熱可塑性樹脂層が、アクリル樹脂及びスチレン/アクリル共重合体よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の熱可塑性樹脂を含むことが好ましい。
-Thermoplastic resin layer, cover film, etc.-
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure preferably further includes a thermoplastic resin layer between the temporary support and the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of transferability.
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a cover film for the purpose of protecting the photosensitive resin layer.
Preferred embodiments of the thermoplastic resin layer are described in paragraphs 0189 to 0193 of JP 2014-85643 A, and preferred embodiments of the other layers are described in paragraphs 0194 to 0196 of JP 2014-85643 A, respectively. The contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
Especially, it is preferable that a thermoplastic resin layer contains the at least 1 sort (s) of thermoplastic resin chosen from the group which consists of an acrylic resin and a styrene / acryl copolymer from a transferable viewpoint.
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料が、熱可塑性樹脂層等のその他の層を有する場合、特開2006-259138号公報の段落0094~段落0098に記載の感光性転写材料の作製方法に準じて作製することができる。
 例えば、熱可塑性樹脂層を有する本開示に係る感光性転写材料を作製する場合には、仮支持体上に、熱可塑性の有機高分子と添加剤とを溶解した溶解液(熱可塑性樹脂層用塗布液)を塗布し、乾燥させて熱可塑性樹脂層を設けた後、得られた熱可塑性樹脂層上に熱可塑性樹脂層を溶解しない溶剤に樹脂及び添加剤を加えて調製した調製液(中間層組成物)を塗布し、乾燥させて中間層を積層する。形成した中間層上に、更に、中間層を溶解しない溶剤を用いて調製した感光性樹脂組成物を塗布し、乾燥させて感光性樹脂層を積層することによって、本開示に係る感光性転写材料を好適に作製することができる。
When the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has other layers such as a thermoplastic resin layer, the photosensitive transfer material is prepared according to the method for preparing a photosensitive transfer material described in paragraphs 0094 to 0098 of JP-A-2006-259138. can do.
For example, when preparing a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure having a thermoplastic resin layer, a solution (for thermoplastic resin layer) in which a thermoplastic organic polymer and an additive are dissolved on a temporary support. A coating solution prepared by adding a resin and an additive to a solvent that does not dissolve the thermoplastic resin layer on the obtained thermoplastic resin layer after applying the coating liquid) and drying to provide a thermoplastic resin layer (intermediate) The layer composition) is applied and dried to laminate the intermediate layer. A photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is obtained by further applying a photosensitive resin composition prepared using a solvent that does not dissolve the intermediate layer on the formed intermediate layer, and drying and laminating the photosensitive resin layer. Can be suitably produced.
-コントラストエンハンスメント層-
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、上記感光性樹脂層に加え、コントラストエンハンスメント層を有することができる。
 コントラストエンハンスメント層(Contrast Enhancement Layer;CEL)は、露光前には露光波長に対する吸収が大きいが、露光されるに伴って次第に吸収が小さくなる、すなわち、光の透過率が高くなる材料(光消色性色素成分と称する)を含有する層である。光消色性色素成分としては、ジアゾニウム塩、スチルバゾリウム塩、アリールニトロソ塩類等が知られている。被膜形成成分としては、フェノール系樹脂等が用いられる。
 その他、コントラストエンハンスメント層としては、特開平6-97065号公報の段落0004~段落0051、特開平6-332167号公報の段落0012~段落0055、フォトポリマーハンドブック,フォトポリマー懇話会編,工業調査会(1989)、フォトポリマー・テクノロジー,山岡、永松編,(株)日刊工業新聞社(1988)に記載の材料を用いることができる。
-Contrast enhancement layer-
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure can have a contrast enhancement layer in addition to the photosensitive resin layer.
A contrast enhancement layer (CEL) is a material (photo-decoloring) that has a large absorption with respect to an exposure wavelength before exposure, but gradually decreases with exposure, that is, has a higher light transmittance. It is a layer containing a coloring pigment component). Known photodecolorable dye components include diazonium salts, stilbazolium salts, arylnitroso salts, and the like. A phenolic resin or the like is used as the film forming component.
In addition, as contrast enhancement layers, paragraphs 0004 to 0051 of JP-A-6-97065, paragraphs 0012 to 0055 of JP-A-6-332167, photopolymer handbook, photopolymer social gathering, industrial research group ( 1989), photopolymer technology, Yamaoka, edited by Nagamatsu, Nikkan Kogyo Shimbun (1988) can be used.
(樹脂パターンの製造方法、及び、回路配線の製造方法)
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料を用いた樹脂パターンの製造方法であれば、特に制限はないが、本開示に係る感光性転写材料における上記感光性樹脂層側の最外層を基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、をこの順に含み、上記基板に貼り合わせる工程の後、かつ上記パターンを形成する工程の前に、上記仮支持体を剥離する工程を含むことが好ましい。
 また、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料を用いた回路配線の製造方法であれば、特に制限はないが、本開示に係る感光性転写材料における上記感光性樹脂層側の最外層を、導電層を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、上記パターンが配置されていない領域における導電層をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含み、上記基板に貼り合わせる工程の後、かつ上記パターンを形成する工程の前に、上記仮支持体を剥離する工程を含むことが好ましい。
 また、上記基板は、導電層を有することが好ましく、表面に導電層を有することがより好ましい。
(Resin pattern manufacturing method and circuit wiring manufacturing method)
The method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a method for producing a resin pattern using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, but the photosensitive resin in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. A step of bringing the outermost layer on the layer side into contact with the substrate, a step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive resin layer, and a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern in this order. It is preferable to include a step of peeling the temporary support after the step of bonding to the substrate and before the step of forming the pattern.
The circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a circuit wiring manufacturing method using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. A step of bringing the outermost layer on the side of the photosensitive resin layer into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer and bonding, a step of pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer, and developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern And a step of etching the conductive layer in a region where the pattern is not disposed, in this order, after the step of bonding to the substrate and before the step of forming the pattern, the temporary support It is preferable to include a step of peeling the body.
The substrate preferably has a conductive layer, and more preferably has a conductive layer on the surface.
 従来、感光性樹脂組成物は感光システムの違いから、活性光線を照射した部分が像として残るネガ型と、活性光線を照射していない部分を像として残すポジ型とに分けられる。ポジ型では活性光線を照射することにより、例えば活性光線を照射されて酸を発生する感光剤などを用いて露光部の溶解性を高めるため、パターン露光時点では露光部及び未露光部がいずれも硬化せず、得られたパターン形状が不良であった場合には全面露光などによって基板を再利用(リワーク)できる。そのため、いわゆるリワーク性に優れる観点からは、ポジ型が好ましい。また、残存した感光性樹脂層を再度露光して異なるパターンを作製する、という技術は感光性樹脂層でなければ実現できないため、本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法において、露光を2回以上行う態様が好ましく挙げられる。 Conventionally, photosensitive resin compositions are classified into a negative type in which a portion irradiated with actinic rays is left as an image and a positive type in which a portion not irradiated with actinic rays is left as an image due to differences in photosensitive systems. In the positive type, by irradiating actinic rays, for example, to improve the solubility of the exposed portion using a photosensitive agent that generates acid upon irradiation with actinic rays, both the exposed and unexposed portions are exposed at the time of pattern exposure. If the pattern shape obtained is not cured and the substrate is defective, the substrate can be reused (reworked) by full exposure or the like. Therefore, the positive type is preferable from the viewpoint of excellent so-called reworkability. Further, since the technique of reexposing the remaining photosensitive resin layer to produce a different pattern can be realized only by the photosensitive resin layer, the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit according to the present disclosure In the method for producing a wiring, an embodiment in which exposure is performed twice or more is preferable.
<貼り合わせ工程>
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料における上記感光性樹脂層側の最外層を基板、好ましくは導電層を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程(貼り合わせ工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 上記貼り合わせ工程においては、例えば、仮支持体、中間層及び感光性樹脂層(更に、カバーフィルムを有していてもよい。)を有する感光性転写材料である場合、転写する側の最外層は、感光性樹脂層であるが、感光性樹脂層上に更にその他の層が形成され、最外層がその他の層であってもよい。
 上記貼り合わせ工程では、表面に導電層を備える基板に上記感光性転写材料における上記感光性樹脂層側の最外層を接触させて貼り合わせることが好ましい。
 また、上記貼り合わせ工程においては、上記導電層と、上記感光性樹脂層側の最外層が接触するように圧着させることが好ましい。上記態様であると、露光及び現像後のパターン形成された感光性樹脂層を、導電層をエッチングする際のエッチングレジストとして好適に用いることができる。
 上記基板と上記感光性転写材料とを圧着する方法としては、特に制限はなく、公知の転写方法、及び、ラミネート方法を用いることができる。
 具体的には例えば、上記感光性転写材料の上記感光性樹脂層側を基板の上に重ね、ロール等による加圧、又は、加圧及び加熱することに行われることが好ましい。貼り合わせには、ラミネータ、真空ラミネータ、及び、より生産性を高めることができるオートカットラミネーター等の公知のラミネータを使用することができる。
 上記貼り合わせ工程における圧着圧力及び温度は、特に制限はなく、貼り合せる基板の表面の材質、例えば、導電層の材質、感光性樹脂層の材質、搬送速度、並びに、使用する圧着機等に応じ、適宜設定することができる。また、感光性転写材料の感光性樹脂層上にカバーフィルムを有する場合は、感光性樹脂層からカバーフィルムを除去した後、圧着すればよい。
 上記基材が樹脂フィルムである場合、ロールツーロールでの圧着を行ってもよい。
<Lamination process>
In the method for manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a substrate, preferably a conductive layer. It is preferable to include the process (bonding process) which contacts and bonds to a board | substrate.
In the bonding step, for example, in the case of a photosensitive transfer material having a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin layer (which may further have a cover film), the outermost layer on the transfer side Is a photosensitive resin layer, but another layer may be further formed on the photosensitive resin layer, and the outermost layer may be another layer.
In the bonding step, it is preferable that the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material is brought into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer on the surface for bonding.
Moreover, in the said bonding process, it is preferable to crimp | bond so that the said conductive layer and the outermost layer by the side of the said photosensitive resin layer may contact. In the above embodiment, the patterned photosensitive resin layer after exposure and development can be suitably used as an etching resist when the conductive layer is etched.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a method of crimping | bonding the said board | substrate and the said photosensitive transfer material, A well-known transfer method and a lamination method can be used.
Specifically, for example, it is preferable that the photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material is overlaid on a substrate, and pressure is applied with a roll or the like, or pressure and heating are performed. For laminating, a known laminator such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, or an auto-cut laminator that can further increase productivity can be used.
There are no particular limitations on the pressure and temperature of the bonding in the bonding step, and it depends on the surface material of the substrates to be bonded, for example, the material of the conductive layer, the material of the photosensitive resin layer, the conveyance speed, and the pressure bonding machine used. Can be set as appropriate. Moreover, what is necessary is just to crimp | bond, after removing a cover film from the photosensitive resin layer, when having a cover film on the photosensitive resin layer of a photosensitive transfer material.
When the base material is a resin film, a roll-to-roll pressure bonding may be performed.
 本開示に用いられる基板は、基材の表面に導電層を有する基板であることが好ましい。導電層をパターンニングすることで配線を形成する。本開示においては、ポリエチレンテレフタレートなどのフィルム基材に金属酸化物や金属などの複数の導電層が設けられたものであることが好ましい。
 また、上記導電層は、本開示における効果をより発揮する観点から、銅を含む層であることが好ましい。
The substrate used in the present disclosure is preferably a substrate having a conductive layer on the surface of a base material. A wiring is formed by patterning the conductive layer. In the present disclosure, a film substrate such as polyethylene terephthalate is preferably provided with a plurality of conductive layers such as metal oxide and metal.
Moreover, it is preferable that the said conductive layer is a layer containing copper from a viewpoint which exhibits the effect in this indication more.
 また、上記基板は、支持体上に複数の導電層が積層された基板であることが好ましい。
 支持体上に複数の導電層が積層された基板は、支持体がガラス基材又はフィルム基材であることが好ましく、フィルム基材であることがより好ましい。本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、タッチパネル用回路配線である場合、支持体がシート状樹脂組成物であることが特に好ましい。
 また、支持体は透明であることが好ましい。
 支持体の屈折率は、1.50~1.52であることが好ましい。
 支持体は、ガラス基材等の透光性基材で構成されていてもよく、コーニング社のゴリラガラスに代表される強化ガラスなどを用いることができる。また、上述の透明基材としては、特開2010-86684号公報、特開2010-152809号公報及び特開2010-257492号公報に用いられている材料を好ましく用いることができる。
 基材としてフィルム基材を用いる場合は、光学的に歪みがない基材、及び、透明度が高い基材を用いることがより好ましく、具体的な素材には、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(polyethylene terephthalate;PET)、ポリエチレンナフタレート、ポリカーボネート、トリアセチルセルロース、シクロオレフィンポリマーをあげることができる。
The substrate is preferably a substrate in which a plurality of conductive layers are stacked on a support.
As for the board | substrate with which the some electroconductive layer was laminated | stacked on the support body, it is preferable that a support body is a glass base material or a film base material, and it is more preferable that it is a film base material. When the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is a circuit wiring for a touch panel, the support is particularly preferably a sheet-shaped resin composition.
The support is preferably transparent.
The refractive index of the support is preferably 1.50 to 1.52.
The support may be composed of a light-transmitting substrate such as a glass substrate, and tempered glass represented by Corning's gorilla glass can be used. In addition, as the above-described transparent substrate, materials used in JP 2010-86684 A, JP 2010-152809 A, and JP 2010-257492 A can be preferably used.
When a film substrate is used as the substrate, it is more preferable to use a substrate that is not optically distorted and a substrate having high transparency. Specific examples of the material include polyethylene terephthalate (PET), Examples thereof include polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, triacetyl cellulose, and cycloolefin polymer.
 上記導電層としては、一般的な配線又はタッチパネル配線に用いられる任意の導電層を挙げることができる。
 導電層の材料としては、金属及び金属酸化物などを挙げることができる。
 金属酸化物としては、ITO(Indium Tin Oxide)、IZO(Indium Zinc Oxide)、SiO等を挙げることができる。金属としては、Al、Zn、Cu、Fe、Ni、Cr、Mo等を挙げることができる。
Examples of the conductive layer include any conductive layer used for general wiring or touch panel wiring.
Examples of the material for the conductive layer include metals and metal oxides.
Examples of the metal oxide include ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide), and SiO 2 . Examples of the metal include Al, Zn, Cu, Fe, Ni, Cr, and Mo.
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記複数の導電層のうち少なくとも一つの導電層が金属酸化物を含むことが好ましい。
 導電層としては、静電容量型タッチパネルに用いられる視認部のセンサーに相当する電極パターン又は周辺取り出し部の配線であることが好ましい。
In the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, it is preferable that at least one of the plurality of conductive layers includes a metal oxide.
The conductive layer is preferably an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor for a visual recognition part used in a capacitive touch panel or a wiring for a peripheral extraction part.
<露光工程>
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記貼り合わせる工程後、上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程(露光工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 上記露光工程では、上記感光性樹脂層に、所定のパターンを有するマスクを介して、活性光線を照射することが好ましい。この工程では、光酸発生剤が分解し酸が発生する。発生した酸の触媒作用により、塗膜成分中に含まれる酸分解性基が加水分解されて、酸基、例えば、カルボキシ基又はフェノール性水酸基が生成する。
 本開示において、パターンの詳細な配置及び具体的サイズは、特に限定されない。本開示において製造される回路基板を有する入力装置を備えた表示装置(例えば、タッチパネル)の表示品質を高め、また、取り出し配線の占める面積をできるだけ小さくしたいことから、パターンの少なくとも一部(特にタッチパネルの電極パターン及び取り出し配線の部分)は、100μm以下の細線であることが好ましく、70μm以下の細線であることがより好ましい。
 また、上記露光工程における露光は、マスクを介した露光でもよいし、レーザー等を用いたデジタル露光でもよいが、露光用マスクを介した露光であることが好ましい。
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記貼り合わせ工程と上記露光工程との間に、上記感光性転写材料と露光用マスクとを接触させる工程を含むことが好ましい。上記態様であると、得られるパターンの解像度により優れる。
<Exposure process>
It is preferable that the manufacturing method of the resin pattern which concerns on this indication, or the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication includes the process (exposure process) of carrying out pattern exposure of the said photosensitive resin layer after the said bonding process.
In the exposure step, it is preferable that the photosensitive resin layer is irradiated with actinic rays through a mask having a predetermined pattern. In this step, the photoacid generator is decomposed to generate an acid. By the catalytic action of the generated acid, the acid-decomposable group contained in the coating film component is hydrolyzed to produce an acid group, for example, a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group.
In the present disclosure, the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern are not particularly limited. Since it is desired to improve the display quality of a display device (for example, a touch panel) including an input device having a circuit board manufactured in the present disclosure and to reduce the area occupied by the extraction wiring as much as possible, at least a part of the pattern (particularly the touch panel) The electrode pattern and the part of the lead-out wiring) are preferably fine wires of 100 μm or less, and more preferably 70 μm or less.
The exposure in the exposure step may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like, but is preferably exposure through an exposure mask.
The method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for producing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of bringing the photosensitive transfer material and an exposure mask into contact between the bonding step and the exposure step. It is preferable to contain. It is excellent in the resolution of the pattern obtained as it is the said aspect.
 活性光線としては、可視光、紫外光、及び、電子線が挙げられるが、可視光又は紫外光が好ましく、紫外線が特に好ましい。
 活性光線による露光光源としては、低圧水銀灯、高圧水銀灯、超高圧水銀灯、ケミカルランプ、発光ダイオード(LED)光源、エキシマレーザー発生装置などを用いることができ、g線(436nm)、i線(365nm)、h線(405nm)などの波長300nm以上450nm以下の波長を有する活性光線が好ましく使用できる。また、必要に応じて長波長カットフィルター、短波長カットフィルター、バンドパスフィルターのような分光フィルターを通して照射光を調整することもできる。
 露光装置としては、ミラープロジェクションアライナー、ステッパー、スキャナー、プロキシミティ、コンタクト、マイクロレンズアレイ、レーザー露光など各種方式の露光機を用いることができる。
 露光量は、使用する感光性樹脂層に応じ、適宜選択すればよいが、5mJ/cm~200mJ/cmであることが好ましく、10mJ/cm~100mJ/cmであることがより好ましい。
 また、露光後にパターンの矩形性、直線性を向上させる目的で、現像前に熱処理を行うことも好ましい。いわゆるPEB(Post Exposure Bake)と呼ばれる工程により、露光時に感光性樹脂層中で生じた定在波によるパターンエッジの荒れを低減することが可能である。
Visible light, ultraviolet light, and an electron beam are mentioned as actinic light, However, Visible light or ultraviolet light is preferable and an ultraviolet-ray is especially preferable.
As an exposure light source using actinic light, a low-pressure mercury lamp, a high-pressure mercury lamp, an ultrahigh-pressure mercury lamp, a chemical lamp, a light emitting diode (LED) light source, an excimer laser generator, etc. can be used. Actinic rays having a wavelength of 300 nm to 450 nm, such as h-ray (405 nm), can be preferably used. Moreover, irradiation light can also be adjusted through spectral filters, such as a long wavelength cut filter, a short wavelength cut filter, and a band pass filter, as needed.
As the exposure apparatus, various types of exposure machines such as a mirror projection aligner, a stepper, a scanner, a proximity, a contact, a microlens array, and a laser exposure can be used.
Exposure dose, depending on the photosensitive resin layer to be used may be appropriately selected, but is preferably from 5mJ / cm 2 ~ 200mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10mJ / cm 2 ~ 100mJ / cm 2 .
It is also preferable to perform heat treatment before development for the purpose of improving the rectangularity and linearity of the pattern after exposure. By a process called PEB (Post Exposure Bake), pattern edge roughness due to standing waves generated in the photosensitive resin layer during exposure can be reduced.
 なお、パターン露光は、仮支持体を感光性樹脂層から剥離してから行っても、仮支持体を剥離する前に、仮支持体を介して露光し、その後、仮支持体を剥離してもよい。なお、パターン露光は、マスクを介した露光でもよいし、レーザー等を用いたデジタル露光でもよい。 In addition, even if pattern exposure performs after peeling a temporary support body from the photosensitive resin layer, before peeling a temporary support body, it exposes through a temporary support body, and peels a temporary support body after that. Also good. The pattern exposure may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like.
<現像工程>
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記露光する工程後、露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程(現像工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 また、上記感光性転写材料が中間層を有する場合、現像工程においては、露光された部分の中間層も、露光された感光性樹脂層とともに除去される。
 更に、現像工程においては、未露光部の中間層も現像液に溶解あるいは分散する形で除去されてもよい。
 上記現像工程における露光された上記感光性樹脂層の現像は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。
 現像液としては、上記感光性樹脂層の露光部分を除去することができれば特に制限はなく、例えば、特開平5-72724号公報に記載の現像液など、公知の現像液を使用することができる。なお、現像液は上記感光性樹脂層の露光部分が溶解型の現像挙動をする現像液が好ましい。現像液としては、アルカリ水溶液が好ましく、例えば、pKa=7~13の化合物を0.05mol/L(リットル)~5mol/Lの濃度で含むアルカリ水溶液がより好ましい。現像液は、更に、水と混和性を有する有機溶剤、界面活性剤等を含有してもよい。本開示において好適に用いられる現像液としては、例えば、国際公開第2015/093271号の段落0194に記載の現像液が挙げられる。
<Development process>
The resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure includes a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer and forming a pattern after the exposing step (developing step). It is preferable to contain.
When the photosensitive transfer material has an intermediate layer, the exposed intermediate layer is also removed together with the exposed photosensitive resin layer in the development step.
Furthermore, in the development step, the intermediate layer in the unexposed area may also be removed in a form of being dissolved or dispersed in the developer.
Development of the exposed photosensitive resin layer in the development step can be performed using a developer.
The developer is not particularly limited as long as the exposed portion of the photosensitive resin layer can be removed. For example, a known developer such as the developer described in JP-A-5-72724 can be used. . The developer is preferably a developer in which the exposed portion of the photosensitive resin layer exhibits a dissolution type development behavior. The developer is preferably an alkaline aqueous solution, and more preferably, for example, an alkaline aqueous solution containing a compound having a pKa of 7 to 13 at a concentration of 0.05 mol / L (liter) to 5 mol / L. The developer may further contain an organic solvent miscible with water, a surfactant, and the like. Examples of the developer suitably used in the present disclosure include the developer described in Paragraph 0194 of International Publication No. 2015/092731.
 現像方式としては、特に制限はなくパドル現像、シャワー現像、シャワー及びスピン現像、ディップ現像等のいずれでもよい。ここで、シャワー現像について説明すると、露光後の感光性樹脂層に現像液をシャワーにより吹き付けることにより、露光部分を除去することができる。また、現像の後に、洗浄剤などをシャワーにより吹き付け、ブラシなどで擦りながら、現像残渣を除去することが好ましい。現像液の液温度は20℃~40℃が好ましい。
 また、露光から現像までの時間が長い態様であるほうが、本開示におけるパターン形状の変形を抑制する効果がより発揮される。露光後すぐ現像してもよいが、露光から現像までの時間が、露光から、好ましくは0.5時間以上、より好ましくは1時間以上、更に好ましく6時間以上経過した後、現像を行う態様において、本開示におけるパターン形状の変形を抑制する効果がより発揮される。
 また、本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、現像後、水等により洗浄する工程や、得られたパターンを有する基板を乾燥する工程等、公知の工程を含んでいてもよい。
The development method is not particularly limited, and any of paddle development, shower development, shower and spin development, dip development, and the like may be used. Here, the shower development will be described. The exposed portion can be removed by spraying a developer onto the exposed photosensitive resin layer by shower. Further, after the development, it is preferable to remove the development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like. The liquid temperature of the developer is preferably 20 ° C. to 40 ° C.
Moreover, the effect which suppresses the deformation | transformation of the pattern shape in this indication is more exhibited in the aspect with long time from exposure to image development. Although development may be performed immediately after exposure, in a mode in which development is performed after the time from exposure to development is preferably 0.5 hours or more, more preferably 1 hour or more, and further preferably 6 hours or more after exposure. The effect of suppressing the deformation of the pattern shape in the present disclosure is further exhibited.
In addition, a method for manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of washing with water after development, a step of drying a substrate having the obtained pattern, and the like. These steps may be included.
 更に、現像して得られたパターンを加熱処理するポストベーク工程を有していてもよい。
 ポストベークの加熱は8.1kPa~121.6kPaの環境下で行うことが好ましく、50.66kPa以上の環境下で行うことがより好ましい。一方、111.46kPa以下の環境下で行うことがより好ましく、101.3kPa以下の環境下で行うことが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークの温度は、80℃~250℃であることが好ましく、110℃~170℃であることがより好ましく、130℃~150℃であることが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークの時間は、1分間~30分間であることが好ましく、2分間~10分間であることがより好ましく、2分間~4分間であることが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークは、空気環境下で行っても、窒素置換環境下で行ってもよい。
Furthermore, you may have the post-baking process which heat-processes the pattern obtained by image development.
The post-baking is preferably performed in an environment of 8.1 kPa to 121.6 kPa, and more preferably in an environment of 50.66 kPa or more. On the other hand, it is more preferable to perform in an environment of 111.46 kPa or less, and it is particularly preferable to perform in an environment of 101.3 kPa or less.
The post-baking temperature is preferably 80 ° C. to 250 ° C., more preferably 110 ° C. to 170 ° C., and particularly preferably 130 ° C. to 150 ° C.
The post-baking time is preferably 1 minute to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 minutes to 10 minutes, and particularly preferably 2 minutes to 4 minutes.
The post-bake may be performed in an air environment or a nitrogen substitution environment.
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法における各工程時における上記支持体の搬送速度は、特に制限はないが、露光時を除いて、0.5m/min~10m/minであることが好ましく、露光時を除いて、2.0m/min~8.0m/minであることがより好ましい。 The transport speed of the support in each step of the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited. It is preferably from min to 10 m / min, and more preferably from 2.0 m / min to 8.0 m / min except during exposure.
<剥離工程>
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記基板に貼り合わせる工程の後、かつ上記パターンを形成する工程の前に、上記仮支持体を剥離する工程(剥離工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記感光性転写材料を用いるため、感光性転写材料を貼り合わせた後、かつ現像前のどのタイミングで仮支持体を剥離しても、感光性樹脂層との密着性に優れるため、一部剥がれ等の不良原因が生じることが抑制され、パターン形成を良好に行うことができる。
 また、本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、パターン形成性及び解像度の観点から、上記基板に貼り合わせる工程の後、かつ上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程の前に、上記仮支持体を剥離する工程を含むことがより好ましい。更に、上記態様であると、マスクを接触させてパターン露光する場合に、感光性樹脂層とマスクとが直接触れないため、パターン形成性及び解像度により優れる。
 上記剥離工程における仮支持体を剥離する方法は、特に制限はなく、公知の方法により剥離すればよい。
<Peeling process>
The method for manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure peels off the temporary support after the step of bonding to the substrate and before the step of forming the pattern. It is preferable to include a step (peeling step).
Since the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure uses the photosensitive transfer material, at any timing after the photosensitive transfer material is bonded and before development. Even if the support is peeled off, the adhesiveness with the photosensitive resin layer is excellent, so that the cause of defects such as partial peeling is suppressed, and the pattern can be formed satisfactorily.
Moreover, the manufacturing method of the resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes the step of bonding to the substrate and the photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of pattern formability and resolution. It is more preferable that a step of peeling the temporary support is included before the pattern exposure step. Furthermore, when the pattern exposure is performed by bringing the mask into contact with the above aspect, the photosensitive resin layer and the mask are not in direct contact with each other.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular in the method of peeling the temporary support body in the said peeling process, What is necessary is just to peel by a well-known method.
<エッチング工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記パターンが配置されていない領域における導電層をエッチング処理する工程(エッチング工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 上記エッチング工程では、上記現像工程により上記感光性樹脂層から形成されたパターンを、エッチングレジストとして使用し、上記導電層のエッチング処理を行う。
 上記導電層のエッチングは、特開2010-152155号公報の段落0048~段落0054等に記載の方法、公知のプラズマエッチング等のドライエッチングによる方法など、公知の方法でエッチングを適用することができる。
 例えば、エッチングの方法としては、一般的に行われている、エッチング液に浸漬するウェットエッチング法が挙げられる。ウェットエッチングに用いられるエッチング液は、エッチングの対象に合わせて酸性タイプ又はアルカリ性タイプのエッチング液を適宜選択すればよい。
 酸性タイプのエッチング液としては、塩酸、硫酸、硝酸、酢酸、フッ酸、シュウ酸、又は、リン酸等の酸性成分単独の水溶液、酸性成分と塩化第2鉄、フッ化アンモニウム、又は、過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩の混合水溶液等が例示される。酸性成分は、複数の酸性成分を組み合わせた成分を使用してもよい。
 アルカリ性タイプのエッチング液としては、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、アンモニア、有機アミン、又は、テトラメチルアンモニウムハイドロオキサイドのような有機アミンの塩等のアルカリ成分単独の水溶液、アルカリ成分と過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩の混合水溶液等が例示される。アルカリ成分は、複数のアルカリ成分を組み合わせた成分を使用してもよい。
<Etching process>
The circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step (etching step) of etching the conductive layer in a region where the pattern is not disposed.
In the etching step, the pattern formed from the photosensitive resin layer in the developing step is used as an etching resist, and the conductive layer is etched.
Etching of the conductive layer can be performed by a known method such as a method described in paragraphs 0048 to 0054 of JP 2010-152155 A or a dry etching method such as a known plasma etching.
For example, as an etching method, a commonly performed wet etching method in which the substrate is immersed in an etching solution can be used. As an etchant used for wet etching, an acid type or alkaline type etchant may be appropriately selected in accordance with an object to be etched.
Acidic etchants include hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, acetic acid, hydrofluoric acid, oxalic acid, or aqueous solutions of acidic components such as phosphoric acid alone, acidic components and ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride, or permanganese A mixed aqueous solution of a salt such as potassium acid is exemplified. As the acidic component, a component obtained by combining a plurality of acidic components may be used.
Alkali type etching solutions include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, organic amine, or an aqueous solution of an alkaline component alone such as a salt of an organic amine such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, an alkaline component and potassium permanganate. A mixed aqueous solution of a salt such as As the alkali component, a component obtained by combining a plurality of alkali components may be used.
 エッチング液の温度は特に限定されないが、45℃以下であることが好ましい。本開示において、エッチングマスク(エッチングパターン)として使用されるパターンは、45℃以下の温度域における酸性及びアルカリ性のエッチング液に対して特に優れた耐性を発揮することが好ましい。したがって、エッチング工程中に上記パターンが剥離することが防止され、上記パターンの存在しない部分が選択的にエッチングされることになる。 The temperature of the etching solution is not particularly limited, but is preferably 45 ° C. or lower. In the present disclosure, the pattern used as an etching mask (etching pattern) preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to acidic and alkaline etching solutions in a temperature range of 45 ° C. or lower. Therefore, the pattern is prevented from peeling off during the etching process, and a portion where the pattern does not exist is selectively etched.
 上記エッチング工程後、工程ラインの汚染を防ぐために、必要に応じて、エッチングされた上記基板を洗浄する工程(洗浄工程)、及び、エッチングされた上記基板を乾燥する工程(乾燥工程)を行ってもよい。洗浄工程については、例えば常温(10℃~35℃)で純水により10秒~300秒間基板を洗浄することが挙げられる。乾燥工程については、例えばエアブローを使用し、エアブロー圧(0.1kg/cm~5kg/cm程度)を適宜調整して乾燥を行えばよい。 After the etching process, in order to prevent contamination of the process line, a process of cleaning the etched substrate (cleaning process) and a process of drying the etched substrate (drying process) are performed as necessary. Also good. As for the cleaning step, for example, the substrate may be cleaned with pure water at room temperature (10 ° C. to 35 ° C.) for 10 seconds to 300 seconds. Regarding the drying step, for example, air blow may be used, and the air blow pressure (about 0.1 kg / cm 2 to about 5 kg / cm 2 ) may be appropriately adjusted for drying.
<エッチングレジスト剥離工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記エッチング工程の後に、上記感光性樹脂層を剥離液を用いて剥離する工程(エッチングレジスト剥離工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 上記エッチング工程の終了後、パターン形成された上記感光性樹脂層が残存している。上記感光性樹脂層が不要であれば、残存する全ての上記感光性樹脂層を除去すればよい。
 剥離液を用いて剥離する方法としては、例えば、好ましくは30℃~80℃、より好ましくは50℃~80℃にて撹拌中の剥離液に上記感光性樹脂層などを有する基材を5分~30分間浸漬する方法が挙げられる。
 剥離液としては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム若しくは水酸化カリウム等の無機アルカリ成分、又は、第三級アミン若しくは第四級アンモニウム塩等の有機アルカリ成分を、水、ジメチルスルホキシド、N-メチルピロリドン、又は、これらの混合溶液に溶解させた剥離液が挙げられる。剥離液を使用し、スプレー法、シャワー法、又は、パドル法等により剥離してもよい。
<Etching resist stripping process>
It is preferable that the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication includes the process (etching resist peeling process) which peels the said photosensitive resin layer using peeling liquid after the said etching process.
After the etching process is finished, the patterned photosensitive resin layer remains. If the photosensitive resin layer is unnecessary, all the remaining photosensitive resin layers may be removed.
As a method of peeling using a peeling solution, for example, a substrate having the above-mentioned photosensitive resin layer or the like in the peeling solution preferably stirred at 30 to 80 ° C., more preferably 50 to 80 ° C. for 5 minutes. Examples include a method of immersing for ˜30 minutes.
As the stripping solution, for example, an inorganic alkali component such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide, or an organic alkali component such as a tertiary amine or quaternary ammonium salt, water, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, or And a stripping solution dissolved in a mixed solution thereof. A stripping solution may be used and stripped by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method, or the like.
 また、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、必要に応じ、露光工程、現像工程及びエッチング工程を2回以上繰り返してもよい。
 本開示における露光工程、現像工程及びその他の工程の例としては、特開2006-23696号公報の段落0035~段落0051に記載の方法を、本開示においても好適に用いることができる。
Moreover, the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication may repeat an exposure process, a image development process, and an etching process twice or more as needed.
As examples of the exposure step, the development step, and other steps in the present disclosure, the methods described in paragraphs 0035 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-23696 can be suitably used in the present disclosure.
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、他の任意の工程を含んでもよい。例えば、以下のような工程が挙げられるが、これらの工程に限定されない。 The resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may include other optional steps. For example, although the following processes are mentioned, it is not limited to these processes.
<可視光線反射率を低下させる工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、導電層の表面、例えば、基板上に有する導電層の一部又は全ての表面の可視光線反射率を低下させる処理をする工程を含むことが可能である。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理としては、酸化処理などを挙げることができる。例えば、銅を酸化処理して酸化銅とすることで、黒化することにより、可視光線反射率を低下させることができる。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理の好ましい態様については、特開2014-150118号公報の段落0017~段落0025、並びに、特開2013-206315号公報の段落0041、段落0042、段落0048及び段落0058に記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<Step of reducing visible light reflectance>
The circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may include a process of reducing the visible light reflectance of the surface of the conductive layer, for example, part or all of the surface of the conductive layer on the substrate. .
Examples of the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance include an oxidation treatment. For example, the visible light reflectance can be reduced by blackening by oxidizing copper to copper oxide.
Regarding preferred embodiments of the processing for reducing the visible light reflectance, paragraphs 0017 to 0025 of JP2014-150118A, and paragraphs 0041, 0042, 0048 and 0058 of JP2013-206315A are described. The contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
<エッチングされた上記基板上に絶縁膜を形成する工程、及び、絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記基板上、例えば、形成した配線(エッチングされた導電層)上に絶縁膜を形成する工程と、絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程とを含むことも好ましい。
 絶縁膜を形成する工程については、特に制限はなく、公知の永久膜を形成する方法を挙げることができる。また、絶縁性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの絶縁膜を形成してもよい。
 絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程については、特に制限はない。導電性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの新たな導電層を形成してもよい。
<Process for forming an insulating film on the etched substrate and process for forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film>
A method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of forming an insulating film on the substrate, for example, a formed wiring (etched conductive layer), and a step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film. It is also preferable to contain.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular about the process of forming an insulating film, The method of forming a well-known permanent film can be mentioned. Alternatively, an insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having insulating properties.
There is no particular limitation on the process of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film. A new conductive layer having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having conductivity.
 また、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記新たな導電層を、上記と同様な方法によりエッチングレジストを形成してエッチングしてもよいし、別途、公知の方法によりエッチングしてもよい。
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により得られる回路配線を有する基板は、上記基板上に1層のみの配線を有していても、2層以上の配線を有していてもよい。
Further, in the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, the new conductive layer may be etched by forming an etching resist by a method similar to the above, or may be separately etched by a known method. .
The substrate having the circuit wiring obtained by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may have only one layer of wiring on the substrate, or may have two or more layers of wiring.
 また、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、基板が両方の表面にそれぞれ複数の導電層を有し、基板の両方の表面に形成された導電層に対して逐次又は同時に回路形成することも好ましい。このような構成により、基板の一方の表面に第一の導電パターン(第一の配線)、もう一方の表面に第二の導電パターン(第二の配線)を形成した配線、好ましくはタッチパネル用配線を形成することができる。 Further, in the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, the substrate may have a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces, and the circuit may be sequentially or simultaneously formed on the conductive layers formed on both surfaces of the substrate. preferable. With such a configuration, a wiring in which a first conductive pattern (first wiring) is formed on one surface of the substrate and a second conductive pattern (second wiring) is formed on the other surface, preferably a touch panel wiring. Can be formed.
(回路配線、及び、回路配線を有する基板)
 本開示に係る回路配線は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線である。
 本開示に係る回路配線を有する基板は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線を有する基板である。
 本開示に係る回路配線を有する基板の用途は限定されないが、例えば、タッチパネル用回路配線基板であることが好ましい。
(Circuit wiring and substrate having circuit wiring)
The circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is a circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure.
The board | substrate which has the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication is a board | substrate which has the circuit wiring manufactured by the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication.
Although the use of the board | substrate which has the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication is not limited, For example, it is preferable that it is a circuit wiring board for touchscreens.
(入力装置及び表示装置)
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造される回路配線を備えた装置として、入力装置が挙げられる。
 本開示に係る入力装置は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造される回路配線を少なくとも有する入力装置であればよく、静電容量型タッチパネルであることが好ましい。
 本開示に係る表示装置は、本開示に係る入力装置を備えることが好ましい。本開示に係る表示装置は、有機EL表示装置、及び、液晶表示装置等の画像表示装置であることが好ましい。
(Input device and display device)
An input device is an example of a device provided with circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure.
The input device according to the present disclosure may be an input device having at least circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a capacitive touch panel.
The display device according to the present disclosure preferably includes the input device according to the present disclosure. The display device according to the present disclosure is preferably an organic EL display device and an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device.
(タッチパネル、及び、タッチパネル表示装置)
 本開示に係るタッチパネルは、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線を少なくとも有するタッチパネルである。また、本開示に係るタッチパネルは、透明基板と、電極と、絶縁層又は保護層とを少なくとも有することが好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル表示装置は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線を少なくとも有するタッチパネル表示装置であり、本開示に係るタッチパネルを有するタッチパネル表示装置であることが好ましい。
 また、本開示に係るタッチパネルの製造方法は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料を用いたタッチパネルの製造方法であれば、特に制限はないが、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の上記感光性樹脂層側の最外層を、導電層を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、上記パターンが配置されていない領域における導電層をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含むことが好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル及び本開示に係るタッチパネル表示装置のおける検出方法としては、抵抗膜方式、静電容量方式、超音波方式、電磁誘導方式、及び、光学方式など公知の方式いずれでもよい。中でも、静電容量方式が好ましい。
(Touch panel and touch panel display device)
The touch panel according to the present disclosure is a touch panel having at least circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure. In addition, the touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably includes at least a transparent substrate, an electrode, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
The touch panel display device according to the present disclosure is a touch panel display device having at least circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a touch panel display device including the touch panel according to the present disclosure.
Further, the touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a touch panel manufacturing method using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, but the photosensitive resin of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. A step of bringing the outermost layer on the layer side into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer, a step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive resin layer, and a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern And a step of etching the conductive layer in the region where the pattern is not disposed are preferably included in this order.
The detection method in the touch panel according to the present disclosure and the touch panel display device according to the present disclosure may be any known method such as a resistive film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method. Among these, the electrostatic capacity method is preferable.
 タッチパネル型としては、いわゆる、インセル型(例えば、特表2012-517051号公報の図5、図6、図7、図8に記載のもの)、いわゆる、オンセル型(例えば、特開2013-168125号公報の図19に記載のもの、特開2012-89102号公報の図1や図5に記載のもの)、OGS(One Glass Solution)型、TOL(Touch-on-Lens)型(例えば、特開2013-54727号公報の図2に記載のもの)、その他の構成(例えば、特開2013-164871号公報の図6に記載のもの)、各種アウトセル型(いわゆる、GG、G1・G2、GFF、GF2、GF1、G1Fなど)を挙げることができる。 As the touch panel type, a so-called in-cell type (for example, those described in FIGS. 5, 6, 7, and 8 of JP-T-2012-517051), a so-called on-cell type (for example, JP 2013-168125 A). 19 of the gazette, those described in FIGS. 1 and 5 of JP 2012-89102 A, OGS (One Glass Solution) type, TOL (Touch-on-Lens) type (for example, JP No. 2013-54727 shown in FIG. 2), other configurations (for example, those shown in FIG. 6 of JP2013-164671A), various out-cell types (so-called GG, G1, G2, GFF, GF2, GF1, G1F, etc.).
 本開示に係るタッチパネル及び本開示に係るタッチパネル表示装置としては、“最新タッチパネル技術”(2009年7月6日、(株)テクノタイムズ社発行)、三谷雄二監修、“タッチパネルの技術と開発”(2004年12月、シーエムシー出版)、FPD International 2009 Forum T-11講演テキストブック、Cypress Semiconductor Corporation アプリケーションノートAN2292等に開示されている構成を適用することができる。 As the touch panel according to the present disclosure and the touch panel display device according to the present disclosure, “latest touch panel technology” (issued July 6, 2009, published by Techno Times Co., Ltd.), supervised by Yuji Mitani, “touch panel technology and development” ( The configurations disclosed in FPD International 2009 Forum T-11 lecture textbook, Cypress Semiconductor Corporation application note AN2292, etc. can be applied.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明の実施形態を更に具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、及び、処理手順等は、本発明の実施形態の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。したがって、本発明の実施形態の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されない。なお、特に断りのない限り、「部」、「%」は質量基準である。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described more specifically with reference to examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, and the like shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the embodiment of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. Unless otherwise specified, “part” and “%” are based on mass.
 以下の合成例において、以下の略語はそれぞれ以下の化合物を表す。
 ATHF:2-テトラヒドロフラニルアクリレート(合成品)
 AA:アクリル酸(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
 EA:アクリル酸エチル(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
 MAA:メタクリル酸(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
 MMA:メタクリル酸メチル(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
 HEMA:メタクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
 CHA:アクリル酸シクロヘキシル(東京化成工業(株)製)
 PMPMA:メタクリル酸1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチル-4-ピペリジル(pKaH=10、東京化成工業(株)製)
 TMCAC:メタクリルコリンクロリド(東京化成工業(株)製)
 SMP:メタクリル酸3-スルホプロピルカリウム(東京化成工業(株)製)
 DMAPS:[2-(メタクリロイルオキシ)エチル]ジメチル(3-スルホプロピル)アンモニウムヒドロキシド(東京化成工業(株)製)
 MFG:1-メトキシ-2-プロパノール(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
 PGMEA:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(昭和電工(株)製)
 V-601:ジメチル 2,2’-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオネート)(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
In the following synthesis examples, the following abbreviations represent the following compounds, respectively.
ATHF: 2-tetrahydrofuranyl acrylate (synthetic product)
AA: Acrylic acid (Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
EA: ethyl acrylate (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
MAA: Methacrylic acid (Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
MMA: Methyl methacrylate (Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
HEMA: 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
CHA: cyclohexyl acrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
PMPMA: 1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate (pKaH = 10, manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
TMCAC: Methacrylcholine chloride (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
SMP: 3-sulfopropyl potassium methacrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
DMAPS: [2- (methacryloyloxy) ethyl] dimethyl (3-sulfopropyl) ammonium hydroxide (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
MFG: 1-methoxy-2-propanol (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
PGMEA: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (manufactured by Showa Denko KK)
V-601: Dimethyl 2,2′-azobis (2-methylpropionate) (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
<中間層形成用ポリマーP-2の合成例>
 3つ口フラスコにMFG(75.0質量部)、を入れ、窒素雰囲気下において90℃に昇温した。
 MAA(4.0質量部)、HEMA(50.0質量部)、MMA(46.0質量部)、V-601(2.5質量部)、MFG(75.0質量部)を加えた溶液を、90℃±2℃に維持した3つ口フラスコ溶液中に2時間かけて滴下した。
 滴下終了後、90℃±2℃にて2時間撹拌することで、中間層形成用ポリマーP-2(固形分濃度40.0%)を得た。
<Synthesis Example of Intermediate Layer Forming Polymer P-2>
MFG (75.0 parts by mass) was placed in a three-necked flask and heated to 90 ° C. in a nitrogen atmosphere.
MAA (4.0 parts by mass), HEMA (50.0 parts by mass), MMA (46.0 parts by mass), V-601 (2.5 parts by mass), MFG (75.0 parts by mass) Was dropped into a three-necked flask solution maintained at 90 ° C. ± 2 ° C. over 2 hours.
After completion of dropping, the mixture was stirred at 90 ° C. ± 2 ° C. for 2 hours to obtain an intermediate layer-forming polymer P-2 (solid content concentration 40.0%).
<中間層形成用ポリマーP-3~P-6の合成例>
 モノマーの種類等を下記表1に示す通りに変更し、その他の条件については、中間層形成用ポリマー1と同様の方法で合成した。重合体の固形分濃度は40質量%とした。
<Synthesis Example of Intermediate Layer Forming Polymers P-3 to P-6>
The monomer type and the like were changed as shown in Table 1 below, and the other conditions were synthesized in the same manner as for the intermediate layer forming polymer 1. The solid content concentration of the polymer was 40% by mass.
<中間層形成用ポリマーP-7の合成例>
 3つ口フラスコにMFG(67.5質量部)、水(7.5質量部)を入れ、窒素雰囲気下において90℃に昇温した。
 SMP(15.0質量部)、HEMA(50.0質量部)、MMA(35.0質量部)、V-601(2.5質量部)、MFG(67.5質量部)、水(7.5質量部)を加えた溶液を、90℃±2℃に維持した3つ口フラスコ溶液中に2時間かけて滴下した。
滴下終了後、90℃±2℃にて2時間撹拌することで、中間層形成用ポリマーP-7(固形分濃度40.0%)を得た。
<Synthesis Example of Intermediate Layer Forming Polymer P-7>
MFG (67.5 parts by mass) and water (7.5 parts by mass) were placed in a three-necked flask and heated to 90 ° C. in a nitrogen atmosphere.
SMP (15.0 parts by mass), HEMA (50.0 parts by mass), MMA (35.0 parts by mass), V-601 (2.5 parts by mass), MFG (67.5 parts by mass), water (7 0.5 parts by mass) was added dropwise to the three-necked flask solution maintained at 90 ° C. ± 2 ° C. over 2 hours.
After completion of the dropwise addition, the mixture was stirred at 90 ° C. ± 2 ° C. for 2 hours to obtain an intermediate layer forming polymer P-7 (solid content concentration 40.0%).
<中間層形成用ポリマーP-8及びP-9の合成例>
 モノマーの種類等を下記表1に示す通りに変更し、その他の条件については、中間層形成用ポリマーP-7と同様の方法で合成した。重合体の固形分濃度は40質量%とした。
<Synthesis Example of Intermediate Layer Forming Polymers P-8 and P-9>
The monomer type and the like were changed as shown in Table 1 below, and the other conditions were synthesized in the same manner as the intermediate layer forming polymer P-7. The solid content concentration of the polymer was 40% by mass.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000025
 なお、表1の各モノマー欄の数値は、得られたポリマーにおける各モノマーより形成された構成単位の量を表し、その単位は、質量%である。
 また、中間層形成用ポリマーP-7~P-9は、酸基又は塩基性基の中和率が100モル%であるアクリル樹脂である。
In addition, the numerical value of each monomer column of Table 1 represents the quantity of the structural unit formed from each monomer in the obtained polymer, The unit is the mass%.
Further, the intermediate layer forming polymers P-7 to P-9 are acrylic resins having a neutralization rate of acid groups or basic groups of 100 mol%.
<中間層形成用組成物又は水溶性樹脂層形成用組成物の調製>
 下記表2又は表3に示す処方で溶解混合し、孔径0.2μmのポリテトラフルオロエチレン製フィルターで濾過して、各中間層形成用組成物又は水溶性樹脂層形成用組成物をそれぞれ得た。
 なお、表2又は表3に記載の略号は、以下の通りである。
 樹脂A:メタクリル酸/メタクリル酸アリルの共重合樹脂(Mw:25,000、組成比:40/60)
 樹脂B:Nisso HPC-SSL(日本曹達(株)製)
 E-11:メガファックF-444(DIC(株)製)
 F-1:ブロモフェノールブルー(着色剤(色素)、富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製、極大吸収波長:606nm)
 MEK:メチルエチルケトン(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
<Preparation of intermediate layer forming composition or water-soluble resin layer forming composition>
It melt-mixed by the prescription shown in following Table 2 or Table 3, and filtered with the filter made from a polytetrafluoroethylene with the hole diameter of 0.2 micrometer, and obtained each intermediate | middle layer formation composition or the composition for water-soluble resin layer formation, respectively. .
The abbreviations listed in Table 2 or Table 3 are as follows.
Resin A: Methacrylic acid / Allyl methacrylate copolymer resin (Mw: 25,000, composition ratio: 40/60)
Resin B: Nissan HPC-SSL (manufactured by Nippon Soda Co., Ltd.)
E-11: Megafuck F-444 (manufactured by DIC Corporation)
F-1: Bromophenol blue (colorant (pigment), manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd., maximum absorption wavelength: 606 nm)
MEK: Methyl ethyl ketone (Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000027
 上記表2又は表3における各成分の量の単位は、質量部である。また、表2又は表3におけるNaOH(1N)は、1mol/Lの水酸化ナトリウム水溶液である。 The unit of the amount of each component in Table 2 or Table 3 is part by mass. Moreover, NaOH (1N) in Table 2 or Table 3 is a 1 mol / L sodium hydroxide aqueous solution.
<感光性樹脂組成物の調製>
<<ATHFの合成>>
 3つ口フラスコにアクリル酸(72.1部、1.0モル当量)、ヘキサン(72.1部)を加え20℃に冷却した。カンファースルホン酸(0.007部、0.03ミリモル当量)、2-ジヒドロフラン(77.9部、1.0モル当量)を滴下した後に、20℃±2℃で1.5時間撹拌した後、35℃まで昇温して2時間撹拌した。ヌッチェにキョーワード200(ろ過材、水酸化アルミニウム粉末、協和化学工業(株)製)、キョーワード1000(ろ過材、ハイドロタルサイト系粉末、協和化学工業(株)製)の順に敷き詰めた後、反応液をろ過することでろ過液を得た。得られたろ過液にヒドロキノンモノメチルエーテル(MEHQ、0.0012部)を加えた後、40℃で減圧濃縮することで、アクリル酸テトラヒドロフラン-2-イル(ATHF)140.8部を無色油状物として得た(収率99.0%)。
<Preparation of photosensitive resin composition>
<< Synthesis of ATHF >>
Acrylic acid (72.1 parts, 1.0 molar equivalent) and hexane (72.1 parts) were added to a three-necked flask and cooled to 20 ° C. After adding camphorsulfonic acid (0.007 parts, 0.03 mmol equivalent) and 2-dihydrofuran (77.9 parts, 1.0 molar equivalent) dropwise, the mixture was stirred at 20 ° C. ± 2 ° C. for 1.5 hours. The temperature was raised to 35 ° C. and stirred for 2 hours. After spreading Kyoward 200 (filter material, aluminum hydroxide powder, manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and Kyoward 1000 (filter material, hydrotalcite powder, manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) in order in Nutsche, The filtrate was obtained by filtering the reaction solution. Hydroquinone monomethyl ether (MEHQ, 0.0012 parts) was added to the obtained filtrate, followed by concentration under reduced pressure at 40 ° C., whereby 140.8 parts of tetrahydrofuran-2-yl acrylate (ATHF) was obtained as a colorless oil. Obtained (yield 99.0%).
<<重合体A-1の合成例>>
3つ口フラスコにPGMEA(75.0部)を入れ、窒素雰囲気下において90℃に昇温した。ATHF(30.0部)、MMA(40.0部)、アクリル酸エチル(EA、30.0部)、V-601(4.0部)、PGMEA(75.0部)を加えた溶液を、90℃±2℃に維持した3つ口フラスコ溶液中に2時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後,90℃±2℃にて2時間撹拌することで、重合体A-1(固形分濃度40.0%)を得た。
<< Synthesis Example of Polymer A-1 >>
PGMEA (75.0 parts) was placed in a three-necked flask and heated to 90 ° C. in a nitrogen atmosphere. A solution in which ATHF (30.0 parts), MMA (40.0 parts), ethyl acrylate (EA, 30.0 parts), V-601 (4.0 parts), and PGMEA (75.0 parts) were added. The solution was dropped into a three-necked flask solution maintained at 90 ° C. ± 2 ° C. over 2 hours. After completion of the dropping, the mixture was stirred at 90 ° C. ± 2 ° C. for 2 hours to obtain a polymer A-1 (solid content concentration 40.0%).
<<重合体A-2~A-7の合成例>>
 モノマーの種類等を下記表4に示す通りに変更し、その他の条件については、重合体A-1と同様の方法で合成した。重合体A-2~A-7の固形分濃度はそれぞれ、40質量%とした。
 なお、表4のモノマーの量の単位は、質量%である。
<< Synthesis Example of Polymers A-2 to A-7 >>
The monomer type was changed as shown in Table 4 below, and the other conditions were synthesized in the same manner as for Polymer A-1. The solid content concentrations of the polymers A-2 to A-7 were each 40% by mass.
In addition, the unit of the quantity of the monomer of Table 4 is the mass%.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000028
 なお、重合体A-1~A-7の重量平均分子量はそれぞれ、20,000であった。 The weight average molecular weights of the polymers A-1 to A-7 were 20,000, respectively.
<<光酸発生剤>>
 B-1:下記に示す構造の化合物(特開2013-47765号公報の段落0227に記載の化合物、段落0227に記載の方法に従って合成した。)
<< Photoacid generator >>
B-1: Compound having the structure shown below (Compound described in paragraph 0227 of JP 2013-47765 A, synthesized according to the method described in paragraph 0227)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
<<界面活性剤>>
 E-1:下記に示す構造の化合物
<< Surfactant >>
E-1: Compound having the structure shown below
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
 E-2:下記に示す構造の化合物 E-2: Compound with the structure shown below
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
<<塩基性化合物>>
 D-1:下記に示す構造の化合物
<< basic compound >>
D-1: Compound having the structure shown below
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
<<ベンゾトリアゾール化合物>>
 C-1:1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール(下記化合物)
<< benzotriazole compound >>
C-1: 1,2,3-benzotriazole (the following compound)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
<<感光性樹脂組成物1~7の調製>>
 下記表5に示す固形分比となるように、重合体、光酸発生剤、塩基性化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物、及び、界面活性剤をPGMEAに固形分濃度10質量%になるように溶解混合し、孔径0.2μmのポリテトラフルオロエチレン製フィルターで濾過して、感光性樹脂組成物1~7をそれぞれ得た。
<< Preparation of photosensitive resin compositions 1 to 7 >>
A polymer, a photoacid generator, a basic compound, a benzotriazole compound, and a surfactant were dissolved and mixed in PGMEA so that the solid content ratio was 10% by mass so that the solid content ratio shown in Table 5 was obtained. Then, the mixture was filtered through a polytetrafluoroethylene filter having a pore diameter of 0.2 μm to obtain photosensitive resin compositions 1 to 7, respectively.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000034
 なお、表5における各成分の量の単位は、質量部である。 In addition, the unit of the quantity of each component in Table 5 is part by mass.
(実施例1)
<感光性転写材料の作製>
 下記表6に示す構成となるように中間層形成用組成物を仮支持体となる厚さ30μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム(以下、PET(A)ともいう。)の上に、スリット状ノズルを用いて塗布幅が1.0mとなるように塗布し、80℃の乾燥ゾーンを40秒間かけて通過させて中間層を形成した。その後、中間層の上に、感光性樹脂組成物をスリット状ノズルを用いて塗布幅が1.0mとなるように塗布し、80℃の乾燥ゾーンを40秒間かけて通過させて、感光性樹脂層を形成した。感光性樹脂層の上にカバーフィルムとしてポリエチレンフィルム(トレデガー社製、OSM-N)を圧着して感光性転写材料1を作成し、感光性転写材料1を巻き取ってロール形態にした。
Example 1
<Production of photosensitive transfer material>
Using a slit-like nozzle on a 30 μm thick polyethylene terephthalate film (hereinafter also referred to as PET (A)) as a temporary support so that the composition for forming an intermediate layer has the structure shown in Table 6 below. It apply | coated so that application | coating width | variety might be set to 1.0 m, and it passed through the 80 degreeC drying zone over 40 second, and formed the intermediate | middle layer. Thereafter, the photosensitive resin composition is applied onto the intermediate layer using a slit-like nozzle so that the coating width is 1.0 m, and passed through an 80 ° C. drying zone for 40 seconds to obtain a photosensitive resin. A layer was formed. A polyethylene film (trade name, OSM-N, manufactured by Tredegar Co., Ltd.) was pressed as a cover film on the photosensitive resin layer to prepare a photosensitive transfer material 1, and the photosensitive transfer material 1 was wound into a roll form.
(実施例2~17)
 下記表6又は表7に示す組成物を使用し、中間層を形成する前に、実施例1における中間層と同様にして水溶性樹脂層を表6又は表7に記載の平均膜厚に形成し、下記表6又は表7に示す組成物を使用し、中間層を表6又は表7に記載の平均膜厚に形成した以外は、実施例1と同様にして感光性転写材料2~17をそれぞれ作製した。
(Examples 2 to 17)
Before using the composition shown in Table 6 or Table 7 and forming the intermediate layer, the water-soluble resin layer is formed in the average film thickness described in Table 6 or Table 7 in the same manner as the intermediate layer in Example 1. Then, photosensitive transfer materials 2 to 17 were used in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the compositions shown in Table 6 or 7 below were used and the intermediate layer was formed to have an average film thickness shown in Table 6 or Table 7. Were prepared respectively.
(比較例1~3)
 下記表6に示す組成物を使用した以外は、実施例1と同様にして感光性転写材料C1~C3をそれぞれ作製した。
(Comparative Examples 1 to 3)
Photosensitive transfer materials C1 to C3 were prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the compositions shown in Table 6 below were used.
 得られた感光性転写材料1~17、及び、C1~C3を使用し、以下の評価を行った。 Using the obtained photosensitive transfer materials 1 to 17 and C1 to C3, the following evaluations were performed.
<性能評価>
 厚さ100μmのポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)フィルム上に、銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜した銅層付きPET基板を使用した。
<Performance evaluation>
A PET substrate with a copper layer, in which copper was formed into a film with a thickness of 200 nm by a vacuum deposition method on a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having a thickness of 100 μm, was used.
-中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性の評価-
 実施例1の感光性転写材料から保護フィルムを剥離し、上記銅層付きPET基板における銅層上に得られた感光性転写材料を100℃、4m/minの速度、線圧0.6MPaの条件でラミネートした後、仮支持体を剥離し、銅層上にポジ型感光層が積層した積層体を作製した。
 積層体の上にプリンタックC(日東電工(株)製)を貼り、テープと支持体の幅が合うように4.5cm×9cmに切り抜いた。これを(株)エーアンドデイー製テンシロン万能試験機を用いて100mm/minの剥離速度により180°剥離を行い、中間層と感光性樹脂層との間の密着力を測定した。
 その際の密着力を下記評価基準に従って評価した。値が大きいほど好ましく、5~3が実用範囲である。
〔評価基準〕
  5:測定上限(22gf/cm(0.22N/cm))以上
  4:5.0gf/cm(0.098N/cm)以上22.0gf/cm未満
  3:2.0gf/cm(0.049N/cm)以上5.0gf/cm未満
  2:2.0gf/cm未満
  1:支持体剥離時に中間層も剥離したため評価不能
-Evaluation of adhesion between intermediate layer and photosensitive resin layer-
The protective film was peeled from the photosensitive transfer material of Example 1, and the photosensitive transfer material obtained on the copper layer in the above-mentioned PET substrate with a copper layer was subjected to conditions of 100 ° C., 4 m / min, linear pressure 0.6 MPa. Then, the temporary support was peeled off to produce a laminate in which a positive photosensitive layer was laminated on the copper layer.
Printac C (manufactured by Nitto Denko Corporation) was applied on the laminate, and cut out to 4.5 cm × 9 cm so that the width of the tape and the support was matched. This was peeled 180 ° at a peeling speed of 100 mm / min using an A & D Tensilon universal testing machine, and the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer was measured.
The adhesion at that time was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. A larger value is preferable, and 5 to 3 is a practical range.
〔Evaluation criteria〕
5: Measurement upper limit (22 gf / cm (0.22 N / cm)) or more 4: 5.0 gf / cm (0.098 N / cm) or more and less than 22.0 gf / cm 3: 2.0 gf / cm (0.049 N / cm) or more and less than 5.0 gf / cm 2: less than 2.0 gf / cm 1: Evaluation not possible because the intermediate layer was also peeled off when the support was peeled
-保存安定性の評価-
 作製した感光性転写材料を巻き出した後、ロール温度120℃、線圧1.0MPa、線速度0.5m/minのラミネート条件で、上記銅層付きPET基板にラミネートした。仮支持体を剥離せずに線幅10μmのラインアンドスペースパターンマスク(Duty比 1:1)を介して超高圧水銀灯で露光後、23℃55%RHの環境下で3時間引き置いた後に仮支持体を剥離して現像した。現像は25℃の1.0%炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を用い、シャワー現像で30秒行った。
 上記方法にて10μmのラインアンドスペースパターンを形成したとき、スペース部の残渣を走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)により観察し、レジスト線幅がちょうど10μmとなる露光量を求めた。
 作製した感光性転写材料を40℃55%RHの環境下で7日間放置したのち、上記と同じの条件で、銅層付きPET基板にラミネートした。仮支持体を剥離せずに線幅10μmのラインアンドスペースパターンマスク(Duty比 1:1)を介して、前記の方法で求めたレジスト線幅がちょうど10μmとなる露光後で露光し、23℃55%RHの環境下で3時間引き置いた後に仮支持体を剥離して現像した。現像は25℃の1.0%炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を用い、シャワー現像で30秒行った。
 得られたラインアンドスペースパターンの線幅を走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)により観察し、5つのラインについて計50点において線幅を測定し、10μmからの線幅の変動を求め、得られた値の平均値を算出し、その平均値を以下の基準により評価した。10μmからの線幅の変動の平均値が小さい値であるほど、保存安定性に優れ、また、10μmからの線幅の変動の平均値が1.5μm未満であることが好ましい。
  5:0.5μm未満
  4:0.5μm以上1.0μm未満
  3:1.0μm以上1.5μm未満
  2:1.5μm以上3μm未満
  1:3μm以上
-Evaluation of storage stability-
After unwinding the produced photosensitive transfer material, it was laminated on the PET substrate with a copper layer under the lamination conditions of a roll temperature of 120 ° C., a linear pressure of 1.0 MPa, and a linear velocity of 0.5 m / min. After peeling with a super high pressure mercury lamp through a line-and-space pattern mask (Duty ratio 1: 1) having a line width of 10 μm without peeling off the temporary support, and after leaving in an environment of 23 ° C. and 55% RH for 3 hours. The support was peeled off and developed. Development was performed by shower development for 30 seconds using a 1.0% aqueous sodium carbonate solution at 25 ° C.
When a 10 μm line and space pattern was formed by the above method, the residue in the space portion was observed with a scanning electron microscope (SEM), and the exposure amount at which the resist line width was exactly 10 μm was determined.
The produced photosensitive transfer material was allowed to stand in an environment of 40 ° C. and 55% RH for 7 days, and then laminated on a PET substrate with a copper layer under the same conditions as described above. Without exposing the temporary support, the film was exposed through a line-and-space pattern mask (duty ratio 1: 1) having a line width of 10 μm after exposure to obtain a resist line width of just 10 μm, and the temperature was 23 ° C. After leaving for 3 hours in an environment of 55% RH, the temporary support was peeled off and developed. Development was performed by shower development for 30 seconds using a 1.0% aqueous sodium carbonate solution at 25 ° C.
The line width of the obtained line and space pattern was observed with a scanning electron microscope (SEM), the line width was measured at a total of 50 points for 5 lines, and the fluctuation of the line width from 10 μm was obtained. The average value was calculated, and the average value was evaluated according to the following criteria. The smaller the average value of the line width variation from 10 μm, the better the storage stability, and the average value of the line width variation from 10 μm is preferably less than 1.5 μm.
5: Less than 0.5 μm 4: 0.5 μm or more and less than 1.0 μm 3: 1.0 μm or more and less than 1.5 μm 2: 1.5 μm or more and less than 3 μm 1: 3 μm or more
-露光後における引き置き安定性(PED)の評価-
 露光後の経時安定性(Post Exposure Delay stability:PED)を以下のように評価した。
 作製した感光性転写材料を巻き出した後、ロール温度120℃、線圧1.0MPa、線速度0.5m/minのラミネート条件で、上記銅層付きPET基板にラミネートした。仮支持体を剥離せずに線幅6μmのラインアンドスペースパターンマスク(Duty比 1:1)を介して超高圧水銀灯で露光後、23℃55%RHの環境下で3時間、又は、24時間経時引き置いた後に仮支持体を剥離して現像した。現像は25℃の1.0%炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を用い、シャワー現像で30秒行った。
 得られたラインアンドスペースパターンの線幅を走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)により観察し、5つのラインについて計50点において線幅を測定した。
 露光後引き置き時間3時間で形成した樹脂パターンの線幅に対する露光後引き置き時間24時間で形成した樹脂パターンの線幅の変化量を評価した。
  3:線幅の変動値が1.0μm未満
  2:線幅の変動値が1.0μm以上2.0μm未満
  1:線幅の変動値が2.0μm以上
-Evaluation of retention stability (PED) after exposure-
Post-exposure delay stability (PED) after exposure was evaluated as follows.
After unwinding the produced photosensitive transfer material, it was laminated on the PET substrate with a copper layer under the lamination conditions of a roll temperature of 120 ° C., a linear pressure of 1.0 MPa, and a linear velocity of 0.5 m / min. 3 hours or 24 hours in an environment of 23 ° C. and 55% RH after exposure with an ultra high pressure mercury lamp through a line and space pattern mask (duty ratio 1: 1) having a line width of 6 μm without peeling off the temporary support. After leaving with time, the temporary support was peeled off and developed. Development was performed by shower development for 30 seconds using a 1.0% aqueous sodium carbonate solution at 25 ° C.
The line width of the obtained line and space pattern was observed with a scanning electron microscope (SEM), and the line width was measured at a total of 50 points for five lines.
The amount of change in the line width of the resin pattern formed in the post-exposure holding time of 24 hours relative to the line width of the resin pattern formed in the post-exposure holding time of 3 hours was evaluated.
3: Line width variation is less than 1.0 μm 2: Line width variation is 1.0 μm or more and less than 2.0 μm 1: Line width variation is 2.0 μm or more
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000036
 表6及び表7から、実施例の感光性転写材料は、比較例の感光性転写材料に比べ、保存安定性、及び、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性に優れることがわかる。 From Table 6 and Table 7, it can be seen that the photosensitive transfer materials of the examples are superior in storage stability and adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer as compared with the photosensitive transfer materials of the comparative examples.
(実施例101)
 100μm厚PET基材上に、第2層の導電層として酸化インジウムスズ(ITO)をスパッタリングで150nm厚にて成膜し、その上に第1層の導電層として銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜して、回路形成基板とした。
 銅層上に実施例1で作製した感光性転写材料をラミネートした(線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min、ロール温度90℃)。仮支持体を剥離せずに一方向に導電層パッドが連結された構成を持つ図2に示すパターン(以下、「パターンA」とも称する。)を設けたフォトマスクを用いてコンタクトパターン露光した。
 なお、図2に示すパターンAは、実線部SL及びグレー部Gが遮光部であり、点線部DLはアライメント合わせの枠を仮想的に示したものである。
 その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンAを得た。次いで銅エッチング液(関東化学(株)製Cu-02)を用いて銅層をエッチングした後、ITOエッチング液(関東化学(株)製ITO-02)を用いてITO層をエッチングすることで、銅(実線部SL)とITO(グレー部G)とが共にパターンAで描画された基板を得た。
(Example 101)
Indium tin oxide (ITO) was deposited as a second conductive layer on a 100 μm thick PET substrate by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer to a thickness of 200 nm by vacuum evaporation. To form a circuit forming substrate.
The photosensitive transfer material produced in Example 1 was laminated on the copper layer (linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min, roll temperature 90 ° C.). Contact pattern exposure was performed using a photomask provided with a pattern (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern A”) shown in FIG. 2 having a configuration in which conductive layer pads are connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support.
In the pattern A shown in FIG. 2, the solid line portion SL and the gray portion G are light shielding portions, and the dotted line portion DL virtually shows an alignment alignment frame.
Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a pattern A. Next, after etching the copper layer using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.). A substrate on which copper (solid line portion SL) and ITO (gray portion G) were both drawn with the pattern A was obtained.
 次いで、アライメントを合わせた状態で図3に示すパターン(以下、「パターンB」とも称する。)の開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、現像、水洗を行った。
 なお、図3に示すパターンBは、グレー部Gが遮光部であり、点線部DLはアライメント合わせの枠を仮想的に示したものである。
 その後、Cu-02を用いて銅層をエッチングし、残った感光性樹脂層を剥離液(10質量%水酸化ナトリウム水溶液)を用いて剥離し、回路配線基板を得た。
 得られた回路配線基板を、顕微鏡で観察したところ、剥がれや欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。
Next, pattern alignment was performed using a photomask provided with openings of a pattern shown in FIG. 3 (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern B”) in the aligned state, and development and washing were performed.
In the pattern B shown in FIG. 3, the gray portion G is a light shielding portion, and the dotted line portion DL is a virtual alignment alignment frame.
Thereafter, the copper layer was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was peeled off using a peeling solution (10% by mass sodium hydroxide aqueous solution) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
When the obtained circuit wiring board was observed with a microscope, it was a clean pattern with no peeling or chipping.
(実施例102)
 100μm厚PET基材上に、第2層の導電層としてITOをスパッタリングで150nm厚にて成膜し、その上に第1層の導電層として銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜して、導電パターン形成用の基板とした。
 銅層上に実施例2で得た感光性転写材料を基板に貼り合わせて(ロール温度120℃、線圧0.8MPa、線速度1.0m/min)、積層体とした。積層体を、仮支持体を剥離せずに一方向に導電層パッドが連結された構成を持つパターンAを設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光した。その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンAで描画された樹脂パターンを得た。次いで銅エッチング液(関東化学(株)製Cu-02)を用いて銅層をエッチングした後、ITOエッチング液(関東化学(株)製ITO-02)を用いてITO層をエッチングすることで、銅とITOが共にパターンAで描画された基板を得た。
 次いで、残存しているレジスト上に保護層としてPET(A)を貼り合わせた。この状態で、アライメントを合わせた状態でパターンBの開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、PET(A)を剥離した後に現像、水洗を行った。その後、Cu-02を用いて銅配線をエッチングし、残った感光性樹脂層を剥離液(関東化学(株)製KP-301)を用いて剥離し、回路配線基板を得た。
 得られた回路配線基板を、顕微鏡で観察したところ、剥がれ、欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。
(Example 102)
On the 100 μm-thick PET substrate, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer at a thickness of 200 nm by vacuum evaporation. Thus, a substrate for forming a conductive pattern was obtained.
The photosensitive transfer material obtained in Example 2 was bonded to a substrate on a copper layer (roll temperature 120 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 1.0 m / min) to obtain a laminate. The laminate was subjected to pattern exposure using a photomask provided with a pattern A having a configuration in which conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a resin pattern drawn with pattern A. Next, after etching the copper layer using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), A substrate on which both copper and ITO were drawn in pattern A was obtained.
Subsequently, PET (A) was bonded as a protective layer on the remaining resist. In this state, pattern exposure was performed using a photomask provided with openings of pattern B in the aligned state, and after the PET (A) was peeled off, development and washing were performed. Thereafter, the copper wiring was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was stripped using a stripping solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
When the obtained circuit wiring board was observed with a microscope, it was a clean pattern with no peeling or chipping.
(実施例103)
 100μm厚シクロオレフィンポリマー(COP)基材上に、第2層の導電層としてITOをスパッタリングで150nm厚にて成膜し、その上に第1層の導電層として銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜して、導電パターン形成用の基板とした。
 銅層上に実施例2で得た感光性転写材料を基板に貼り合わせて(ロール温度100℃、線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min)、積層体とした。積層体を、仮支持体を剥離せずに一方向に導電層パッドが連結された構成を持つパターンAを設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光した。その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンAで描画された樹脂パターンを得た。次いで銅エッチング液(関東化学(株)製Cu-02)を用いて銅層をエッチングした後、ITOエッチング液(関東化学(株)製ITO-02)を用いてITO層をエッチングし、剥離液(関東化学(株)製KP-301)を用いて剥離することで、銅とITOが共にパターンAで描画された基板を得た。
 次いで、残存しているレジスト上に、実施例2で得られた感光性転写材料を貼り合わせた(ロール温度100℃、線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min)。この状態で、アライメントを合わせた状態でパターンBの開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、感光性転写材料の仮支持体を剥離した後に現像、水洗を行った。その後、Cu-02を用いて銅配線をエッチングし、残った感光性樹脂層を剥離液(関東化学(株)製KP-301)を用いて剥離し、導電パターンを有する回路配線基板を得た。
 得られた回路配線基板を、顕微鏡で観察したところ、剥がれ、欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。
(Example 103)
On the 100 μm-thick cycloolefin polymer (COP) substrate, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer by a thickness of 200 nm by vacuum evaporation. To form a substrate for forming a conductive pattern.
The photosensitive transfer material obtained in Example 2 was bonded to a substrate on a copper layer (roll temperature 100 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min) to obtain a laminate. The laminate was subjected to pattern exposure using a photomask provided with a pattern A having a configuration in which conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a resin pattern drawn with pattern A. Next, after etching the copper layer using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), and a peeling solution. By peeling using (KP-301, manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.), a substrate on which both copper and ITO were drawn with the pattern A was obtained.
Next, the photosensitive transfer material obtained in Example 2 was bonded onto the remaining resist (roll temperature 100 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min). In this state, pattern exposure was performed using a photomask provided with openings of pattern B in the aligned state, and the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material was peeled off, followed by development and washing with water. Thereafter, the copper wiring was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was stripped using a stripping solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board having a conductive pattern. .
When the obtained circuit wiring board was observed with a microscope, it was a clean pattern with no peeling or chipping.
 2018年5月29日に出願された日本国特許出願第2018-102135号の開示、及び、2019年3月26日に出願された日本国特許出願第2019-057799号の開示は、その全体が参照により本明細書に取り込まれる。
 本明細書に記載された全ての文献、特許出願、及び、技術規格は、個々の文献、特許出願、及び、技術規格が参照により取り込まれることが具体的かつ個々に記された場合と同程度に、本明細書中に参照により取り込まれる。
The disclosure of Japanese Patent Application No. 2018-102135 filed on May 29, 2018 and the disclosure of Japanese Patent Application No. 2019-057799 filed on March 26, 2019 are entirely Which is incorporated herein by reference.
All documents, patent applications, and technical standards described in this specification are the same as if each document, patent application, and technical standard were specifically and individually stated to be incorporated by reference. Which is incorporated herein by reference.
 10:仮支持体、12:中間層、14:感光性樹脂層、16:カバーフィルム、100:感光性転写材料、SL:実線部、G:グレー部、DL:点線部 10: Temporary support, 12: Intermediate layer, 14: Photosensitive resin layer, 16: Cover film, 100: Photosensitive transfer material, SL: Solid line part, G: Gray part, DL: Dotted line part

Claims (15)

  1.  仮支持体と、中間層と、感光性樹脂層とを有し、
     前記感光性樹脂層が、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体、及び、光酸発生剤を含み、
     前記感光性樹脂層に含まれる前記重合体が、酸価が10mgKOH/g以下であるアクリル樹脂であり、
     前記中間層が、水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂を含み、
     前記中間層と前記感光性樹脂層とが接している
     感光性転写材料。
    Having a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin layer;
    The photosensitive resin layer includes a polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group, and a photoacid generator,
    The polymer contained in the photosensitive resin layer is an acrylic resin having an acid value of 10 mgKOH / g or less,
    The intermediate layer includes a water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin,
    A photosensitive transfer material in which the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer are in contact with each other.
  2.  前記感光性樹脂層に含まれる前記アクリル樹脂の酸価が、0mgKOH/g~3mgKOH/gである請求項1に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 1, wherein an acid value of the acrylic resin contained in the photosensitive resin layer is 0 mgKOH / g to 3 mgKOH / g.
  3.  前記感光性樹脂層に含まれる前記アクリル樹脂が、pKaH3以上である基を有する構成単位を更に有する請求項1又は請求項2に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the acrylic resin contained in the photosensitive resin layer further includes a structural unit having a group of pKaH3 or more.
  4.  前記中間層における水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂が、水溶性アクリル樹脂である請求項1~請求項3のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin in the intermediate layer is a water-soluble acrylic resin.
  5.  前記水溶性アクリル樹脂が、酸基又は塩基性基を有し、かつ前記酸基又は塩基性基の中和率が、90モル%以上である水溶性アクリル樹脂である請求項4に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive resin according to claim 4, wherein the water-soluble acrylic resin is a water-soluble acrylic resin having an acid group or a basic group, and a neutralization rate of the acid group or the basic group is 90 mol% or more. Transfer material.
  6.  前記中間層における水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂が、アルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂である請求項1~請求項3のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin in the intermediate layer is an alkali-soluble acrylic resin.
  7.  前記アルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂の酸価が、30mgKOH/g~150mgKOH/gである請求項6に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 6, wherein the acid value of the alkali-soluble acrylic resin is from 30 mgKOH / g to 150 mgKOH / g.
  8.  前記中間層の平均膜厚が、3μm以下である請求項1~請求項7のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein an average film thickness of the intermediate layer is 3 µm or less.
  9.  前記中間層における前記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂が、ヒドロキシ基を有する樹脂を含む請求項1~請求項8のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin in the intermediate layer contains a resin having a hydroxy group.
  10.  前記中間層の前記感光性樹脂層が接している側とは反対側に、フェノール樹脂、変性セルロース樹脂、及び、ポリビニルアルコール樹脂よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の水溶性樹脂を含む水溶性樹脂層を更に有する請求項1~請求項9のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。 A water-soluble resin comprising at least one water-soluble resin selected from the group consisting of a phenol resin, a modified cellulose resin, and a polyvinyl alcohol resin on the side opposite to the side where the photosensitive resin layer is in contact with the intermediate layer The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 9, further comprising a layer.
  11.  前記酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位が、下記式Aで表される構成単位である請求項1~請求項10のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

     式A中、R31及びR32はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR31及びR32のいずれか一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R33はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
    11. The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 1, wherein the structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group is a structural unit represented by the following formula A.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

    In formula A, R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group or Represents an aryl group, and R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may combine to form a cyclic ether, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 0 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Represents.
  12.  請求項1~請求項11のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料における前記感光性樹脂層側の最外層を基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、
     前記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
     露光された前記感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、をこの順に含む
     樹脂パターンの製造方法。
    A step of bringing the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 11 into contact with a substrate and bonding the substrate;
    Pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer;
    And developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern, in this order.
  13.  請求項1~請求項11のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料における前記感光性樹脂層側の最外層を、導電層を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、
     前記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
     露光された前記感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、
     前記パターンが配置されていない領域における導電層をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含む
     回路配線の製造方法。
    A step of bringing the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 11 into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer;
    Pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer;
    Developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern;
    And a step of etching the conductive layer in a region where the pattern is not disposed, in this order.
  14.  前記導電層が、銅を含む層である請求項13に記載の回路配線の製造方法。 The method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to claim 13, wherein the conductive layer is a layer containing copper.
  15.  請求項1~請求項11のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料における前記感光性樹脂層側の最外層を、導電層を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、
     前記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
     露光された前記感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、
    前記パターンが配置されていない領域における導電層をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含む
     タッチパネルの製造方法。
    A step of bringing the outermost layer on the photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 11 into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer;
    Pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer;
    Developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern;
    And a step of etching the conductive layer in a region where the pattern is not disposed, in this order.
PCT/JP2019/018816 2018-05-29 2019-05-10 Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method WO2019230345A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020521825A JP7102517B2 (en) 2018-05-29 2019-05-10 Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
CN201980035400.7A CN112204468A (en) 2018-05-29 2019-05-10 Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing touch panel

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2018102135 2018-05-29
JP2018-102135 2018-05-29
JP2019-057799 2019-03-26
JP2019057799 2019-03-26

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019230345A1 true WO2019230345A1 (en) 2019-12-05

Family

ID=68697266

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2019/018816 WO2019230345A1 (en) 2018-05-29 2019-05-10 Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JP7102517B2 (en)
CN (1) CN112204468A (en)
TW (1) TW202005805A (en)
WO (1) WO2019230345A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2014010382A (en) * 2012-07-02 2014-01-20 Fujifilm Corp Photosensitive transfer material, cured film and production method of the same, organic electroluminescence (el) display device, liquid crystal display device and electrostatic capacitance type input device
JP2015187634A (en) * 2014-03-26 2015-10-29 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device, organic el display device, and touch panel display device
WO2016175220A1 (en) * 2015-04-28 2016-11-03 富士フイルム株式会社 Laminate and kit
WO2017057616A1 (en) * 2015-09-30 2017-04-06 富士フイルム株式会社 Dry film resist, manufacturing method for circuit wiring, circuit wiring, input device, and display device
WO2017213058A1 (en) * 2016-06-08 2017-12-14 キヤノン株式会社 Image forming optical system, and imaging device and projection device provided with same

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP4491503B2 (en) * 2003-06-18 2010-06-30 富士フイルム株式会社 Positive resist composition and pattern forming method using the same

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2014010382A (en) * 2012-07-02 2014-01-20 Fujifilm Corp Photosensitive transfer material, cured film and production method of the same, organic electroluminescence (el) display device, liquid crystal display device and electrostatic capacitance type input device
JP2015187634A (en) * 2014-03-26 2015-10-29 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device, organic el display device, and touch panel display device
WO2016175220A1 (en) * 2015-04-28 2016-11-03 富士フイルム株式会社 Laminate and kit
WO2017057616A1 (en) * 2015-09-30 2017-04-06 富士フイルム株式会社 Dry film resist, manufacturing method for circuit wiring, circuit wiring, input device, and display device
WO2017213058A1 (en) * 2016-06-08 2017-12-14 キヤノン株式会社 Image forming optical system, and imaging device and projection device provided with same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2019230345A1 (en) 2021-05-13
JP7102517B2 (en) 2022-07-19
TW202005805A (en) 2020-02-01
CN112204468A (en) 2021-01-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6999693B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, and wiring manufacturing method
WO2018179640A1 (en) Photosensitive transferring material and method for producing circuit wiring
JP2019191518A (en) Photosensitive transfer material, production method of resist pattern and method for manufacturing circuit wiring
JP2022069472A (en) Photosensitive transfer material and its manufacturing method, manufacturing method of resin pattern, as well as, manufacturing method of circuit wiring
TW201912667A (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method of manufacturing the same, and method of manufacturing circuit wiring
JPWO2019065113A1 (en) Method for manufacturing circuit wiring and method for manufacturing touch panel
WO2018179641A1 (en) Photosensitive transferring material and method for producing circuit wiring
JP6812556B2 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
WO2019160101A1 (en) Process for producing resist pattern, method for manufacturing circuit board, and method for manufacturing touch panel
JP2020126090A (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing resin pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel
JP6968273B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method.
WO2019151534A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, manufacturing method for circuit wiring, and manufacturing method for touch panel
JP6832899B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
JP6808045B2 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
WO2019230345A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
WO2019225363A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel
JP7048332B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material and its manufacturing method, resin pattern manufacturing method, and circuit wiring manufacturing method.
WO2018155192A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
CN111684359A (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19811910

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020521825

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19811910

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1